Agenda packet — Seal Beach City Council, May 11, 2026 (part 7 of 7)

2.06 DISINTEGRATED GRANITE (DG)
A. Disintegrated granite shall be free from vegetable matter and other deleterious substances and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily under water and rolling to form a firm, stable base.

B. Disintegrated granite shall be any igneous rock, which has been weathered in place, or any sedimentary material principally derived from igneous rock.

2.07 RIPRAP
A. Stone for riprap shall be quarrystone or cobblestone. Quarrystone shall be angular and cobblestone shall be rounded. Flat or elongated shapes will not be accepted unless the thickness of the individual pieces is at least 1/3 of the length. Minimum diameter 6”.

B. Stone shall be sound, durable, hard, resistant to abrasion and free from laminations, weak cleavage planes, and the undesirable effects of weathering. Stone shall be of such character that it will not disintegrate from the action or air, water, or the conditions to be met in handling and placing.

C. Stone for riprap shall be designated by class and shall meet the gradation and other requirements according to the authority having jurisdiction standards, or the latest edition of THE “GREENBOOK” STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION.

2.08 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)
A. CLSM shall be composed of cement, pozzolans, fine aggregate, water, and admixtures. CLSM shall have a low cement content, be non-segregating, self-consolidating, free-flowing and excavatable material which will result in a hardened, dense, non-settling fill and a compressive strength at 28 days of 150 to 350 psi if not otherwise shown or specified.

B. CLSM shall meet the gradation and other requirements according to the authority having jurisdiction standards, or the latest edition of THE “GREENBOOK” STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION, or as specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 STOCKPILING
A. Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet Project schedule and requirements.

B. Separate different aggregate materials with dividers or stockpile apart to prevent intermixing of aggregate types or contamination.

C. Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion or deterioration of materials

3.02 CLEANING
A. Stockpile:

1. Remove stockpile and leave area in clean and neat condition.

2. Grade Site surface to prevent freestanding surface water.

END OF SECTION 31 0516
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
EXCAVATION 31 2316-1
SECTION 31 2316 – EXCAVATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Soil densification

2. Excavating for structure foundations

3. Excavating for paving, roads, and parking area

4. Excavating for slabs on grade

5. Excavating for cast-in-place and precast structures

6. Excavating for landscaping

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Excavation Protection Plan: Describe sheeting, shoring, and bracing materials and installation required to protect excavations and adjacent structures and property; include structural calculations to support plan.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work according to authority having jurisdiction standards.

B. Licensed Professional: Professional Engineer experienced in design of specified Work and registered in the same State as the project location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Prior to work in this section, become familiar with site conditions. In the event discrepancies are found, notify the ENGINEER as to the nature and extent of the differing conditions.

B. Call local utility line information service not less than three working days before performing Work.

Request underground utilities to be located and marked within and surrounding construction areas.

C. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.

D. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as portion of final landscaping.

E. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

F. Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities indicated to remain.

3.02 EXCAVATION - GENERAL
A. Clear areas required for access to Site and execution of Work to a minimum depth as indicated on Drawings or Geotechnical Report.

B. The natural ground surface shall be cleared of all plant growth, such as trees, logs, upturned stumps, roots of downed trees, brush, grass, weeds, and all other objectionable materials, within the limits of excavation and fill slope lines. Where slopes are to be rounded, the areas shall extend to the outside limits of slope rounding.

C. Excavate material of every nature and description to the lines and grades as indicated on the drawings and/or as required for construction of the facility.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
EXCAVATION 31 2316-2
D. Provide and maintain equipment to remove and dispose of water during the course of the work of this section and keep excavations dry and free of frost or ice.

E. Project dewatering is specified elsewhere. Coordinate drainage requirements with this work.

Provide temporary drainage ditches as required and regrade as indicated at completion of project.

F. Do not interfere with 45-degree bearing splay of foundations.

G. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.

H. Trim excavation and remove loose matter.

I. Notify ENGINEER of unexpected subsurface conditions.

J. Compact disturbed load-bearing soil in direct contact with foundations to original bearing capacity, as specified in Section 31 2323 – Fill and Section 31 2333 – Trenching and Backfilling.

K. Correct over-excavated areas as specified in Section 31 2323 – Fill.

L. Stockpile topsoil at locations approved by the OWNER. Grade the surface of stockpiles remaining over rainy months to prevent ponding of water. Cover stockpiles to minimize the infiltration of water. See other provisions for erosion control.

M. All excess material not suitable or not required for backfill and grading shall be hauled off site and disposed of at a location approved by the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall make arrangements for disposal of the material at the CONTRACTOR’s expense. If a landfill permit is to be obtained by the CONTRACTOR, a copy shall be provided to the OWNER prior to commencement of disposal.

N. Obtain permission from OWNER prior to removing any excess subsoil.

3.03 STRUCTURE, ROADWAY, AND EMBANKMENT EXCAVATION
A. Excavation beneath Structures and Embankments: Except where otherwise indicated on Drawings, excavation shall be carried to the grade of the bottom of the footing or slab and prepared in accordance with the Contract Documents or Geotechnical Report.

B. Excavation beneath Paved Areas: Except where otherwise indicated on Drawings, excavation under areas to be paved shall extend to the bottom of the aggregate base and prepared in accordance with the Contract Documents or Geotechnical Report.

3.04 PIPELINE AND UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. See Section 31 2333 – Trenching and Backfilling.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Request visual inspection of bearing surfaces by inspection agency before installing subsequent Work.

3.06 PROTECTION
A. Prevent displacement or loose soil from falling into excavation and maintain soil stability.

B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing.

C. Protect structures, utilities, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that may be created by earth operations.

D. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation Work.

END OF SECTION 31 2316
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
DEWATERING 31 2319-1
SECTION 31 2319 - DEWATERING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall dewater all excavations, as required to complete the work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall secure all necessary permits to complete the requirements of this Section, including any and all Federal, State or local applicable requirements. Section Includes:

1. Dewatering system

2. Surface water control system

3. Monitoring wells

4. System operation and maintenance

5. Water disposal

1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Dewatering:

1. Lowering of ground water table and intercepting horizontal water seepage to prevent ground water from entering excavations, trenches, tunnels, and shafts.

2. Reducing piezometric pressure within strata to prevent failure or heaving of excavations, trenches, tunnels, and shafts.

3. Disposing of removed water.

B. Piezometer: A tube inserted into a vessel or pipe to indicate the height (pressure) that a liquid can rise in the tube.

C. Pitometer: A measuring device that transforms a differential pressure into an electrical output current proportional to the flow rate.

D. Surface Water Control: The removal of surface water within open excavations.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a dewatering plan to be reviewed by the ENGINEER prior to the beginning of construction activities requiring dewatering. Review by the ENGINEER of the CONTRACTOR’s design shall not be construed as a detailed analysis of the adequacy of the dewatering system, nor shall any provisions of the below requirements be construed as relieving the Contractor of its overall responsibility and liability for the work. The CONTRACTOR may be required to demonstrate the system proposed, and to verify that adequate equipment, personnel, and materials are provided to dewater the excavations at all locations and times.

B. Only request submittals needed to verify compliance with Project requirements.

C. Product Data:

1. Submit sizes, capacities, priming method, and motor characteristics for dewatering pumps.

2. Submit pumping equipment for control of surface water within excavation.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate dewatering system layout, well depths, well screen lengths, dewatering pump locations, pipe sizes and capacities, grades, filter sand gradations, surface water control devices, valves, and water disposal method and location.

2. Indicate primary, and standby, power system location and capacity.

3. Indicate layout and depth of monitoring wells, piezometers, and flow measuring devices for system performance measurement.

4. Include detailed description of dewatering and monitoring system installation procedures, and maintenance of equipment.

5. Include description of emergency procedures to follow when problems arise.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
DEWATERING 31 2319-2

6. Include detailed description of dewatering and monitoring system decommissioning and removal procedures.

E. Delegated Design Submittals:

1. Submit signed and sealed Shop Drawings prepared by a Professional Engineer, with a minimum of 5 years of experience in the field, registered in the same State as the project location.

2. Indicate design values, analyses, assumptions, and calculations, including drawdown curves, to support design.

3. Include description and profile of geology, soil, and ground water conditions.

F. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.

1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and depths of capped wells and piping abandoned in place.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with authority having jurisdiction for the following:

1. Drilling and abandoning of wells used for dewatering systems.

2. Water discharge and disposal from pumping operations.

B. Obtain permit from EPA under National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), for storm water discharge from Site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish dewatering and surface water control systems to permit Work to be completed on dry and stable subgrade.

B. Provide monitoring wells and monitoring equipment to obtain meaningful observations of conditions affecting excavation, and any adjacent structures, and any adjacent water wells.

C. Furnish standby equipment stored at Project Site and ready for immediate use upon failure of dewatering equipment.

2.02 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Design:

1. Lower water table within areas of excavation to elevations as indicated on Drawings, in no case less than 1 foot below bottom of excavation, to permit Work to be completed on dry and stable subgrade, and in such a manner as to preserve the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at the proposed bottom of the excavation.

2. Relieve hydrostatic pressures in confined water bearing strata below excavation to eliminate risk of uplift or other instability of excavation.

3. Prevent damage to adjacent properties, buildings, structures, utilities, and other facilities from construction operations.

4. Prevent removal of natural soils, loss of fines, quick condition, or softening of foundation subgrade.

5. Maintain stability of sides and bottoms of excavations and trenches.

6. Surface Water Control System: Collect and remove surface water and seepage entering excavation.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
DEWATERING 31 2319-3

2.03 DEWATERING EQUIPMENT
A. Dewatering, where required, may include the use of well points, sump pumps, generator with fuel, temporary pipelines for water disposal, rock or gravel placement, and other means. Standby pumping and power equipment shall be maintained on the jobsite.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Conduct additional borings and investigations to supplement subsurface investigations as required to complete dewatering system design.

B. Utility Service Locator:

1. Call local utility service-line information not less than three working days before performing Work.

2. Request that underground utilities be located and marked within and immediately surrounding construction areas.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect existing adjacent buildings, structures, and improvements from damage that may be caused by dewatering operations.

3.03 MONITORING WELLS
A. Install monitoring wells at locations as indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Test each monitoring well point to verify that installation is performing properly.

C. Install, calibrate, and test piezometers for proper operation.

D. Maintain accessibility to monitoring wells continuously during construction operations.

E. Maintain monitoring wells until groundwater is allowed to return to normal level.

3.04 DEWATERING SYSTEM
A. Install dewatering system in accordance with Shop Drawings.

B. Drilling:

1. Drill wells in sizes and to depths as indicated.

2. Provide temporary surface casing if required to stabilize soil while advancing well.

3.05 SURFACE WATER CONTROL SYSTEM
A. At all times, site grading shall promote drainage. Provide ditches, berms, and other devices to divert and drain surface water from excavation area.

B. Divert stormwater runoff within excavation areas into sumps and pump water into drainage channels, storm drains, settling basins, or other locations as indicated on Drawings, and in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Control and remove unanticipated water seepage into excavation.

3.06 SYSTEM OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
A. Operate dewatering system continuously until backfill is a minimum distance above normal ground water table elevation as indicated on Drawings, or backfilling is complete.

B. Provide 24-hour supervision of dewatering system by personnel skilled in operation, maintenance, and replacement of system components.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
DEWATERING 31 2319-4
C. If dewatering system cannot control water within excavation, notify OWNER or ENGINEER and stop excavation work.

D. Modify dewatering and surface water control systems if operation causes or threatens to cause damage to new construction, existing Site improvements, adjacent property, or adjacent water wells.

E. If foundation soils are disturbed or loosened by the upward seepage of water or an uncontrolled flow of water, the affected areas shall be excavated and replaced with approved drain rock, at no additional cost the OWNER.

F. Prevent flotation by maintaining a positive and continuous removal of water. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible and liable for all damages that may result from failure to adequately keep excavations dewatered.

G. Do not discontinue dewatering operations without approval of OWNER or ENGINEER.

3.07 WATER DISPOSAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain an OCSD Discharge Permit. Water shall be disposed of into the sewer manhole located on site.

3.08 SYSTEM REMOVAL
A. Remove dewatering and surface water control systems after dewatering operations are discontinued.

B. Remove, or abandon in place, all piezometers and monitoring wells, as indicated on Drawings or Shop Drawings.

3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing:

1. After dewatering system is installed, perform pumping test to determine at what point selected pumping rate lowers water level in well below pump intake.

2. Adjust pump speed, discharge volume, or both to ensure proper operation of each pump.

B. Monitoring and Recording:

1. Daily:
a. Note average discharge flow rate for each deep well, eductor header, well point, and ground water elevation.
b. Continue monitoring daily until steady state conditions occur, then monitor and record conditions weekly, or at a frequency as indicated on Drawings or Shop Drawings.

2. Sand Content:
a. Monitor ground water discharge for sand content.
b. Sample and test water from each well weekly for sand content, or at a frequency as indicated on Drawings or Shop Drawings.
c. Maximum Permitted Sand Content: 5 ppm, or as indicated on Drawings or Shop Drawings.

3. Contaminates:
a. Monitor ground water discharge for contamination while performing pumping in vicinity of potentially contaminated sites.
b. Sample and test water weekly for contaminates, or at a frequency as indicated on Drawings or Shop Drawings.

4. Existing Adjacent Buildings, Structures, and Improvements:
a. Survey weekly during dewatering to detect movement in comparison to original elevations, or at a frequency as indicated on Drawings or Shop Drawings. b. Notify OWNER or ENGINEER immediately of any measured movement.

END OF SECTION 31 2319
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
FILL 31 2323-1
SECTION 31 2323 – FILL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Backfilling building perimeter to subgrade elevations

2. Backfilling Site structures to subgrade elevations

3. Fill under slabs on grade

4. Fill under paving

5. Fill for over-excavation

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: In air-tight containers, 10 lb. sample of each type of fill, or as requested by testing laboratory.

B. Materials Source: Name of imported fill materials suppliers.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work according to authority having jurisdiction standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Backfill Materials: As indicated within the Contract Documents.

B. Subsoil Fill: As specified in Section 31 0513 – Soils for Earthwork.

C. Structural Fill: As specified in Section 31 0513 – Soils for Earthwork and 31 05 16 – Aggregates for Earthwork.

D. Granular Fill: As specified in Section 31 0516 – Aggregates for Earthwork.

E. Flowable Fill: As specified in Section 31 2323.33 – Flowable Fill.

2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Geotextile Fabric: As specified in Section 31 0519.13 - Geotextiles for Earthwork.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that any sub-drainage, damp-proofing, and waterproofing installations have been inspected.

B. Verify that any underground tanks are anchored to their own foundations to avoid flotation after backfilling.

C. Verify structural integrity of unsupported walls to support loads imposed by fill.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Compact subgrade to specified density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.

B. Soft Subgrade:

1. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
FILL 31 2323-2

2. Backfill with Aggregate Base and compact to density equal to or greater than specified requirements for subsequent fill material.

C. Scarify subgrade surface to depth as indicated on Drawings or recommended by Geotechnical Engineer.

3.03 BACKFILLING AND GRADING
A. Do not allow or cause any work performed or installed to be covered up or enclosed prior to required tests, inspections, and approvals. Should any work be enclosed or covered up, the work shall be uncovered at the CONTRACTOR’s expense.

B. Backfilling and grading operations shall not take place when weather conditions and moisture content of fill materials prevent the attainment of specified density. Vertical curves or roundings at abrupt changes in slope shall be established as approved by ENGINEER. Bring all graded areas to a relatively smooth, even grade and slope by blading or dragging. Remove high spots and fill depressions.

C. Backfill areas to contours and elevations as indicated on Drawings.

D. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement.

E. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen, or spongy subgrade surfaces, and do not backfill with frozen materials.

F. Backfill materials shall be placed and spread evenly in layers. When compaction is achieved using mechanical equipment, the layers shall be evenly spread so that when each layer compacted shall not exceed 6 inches in thickness. The compaction lift depth may be adjusted at the direction of the Geotechnical Engineer.

G. Structures:

1. Backfill shall not be dropped directly upon any structure or pipe.

2. Backfill shall not be placed around or upon any structure until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to withstand the loads imposed.

3. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place.

4. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 percent slope for minimum distance of 10 feet, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

H. Make gradual grade changes, and blend slope into level areas.

I. Remove surplus backfill materials from Site.

J. Leave fill material stockpile areas free of excess fill materials.

3.04 TOPSOIL FILL
A. Scarify prepared subgrade to a depth of 4 inches immediately prior to placing topsoil.

B. Place topsoil in areas to be seeded to the depths indicated, with a minimum depth of six inches.

Place loose, do not compact unless otherwise specified.

C. Do not place in wet or muddy conditions.

3.05 COMPACTION
A. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

B. Embankment Construction: All fill material within 3 feet of the top of fill elevations shall be compacted 95 percent maximum density unless otherwise specified. All fill material below the 3- foot limit to 90 percent maximum density unless otherwise specified.

C. Backfill beneath structures and hydraulic structures: 95 percent maximum density unless otherwise specified.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
FILL 31 2323-3
D. Beneath paved areas or structures: 95 percent maximum density unless otherwise specified.

E. Not beneath paved areas or structures: 90 percent maximum density unless otherwise specified.

3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of Backfilling within Structural Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.

B. Top Surface of Backfilling under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1/2 inch from required elevations.

C. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.

3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing shall be the Owner’s responsibility unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.

B. All field soils testing will be done by a testing laboratory as specified in the Contract Documents.

C. Perform laboratory material tests according to Method C of ASTM D1557. Where cohesionless, free draining soil material is required to be compacted to a percentage of relative density, the calculation of relative density will be determined in accordance with ASTM D 4253 and D 4254.

D. In-Place Compaction Testing:

1. Density Tests: ASTM D1556/D1556M or ASTM D6938.

2. Moisture Tests: ASTM D6031/6031M.

E. If tests indicate that Work does not meet specified requirements, recondition moisture content as required, recompact, and retest until specified requirements are achieved. Where reconditioning and recompaction do not achieve specified requirements, remove and replace nonconforming Work, compact, and retest until specified requirements are achieved. Perform corrective work and retesting at no additional cost to Owner.

F. Testing Frequency: As indicated on Drawings or recommended by Geotechnical Engineer.

G. Proof-roll compacted fill surfaces when recommended by Geotechnical Engineer.

H. Control operations by testing to verify and confirm that compaction work complies, and is complying at all times, with requirements specified in this Section concerning compaction, control, and testing.

I. If Compaction Fails to Meet Specified Requirements: Perform remedial work as recommended by Geotechnical Engineer and accepted by Owner’s Representative by one or more of the following methods:

1. Scarify, moisture-condition (including aeration/drying or moisture addition), recompact, and retest.

2. Remove and replace nonconforming material with suitable material, compact, and retest.

3. Undercut (overexcavate) unstable, soft, yielding, pumping, or wet material as specified in Paragraph J.

J. Soft/Unstable/Pumping Subgrade (including “pumping” soil):

1. Identify soft/unstable/pumping areas by observation during compaction/proof-rolling and by deflection, weaving, rutting, or pumping of fines/water under construction equipment.

2. Immediately stop placement over affected areas, protect the area from additional disturbance and moisture intrusion, and notify Owner’s Representative. Do not cover unsuitable material.

3. Determine limits and corrective action with Geotechnical Engineer.

4. Minimum Undercut/Overexcavation: Unless a greater depth is required by Drawings or recommended by Geotechnical Engineer, undercut a minimum of 12 inches below the affected subgrade or fill surface. Extend undercut laterally a minimum of 24 inches beyond the observed limits of the unstable/pumping condition to provide a stable transition.

5. Backfill undercut areas with suitable material capable of being compacted to specified requirements (or other material accepted by Owner’s Representative), compact, and retest.

Repeat corrective measures as required until stable and passing results are achieved.

6. Corrective measures required to achieve specified compaction and stability, and associated retesting, shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner. If Owner specifically directs FILL 31 2323-4
excavation beyond plan lines/grades as extra work (e.g., differing site condition), measurement and payment, if any, shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents.

3.08 PROTECTION
A. Reshape and recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic during construction.

END OF SECTION 31 2323
FLOWABLE FILL 31 2323.33-1
SECTION 31 2323.33 - FLOWABLE FILL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Flowable fill for the following:
a. Structure backfill
b. Utility bedding
c. Utility backfill
d. Filling abandoned utilities

1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Utility: Any buried pipe, duct, conduit, manhole, tank, or cable.

B. Flowable Fill: A self-compacted, self-leveling, lean cement concrete fill. For purposes of this section, a fill utilizing Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM).

C. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM): A self-consolidating, cementing material used primarily as a backfill as an alternative to compacted fill. CLSM is intended to result in a compressive strength of 1200 psi or less.

D. Excavatable Flowable Fill: CLSM fill used where future excavation may be required such as fill for utility trenches, bridge abutments, and culverts.

E. Non-excavatable Flowable Fill: CLSM fill used where future excavation is not anticipated such as fill below structure foundations and filling abandoned utilities.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials Source: Name of flowable fill materials suppliers.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

C. Mix Design:

1. Furnish flowable fill mix design for each specified strength. Furnish separate mix designs when admixtures are required for the following:
a. Flowable fill Work during hot and cold weather.
b. Air entrained flowable fill Work.

2. Identify design mix ingredients, proportions, properties, admixtures, and tests.

3. Furnish test results to certify flowable fill mix design properties meet or exceed specified requirements.

D. Delivery Tickets:

1. Furnish duplicate delivery tickets indicating actual materials delivered to Project Site.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work according to authority having jurisdiction standards.

B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with 3 years' experience.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install flowable fill during inclement weather or when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
FLOWABLE FILL 31 2323.33-2

1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements before installing flowable fill to establish quantities required to complete Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FLOWABLE FILL (CLSM)
A. Furnish materials according to authority having jurisdiction standards.

B. Flowable Fill: Excavatable type and non-excavatable type as indicated on Drawings or as specified elsewhere. Provide non-excavatable type when not designated otherwise.

2.02 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150.

B. Fine Aggregates: ASTM C33.

C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.

2.03 ADMIXTURES
A. Furnish materials according to authority having jurisdiction standards.

B. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260.

C. Chemical Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M.

D. Fly Ash: ASTM C618 Class C or F obtained from residue of electric generating plant using ground or powdered coal.

E. Plasticizing: ASTM C1017/C1017M.

2.04 MIXES
A. CLSM shall be proportioned by the ready mixed concrete supplier on the basis of field experience and/or laboratory trial mixtures to produce a cohesive and non-segregating mixture meeting the specified properties.

B. Mix and deliver flowable fill according to ASTM C94/C94M, Option C.

C. Flowable Fill (CLSM) Design Mix:

1. Cement Content:
a. Excavatable: 75 to 100 lb./cu. yd.
b. Non-Excavatable: 100 to 150 lb./cu. yd.

2. Fly Ash Content:
a. Excavatable: None
b. Non-Excavatable: 150-600 pcf

3. Water Content:
a. Excavatable: As specified
b. Non-Excavatable: As specified

4. Air Entrainment:
a. Excavatable: 5 to 35 percent
b. Non-Excavatable:5 to 15 percent

5. 28-Day Compressive Strength:
a. Excavatable: Minimum 50 psi, Maximum 125 psi
b. Non-Excavatable: Minimum 150 psi, Maximum 350 psi

6. Unit Mass (Wet):
a. Excavatable: 80 to 110 pcf
b. Non-Excavatable: 100 to 125 pcf
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
FLOWABLE FILL 31 2323.33-3

7. Temperature, Minimum, at Point of Delivery:
a. Excavatable: 50 degrees F
b. Non-Excavatable: 50 degrees F
D. Provide water content in design mix to produce self-leveling, non-segregating, flowable fill material at time of placement.

E. Design mix air entrainment and unit mass are for laboratory design mix and source quality control only.

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and analyze properties of flowable fill design mix and certify results for the following:

1. Design mix proportions by weight of each material.

2. Aggregate: ASTM C33 for material properties and gradation.

3. Properties of plastic flowable fill design mix including:
a. Temperature
b. Slump
c. Air entrainment
d. Wet unit mass
e. Yield
f. Cement factor

4. Properties of hardened flowable fill design mix including:
a. Compressive strength at 1 day, 7 days, and 28 days. Report compressive strength of each specimen and average specimen compressive strength. b. Unit mass for each specimen and average specimen unit mass at time of compressive strength testing.

B. Prepare delivery tickets containing following information:

1. Project designation

2. Date

3. Time

4. Class and quantity of flowable fill

5. Actual batch proportions

6. Free moisture content of aggregate

7. Quantity of water withheld
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify excavation or trenching is complete.

B. Verify utility installation is complete and tested before placing flowable fill.

C. Verify excavation is dry and dewatering system is operating if applicable.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Support and restrain utilities to prevent movement and flotation during installation of flowable fill.

B. Protect structures and utilities from damage caused by hydraulic pressure of flowable fill before fill hardens.

C. Protect utilities to prevent intrusion of flowable fill.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
FLOWABLE FILL 31 2323.33-4

3.04 INSTALLATION - FILL, BEDDING, AND BACKFILL
A. Place flowable fill by chute, pumping or other methods approved by authority having jurisdiction.

1. When required, place flowable fill under water using tremie procedure.

2. Do not place flowable fill through flowing water.

B. Place flowable fill in lifts to prevent lateral pressures from exceeding structural capacity of structures and utilities.

C. Place flowable fill evenly on both sides of utilities to maintain alignment.

D. Place flowable fill to elevations indicated without vibration or other means of compaction.

3.05 INSTALLATION - FILLING ABANDONED UTILITIES
A. Verify pipes and conduits are not clogged and are sufficiently empty to permit gravity installation of flowable fill for entire length indicated to be filled.

B. Seal lower end of pipes and conduits by method to contain flowable fill and to vent trapped air caused by filling operations.

C. Place flowable fill using method to ensure there are no voids.

1. Fill pipes and conduits from high end.

2. Fill manholes, tanks, and other structures from grade level access points.

D. After filling pipes and conduits seal both ends.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform inspection and testing according to ASTM C94/C94M.

1. Take samples for tests for every 150 cu yd of flowable fill, or fraction thereof, installed each day.

2. Sample, prepare and test four compressive strength test cylinders according to ASTM D4832.

Test one specimen at 3 days, one at 7 days, and two at 28 days.

3. Measure temperature at point of delivery when samples are prepared.

B. Perform in place penetration (density) tests using hand held penetrometer to measure penetration resistance of hardened flowable fill, according to ASTM C403. Or perform in-place density tests using nuclear test device, according to ASTM C1040.

1. Perform tests at locations as directed by Geotechnical Engineer.

C. Defective Flowable Fill: Fill failing to meet following test requirements or fill delivered without following documentation.

1. Test Requirements:
a. Minimum temperature at point of delivery.
b. Compressive strength requirements for each type of fill.

2. Documentation: Duplicate delivery tickets.

3.07 CLEANING
A. Remove spilled and excess flowable fill from Project Site.

B. Restore facilities and Site areas damaged or contaminated by flowable fill installation to existing condition before installation.

END OF SECTION 31 2323.33
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-1
SECTION 31 2333 – TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Excavating trenches, fine grading, pipe bedding

2. Compacted fill from top bedding to subgrade elevations

3. Backfilling and compaction

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: In air-tight containers, 10 lb.sample of each type of fill, as requested by testing laboratory.

B. Materials Source: Name of imported fill materials suppliers.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work according to authority having jurisdiction standards.

B. Prepare excavation protection plan under direct supervision of professional engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the state of the project.

1.04 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.05 COORDINATION
A. Verify Work associated with lower elevation utilities is complete before placing higher elevation utilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FILL MATERIALS
A. Subsoil Fill: As specified in Section 31 0513 – Soils for Earthwork.

B. Structural Fill: As specified in Section 31 0513 – Soils for Earthwork and 31 0516 – Aggregates for Earthwork.

C. Granular Fill: As specified in Section 31 0516 – Aggregates for Earthwork.

D. Flowable Fill: As specified in Section 31 2323.33 – Flowable Fill.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 LINES AND GRADES
A. Lay pipes to lines and grades indicated.

1. ENGINEER may make changes in lines, grades, and depths of utilities when changes are required for Project conditions.

B. Use laser-beam instrument with qualified operator to establish lines and grades.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Call local utility line information service not less than three working days before performing Work.

Request underground utilities to be located and marked within and surrounding construction areas.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-2
B. Insert local utility's locating service telephone number.

C. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.

D. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as portion of final landscaping.

E. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

F. Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities indicated to remain.

G. Establish temporary traffic control and detours when trenching is performed in public right-of-way.

Relocate controls and reroute traffic as required during progress of Work.

H. Before laying pipes or electrical conduits in fill, place fill and compact it to not less than 1 foot above top of pipe or conduit. After placing and compacting fill, excavate through fill then fine grade as required in this Section.

3.03 EXPLORATORY TEST PITS
A. The Contractor shall dig such exploratory test pits as may be necessary in advance of excavation to determine the exact location and elevation of subsurface structures, pipelines, duct banks, conduits, and other obstructions which are likely to be encountered or need to be connected to and shall make acceptable provision for their protection, support, and maintenance of their continued operation.

B. Excavate and expose buried points of connection to existing utilities where indicated on the Drawings. Excavation shall be performed prior to preparation of Shop Drawings for connections and before fabrication of pipe, and the data obtained shall be used in preparing Shop Drawings.

C. Data, including dates, locations excavated, and sketches, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER within one week of excavation.

D. Damage to utilities from excavation activities shall be repaired at the CONTRACTOR’s expense.

3.04 TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. Excavate subsoil required for trench.

B. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/6 cu yd, measured by volume. Remove larger material as specified in Contract Documents. If bottom of excavation is found to consist of rock or any material that by reason of its hardness cannot be excavated to provide uniform bearing surface, remove such rock or other material to a depth of not less than 4 inches below bottom of pipe and refill to grade with aggregate base course material or sand placed at uniform density, with minimum possible compaction, at no additional cost.

C. Remove water or materials that interfere with Work.

D. Do not advance open trench more than 200 feet ahead of installed pipe.

E. Cut trenches to width indicated, or sufficiently wide to enable installation and allow inspection.

If, because of soil conditions, safety requirements or other reasons, trench width at top of pipe is increased beyond width specified, upgrade laying conditions or install stronger pipe designed in conformance with the appropriate pipe specification section for the increased trench width, without additional cost.

F. Excavate bottom of trenches maximum 24 inches wider than outside diameter of pipe.

G. Excavate trenches to depth indicated on Drawings. Provide uniform and continuous bearing and support for bedding material and pipe, conduit, or other utilities.

H. Do not interfere with 45-degree bearing splay of foundations.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-3
I. When Project conditions permit, slope side walls of excavation starting 24 inches above top of pipe.

When side walls cannot be sloped, provide sheeting and shoring to protect excavation as specified in this Section.

J. When subsurface materials at bottom of trench are loose or soft, excavate to greater depth as directed by ENGINEER until suitable material is encountered.

K. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with engineered fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material. If bottom of excavation is found to consist of soft or unstable material which is incapable of properly supporting pipe, remove such material to a depth and for the length required, as determined by the ENGINEER, and then refill trench to grade with aggregate base course or sand, compacted to 90 percent of maximum density.

L. Trim excavation. Remove loose matter.

M. Correct areas over excavated areas with compacted backfill as specified for authorized excavation or replace with fill concrete as directed by ENGINEER.

N. Potable and Non-Potable Water Pipe Appurtenances:

1. Lay in trenches separate from those used for sewers.

2. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, lay in trenches having cover of not less than 3 feet below surface of ground and located at distance of not less than 6 feet from any parallel sewer trench, or as required by authority having jurisdiction.

O. At Road Crossings or Existing Driveways: Make provision for trench crossings at these points, either by means of backfills, tunnels, or temporary bridges.

P. Remove excess subsoil not intended for reuse, from Site.

Q. Obtain permission from OWNER prior to removing any excess subsoil.

3.05 TRENCH FINE GRADING
A. For Pipes 16 Inches in Nominal Diameter and Under: Unless otherwise specified, accurately grade bottom of trench to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe, on undisturbed soil at every point along pipe's entire length, except for portions of pipe where it is necessary to excavate for bells and for proper sealing of pipe joints.

B. For Pipe over 16 Inches in Diameter:

1. Over-excavate bottom of trench by at least 4 inches, or 1/12 outside diameter of pipe, whichever is greater.

2. Fill overcut with bedding material specified herein, and fine graded as specified above.

3. Place bedding material at uniform density, with minimum possible compaction.

4. Where trench excavation is below grade of bedding material, restore trench bottom to proper grade by backfilling and compacting backfill to 95 percent of maximum density, at no additional cost. Use bedding material as specified in this Section.

C. Depressions for Joints: Make in accordance with recommendations of joint manufacturer for particular joint used.

3.06 SHEETING AND SHORING
A. Sheet, shore, and brace excavations to prevent danger to persons, structures and adjacent properties and to prevent caving, erosion, and loss of surrounding subsoil.

B. Support trenches more than 5 feet deep excavated through unstable, loose, or soft material. Provide sheeting, shoring, bracing, or other protection to maintain stability of excavation.

C. If a moveable trench shield is used during excavation, pipe installation and backfill operations, the shield shall be moved by lifting the shield free of the trench bottom or backfill and then moving the B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-4
shield horizontally. No trench shields shall be dragged along the trench causing damage or displacement to the trench sidewalls, the pipe, or the bedding and backfill.

D. Design sheeting and shoring to be removed at completion of excavation Work.

E. Repair damage caused by failure of sheeting, shoring, or bracing and for settlement of filled excavations or adjacent soil.

F. Repair damage to new and existing Work from settlement, water or earth pressure or other causes resulting from inadequate sheeting, shoring, or bracing.

3.07 TRENCH BACKFILLING
A. Pipe Zone Backfill:

1. The pipe zone is defined as that portion of the vertical trench cross-section lying between a plane below the bottom surface of the pipe and a plane at a point above the top surface of the pipe. The bedding is defined as that portion of pipe zone backfill material between the trench sub-grade and the bottom of the pipe. The embedment is defined as that portion of the pipe zone backfill material between the bedding and a level line.

2. After compacting the bedding, perform a final trim using a laser or approved method for establishing grade, such that each pipe section when first laid will be continually in contact with the bedding along the extreme bottom of the pipe. Excavation for pipe bells and welding shall be made as required.

3. The pipe zone shall be backfilled with the indicated backfill material. Care to prevent damage to the pipeline coating, cathodic bonds and the pipe itself during the installation and backfill operations shall be exercised.

B. Trench Zone Backfill: After the pipe zone backfills have been placed, backfilling of the trench zone may proceed. The trench zone is defined as that portion of the vertical trench cross-section lying as indicated between a plane above the top surface of the pipe and a plane at a point, 18 inches below the finished surface grade, or if the trench is under pavement, 18 inches below the roadway subgrade.

C. Final Backfill: Final backfill is all backfill in the trench cross-sectional area within 18 inches of finished grade, or if the trench is under pavement, all backfill within 18 inches of the roadway subgrade.

D. Backfill shall not be dropped directly upon any pipe. Backfill shall not be placed around or upon any structure until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to withstand the loads imposed.

E. Except for drainrock materials being placed in over-excavated areas or trenches, backfill shall be placed after all water is removed from the excavation and the trench sidewalls and bottom have been dried to moisture content suitable for compaction.

F. Immediately prior to placement of backfill materials, the bottoms and sidewalls of trenches and structure excavations shall have all loose sloughing, or caving soil and rock materials removed.

Trench sidewalls shall consist of excavated surfaces that are in a relatively undisturbed condition before placement of backfill materials.

G. During spreading, each layer shall be thoroughly mixed as necessary to promote uniformity of material in each layer. Pipe zone backfill materials shall be manually spread around the pipe so when compacted the pipe zone backfill will provide uniform bearing and side support.

H. Where the backfill material moisture content is below the optimum moisture content, water shall be added before or during spreading until the moisture content is between optimum and 3% over the optimum.

I. Where the backfill material moisture content is too high to permit the specified degree of compaction the material shall be dried until the moisture content is between optimum and 3% over the optimum.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-5
J. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen fill materials.

K. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen, or spongy subgrade surfaces.

L. Place material in continuous layers as follows:

1. Subsoil Fill: Maximum 8 inches compacted depth, unless specified elsewhere.

2. Structural Fill: Maximum 6 inches compacted depth, unless specified elsewhere.

3. Granular Fill: Maximum 6 inches compacted depth, unless specified elsewhere.

M. Employ placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation perimeter drainage, utilities in trench, and other installed work.

N. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

O. Do not leave more than 50 feet of trench open at end of working day.

P. Protect open trench to protect personnel and the public.

3.08 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of Backfilling within Structural Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations B. Top Surface of Backfilling under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1/2 inch from required elevations C. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations

3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing shall be the Contractor’s responsibility unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.

B. All field soils testing will be done by a testing laboratory as specified in the Contract Documents.

D. In-Place Compaction Testing:

1. Density Tests: ASTM D1556/D1556M or ASTM D6938.

2. Moisture Tests: ASTM D6031/6031M.

E. If tests indicate that Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, compact, and retest.

F. Testing Frequency: As indicated on Drawings or recommended by Geotechnical Engineer.

G. Proof-roll compacted fill surfaces when recommended by Geotechnical Engineer.

I. If Compaction Fails to Meet Specified Requirements: Perform remedial work by one of the following methods.

1. Remove and replace backfill at proper density.

2. Bring density up to specified level by other means acceptable to the ENGINEER.

J. Retesting:

1. Costs of Retesting: Costs of retesting required to confirm and verify that remedial work has brought compaction within specified requirements shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.

2. Tests during performance of remedial work shall be at a frequency double amount specified for initial confirmation tests.

K. Frequency of Tests:

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-6

1. For Trenches: At each test location include tests for each type or class of backfill from bedding to finish grade.

2. In Open Fields: Two every 1,000 linear feet.

3. Along Dirt or Gravel Road or off Traveled Right-of-way: Two every 500 linear feet.

4. Crossing Paved Roads: Two locations along each crossing.

5. Under Pavement Cuts or within 2 Feet of Pavement Edges: one location every 400 linear feet.

L. Leak Testing Pipe:

1. After bedding the pipe, the CONTRACTOR has the option to either immediately perform leak testing or backfill to surface, at his own risk, and then leak test pipe.

2. If pipe does not pass test, uncover pipe, locate leaks, repair and retest, repeating until pipe section under test passes.

M. Leak Testing Pipe:

1. After bedding the pipe, the CONTRACTOR has the option to either immediately perform leak testing or backfill to surface, at his own risk, and then leak test pipe.

2. If pipe does not pass test, uncover pipe, locate leaks, repair and retest, repeating until pipe section under test passes.

3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic during construction.

END OF SECTION 31 2333
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 31 2500-1
SECTION 31 2500 - EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Diversion Channels

2. Rock Energy Dissipator

3. Paved Energy Dissipator

4. Rock Basin

5. Rock Barriers

6. Sediment Ponds

7. Sediment Traps

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposed Mix Design: Furnish design of each class of concrete for review prior to commencement of Work.

B. Samples:

1. Two samples or rock, minimum 5 tons each or one-half total Project quantity, whichever is smaller. Provide one sample in place at construction Site and provide other sample at quarry. Construction Site sample may be incorporated into Work. Samples will be used as reference for judging size, and graduation of rock supplied and placed.

1.03 ROCK MATERIALS
A. Furnish materials according to Owner standards. Permeant B. Rock: Sound, hard and angular shape; well graded; without shale seams, structural defects and foreign substances; with width and thickness greater than one third its length; minimum specific gravity of 2.5, as determined according to AASHTO T88, bulk saturated, and surface dry basis.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DIVERSION CHANNELS
A. Windrow excavated material on low side of channel.

B. Compact to 95 percent maximum density.

C. On entire channel area, apply soil supplements and sow seed as specified elsewhere in Contract Documents.

D. Mulch seeded areas with hay as specified elsewhere in Contract Documents.

E. Install Work according to Owner standards.

3.02 ROCK ENERGY DISSIPATOR
A. Excavate to indicated depth of rock lining or nominal placement thickness as follows. Remove loose, unsuitable material below bottom of rock lining, then replace with suitable material.

Thoroughly compact and finish entire foundation area to firm, even surface.

B. Lay and overlay geotextile fabric over substrate. Lay fabric parallel to flow from upstream to downstream. Overlap edges upstream over downstream and upslope over downslope. Cover fabric as soon as possible and in no case leave fabric exposed more than four weeks.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 31 2500-2
C. Carefully place rock on geotextile fabric to produce an even distribution of pieces, with minimum of voids and without tearing geotextile.

D. Unless indicated otherwise, place full course thickness in one operation to prevent segregation and to avoid displacement of underlying material. Arrange individual rocks for uniform distribution.

E. Install Work according to Owner standards.

3.03 PAVED ENERGY DISSIPATOR
A. Embed stones or blocks in plastic concrete at indicated separation on slopes and channel bottom.

B. Pave in uniform 10 foot lengths or sections.

C. Pave in shorter sections as necessary for closures or curves.

D. Place pre-molded expansion joint filler, 1/2 inch thick, cut to conform to paving cross sections, at ends of curved sections at intervals of not more than 100 feet, at end of day's work, and where paving is adjacent to rigid structure. Use joint filler with depth of 1/2 inch less than paving depth and press firmly against adjacent concrete.

E. Form intermediate joints between sections, with two thicknesses of bituminous paper cut neatly to paving cross section.

F. Seal joint top with joint sealer.

G. Install Work according to Owner standards.

3.04 ROCK BASIN
A. Construct generally according to rock energy dissipator requirements to indicated shape and depth.

Rock courses may be placed in several operations but minimum depth of initial course must be 3 feet or greater.

B. Install Work according to Owner standards.

3.05 ROCK BARRIER
A. Determine length required for ditch or depression slope and excavate, compact and foundation area to firm, even surface.

B. Produce an even distribution of rock pieces, with minimum voids to indicated shape, height and slope.

C. Construct coarse aggregate filter blanket against upstream face of rock barrier to indicated thickness.

D. Install Work according to Owner standards.

3.06 SEDIMENTATION POND
A. Clear and grub storage area and embankment foundation area site as specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

B. Excavate key trench for full length of dam. Excavate emergency spillway in natural ground.

C. Install pipe spillway, with anti-seep collar attached, at location indicated.

D. Place forms, and reinforcing for concrete footing at bottom of riser pipe. Construction of embankment and trench prior to placing pipe is not required.

E. Do not use coarse aggregate as backfill material around pipe. Backfill pipe with suitable embankment material to prevent dam leakage along pipe.

F. Construct rock basin at outlet end of pipe, as specified in this Section.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 31 2500-3
G. On entire sedimentation pond area, apply soil supplements and sow seed as specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

H. Mulch seeded areas with hay as specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

I. Install Work according to Owner standards.

3.07 SEDIMENT TRAPS
A. Construct trap by excavating and forming embankments.

B. Place coarse aggregate or rock at outlet as indicated on Drawings.

C. Place geotextile fabric, as specified for rock energy dissipator.

D. On entire sediment trap area, apply soil supplements and sow seed as specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

E. Mulch seeded areas with hay as specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

F. Install Work according to Owner standards.

3.08 SITE STABILIZATION
A. Incorporate indicated erosion control devices into Project at earliest practicable time.

B. Construct, stabilize and activate erosion controls before Site disturbance within tributary areas of those controls.

C. Stockpile and waste pile heights shall not exceed 35 feet. Slope stockpile sides at 2:1 or flatter.

D. Stabilize any disturbed area of affected erosion control devices on which activity has ceased and which will remain exposed for more than 20 days.

E. Stabilize diversion channels, sediment traps, and stockpiles immediately.

3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect erosion control devices on a weekly basis and after each runoff event. Make necessary repairs to ensure erosion and sediment controls are in good working order.

3.10 CLEANING
A. When sediment accumulation in sedimentation structures has reached a point one-third depth of sediment structure or device, remove and dispose of sediment.

B. Do not damage structure or device during cleanin
C. g operations.

D. Do not permit sediment to erode into construction or Site areas or natural waterways.

E. Clean channels when depth of sediment reaches approximately one half channel depth.

3.11 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect paving from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Protect paving from elements, flowing water, or other disturbance until curing is completed.

END OF SECTION 31 2500
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-1
SECTION 32 1216 - ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Perform all WORK associated with Asphalt Concrete (AC) Pavement and base as shown and specified herein including all labor, materials, equipment supplies, and facilities associated with providing a finished product satisfying all the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Verify all requirements with Geotechnical Report and notify the Engineer immediately if discrepancies exist.

1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Codes: All codes, as referenced herein.

B. References: These specifications refer to the California Department of Transportation (Caltrans) Standard Specifications, referred to herein as the Standard Specifications.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit, in writing, materials testing reports, mix designs and other pertinent information satisfactory to the ENGINEER demonstrating that materials and methods it proposes to utilize will comply with the referenced provisions of the Standard Specifications, in accordance Submittal Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS
A. Aggregate Base: Materials for aggregate base shall be maximum ¾ inch Class 2 Aggregate Base as specified in Section 26-1.02B of the State Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the project soils report.

B. Asphalt Concrete:

1. AC shall be Type A, 1/2" (12.5mm) max medium and shall conform to the provisions of Section 39 of the State Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the project soils report.

2. AC shall have a viscosity grade of AR-4000 as specified in Section 92 of the State Standard Specification.

3. Asphalt content as a percentage of the dry aggregate weight shall be approved by the ENGINEER. In the absence of such a determination, the amount of asphalt binder to be mixed with the aggregate shall be between 5.6% and 5.9% by weight of the dry aggregate.

C. Pavement Marking Paint: Pavement marking paint shall be an approved product having a proven record of performance and durability.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR NEW ROADWAY PAVEMENT A. Subgrade Preparation shall comply with the soils report.

B. Aggregate Base: Aggregate base shall be provided where shown and to the thickness shown.

Construction of the aggregate base course shall be as indicated on the drawings. AB thickness to be determined after R-value tests are completed using samples of soil obtained from completed subgrade.

C. Asphalt Concrete
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-2

1. AC paving shall be constructed as indicated on the drawings. AC thickness to be minimum a of 2.5”, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. AB shall be as indicated on the drawings. AB thickness to be minimum 10” unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

2. Alternate compacting equipment or substitution of a vibratory roller for a pneumatic-tired roller must be approved by the ENGINEER.

3. All mixtures shall be spread at a temperature of not less than 250 degrees Fahrenheit. Base material compaction shall be completed before the mix reaches 200 degrees Fahrenheit.

D. Pavement Marking Paint: Application of the paint shall be in accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions. Traffic markings obliterated by the WORK shall be repainted, unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER.

3.02 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR PAVEMENT REPAIR
A. Preparation of the site for pavement repair shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. New pavement shall be placed according to the provisions of this Section and shall be of similar materials and pavement thickness as existing adjacent pavement except that the new pavement section surface shall be 1/8-inch higher than adjacent pavement.

C. Diamond saw cut joining pavement edges and tack coat edges.

END OF SECTION 32 1216
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-1
SECTION 32 1313 - CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Concrete paving for:
a. Concrete sidewalks
b. Concrete curbs and gutters
c. Concrete parking areas and roads

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:

1. Submit data on concrete materials, per Specification Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Design Data:

1. Submit concrete mix design for each concrete strength. Submit separate mix designs when admixtures are required.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.

B. Perform Work according to TUD standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE PAVING
A. Form Materials:

1. Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301.

B. Reinforcement:

1. Reinforcing Steel and Wire Fabric: As specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

C. Concrete Materials:

1. Concrete Materials: Per Section 03 0300, and as specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify gradients and elevations of base.

B. Verify subgrade is ready to support paving and imposed loads.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Moisten substrate to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Placing Concrete:

1. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and Section 03 3000.

2. Do not disturb reinforcing or formwork components during concrete placement.

3. Place concrete continuously between predetermined joints.

4. Place bumpers secure.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-2
B. Finishing:

1. Light broom, unless specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

2. Apply curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing.

3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.

B. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION 32 1313
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS, SIDEWALKS, AND DRIVEWAYS 32 1600-1 SECTION 32 1600 - CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS, SIDEWALKS, AND DRIVEWAYS PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Concrete curbs, gutters, sidewalks, driveways, access ramps, and alley intersections.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Construct various types of concrete curb, gutter, sidewalk, driveways, and alley intersections to dimensions and details indicated on the Drawings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit data completely describing products.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete: 3,000 psi, conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 03 3300.

B. Curb Finishing Mortar: 1 part Portland cement to two parts sand.

C. Form Release Material: Light oil or other releasing agent of type which does not discolor concrete or interfere with the application of finishing mortar to curb tops and faces.

D. Joint Materials:

1. Expansion: Comply with requirements as specified in Section 03 0150.

2. Construction: Steel dividers or plastic inserts.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Verify field conditions, including subgrade condition and interferences, before beginning construction.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation:

1. Subgrade:
a. Construct and compact true to grades and lines indicated on the Drawings. b. Remove soft or unsuitable material to depth of not less than 6 inches below subgrade elevation and replace with satisfactory material following Division 31.

2. Forms and Subgrade: Water immediately in advance of placing concrete.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Special Techniques:

1. CONTRACTOR's Option:
a. Construct concrete curbs and gutters by conventional use of forms, or by means of curb and gutter machine when acceptable to the ENGINEER.
b. When use of machines designed specifically for work of this Section are accepted by the ENGINEER, results must be equal to or better than those produced by use of forms.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS, SIDEWALKS, AND DRIVEWAYS 32 1600-2 c. Applicable requirements of construction that apply to use of forms also apply to use of machines.
d. Discontinue use of machines when results are not satisfactory to the ENGINEER.

B. Forms:

1. Carefully set to line and grade and securely stake in position forms conforming to dimensions of items to be constructed.

2. Thoroughly clean prior to each use and coat with form releasing material.

C. Expansion and Contraction Joints:

1. Expansion Joints:
a. Construct vertically, and at right angles to centerline of street and match joints in adjacent pavement or sidewalks.
b. Constructed at radius points, driveways, alley entrances, and at adjoining structures. c. Fill joints with expansion joint filler material.

2. Contraction Joints:
a. Constructed not more than 15 feet apart.
b. Make joints of construction joint material, scoring or saw cutting to depth of not less than 1-1/2 inches, and matching joints in adjacent pavement or sidewalk.

D. Concrete:

1. Placing:
a. Thoroughly spade concrete away from forms so that no rock pockets exist next to forms and so that no coarse aggregate will show when forms are removed.

2. Compacting:
a. Compact by mechanical vibrators accepted by the ENGINEER. b. Continue tamping or vibrating until mortar flushes to surface and coarse aggregate is below concrete surface.

3. Form Removal:
a. Front Form Faces: Do not remove before concrete has taken initial set and has sufficient strength to carry its own weight.
b. Gutter and Rear Forms: Do not remove until concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage to edges. Take special care to prevent damage.

4. Finishing and Curing: Comply with requirements as specified in Section 03 3300 except as modified here:
a. As soon as curb face forms are stripped, apply finishing mortar to the top and face of curb and trowel to a smooth, even finish. Finish with fine haired broom in direction of work.
b. Where curb is installed without integral gutter, extend finish 2 inches below grade. c. Edge concrete at expansion joints to 1/4-inch radius. d. Flow lines of gutters shall be troweled smooth 4 inches out from curb face for integral curb and gutter and 4 inches on both sides of flowline for gutters without curbs.

E. Backfilling: Unless otherwise specified, backfill behind curbs, gutters, or sidewalks and to lines and grades indicated on the Drawings with Geotechnical Engineer approved soil.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:

1. Curbs and Gutters:
a. Test face, top, back, and flow line with 10-foot straight edge or curve template longitudinally along surface.
b. Correct deviations in excess of 1/4 inch.

2. Gutters:
a. Frequency of Testing: When required by the ENGINEER, where gutters have slope of

0.8 foot per hundred feet or less, or where unusual or special conditions cast doubt on capability of gutters to drain.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS, SIDEWALKS, AND DRIVEWAYS 32 1600-3 b. Test Method: Establish flow in length of gutter to be tested by supplying water from hydrant, tank truck, or other source.
c. Required Results:
1) 1 hour after supply of water is shut off, inspect gutter for evidence of ponding or improper shape.
2) In event water is found ponded in gutter to depth greater than ½ inch, or on adjacent asphalt pavement, correct defect or defects in manner acceptable to the ENGINEER without additional cost to the Contract.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Repair portions of concrete damaged while stripping forms or, when damage is severe, replace such work at no additional cost to the Contract. Evidence of repairs shall not be noticeable in the finished product.

B. Remove and replace sections of work deficient in depth or not conforming to requirements indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications at no additional cost to the Contract.

Removal and replacement shall be the complete section between two joints.

END OF SECTION 32 1600
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
PIPELINE CONNECTION TO EXISTING FACILITIES 33 0010-1
SECTION 33 0010 - PIPELINE CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTIONS
A. This section includes requirements for connection to and abandonment of existing water facilities.

1.02 LOCATION
A. As the Contractor's first order of work, the connection points to the existing water system shall be potholed to identify depth, diameter and pipe material. Coordinates and Dimensions to locate the exact pothole location shall also be documented. Pothole information shall be immediately provided to the Engineer for review. The Engineer will not review any other contractor submittals until after the pothole data is received.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Contractor shall submit to the OWNER at least six weeks prior to any connections to existing facilities which require the shutdown of that facility, their plan to perform the shut down and requirements of which facilities will be shut down to accomplish the connection.

PART 2 - MATERIALS
A. All materials used in making the connection or removing the facility from service shall conform to the applicable sections of these specifications and the contract drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATERLINES
A. Notification: The Contractor shall give the OWNER a minimum of ten (10) working days’ notice in writing before the time of any required shutdown of existing mains or services. The OWNER shall determine the actual time and date of shutdown.

B. Authorization: Connections shall be made only in the presence of the OWNER Representative. No connection work shall be performed prior to authorization by the OWNER.

C. Time Schedule: The Contractor is restricted to a time limit not exceeding 4 hours to connect the new pipelines to the existing pipeline, with required fittings, and restore water service, after the OWNER has drained the pipeline.

D. Material: The Contractor shall furnish all pipe and materials as may be required for connections including but not limited to: labor and equipment necessary to make the connections; all required excavation; backfill; lights; barricades; water truck; highline hose; and fittings for making the connections. The Contractor shall provide verification to the OWNER that all necessary materials and personnel are on-site before requesting shutdown or commencing with connection to existing mains or services.

E. Inadequate Progress: If progress is inadequate during the connection operations to complete the connection in the time specified, the Engineer shall order necessary corrective measures. All costs for corrective measures shall be paid by the Contractor.

F. Connections: Connections shall be made with as little change as possible in the grade of new main.

If the grade of the existing pipe is below that of the new pipeline, a sufficient length of the new line shall be deepened so as to prevent the creation of any high spot or abrupt changes in grade of the new line. Where the grade of the existing pipe is above that of the new pipeline, the new line shall be laid at specified depth, except for the first joint adjacent to the connection, which shall be deflected as necessary to meet the grade of the existing pipe. If sufficient change in direction cannot B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
PIPELINE CONNECTION TO EXISTING FACILITIES 33 0010-2
be obtained by the limited deflection of the first joint, a fitting of the proper angle shall be installed.

Where the connection creates a high or low spot in the line, a standard air release or blow-off assembly shall be installed as directed by the Engineer.

G. Testing: The new pipeline shall be disinfected and hydrostatically tested as required.

3.2 CONNECTION TO NON WATERLINE PIPES
A. Notification: The CONTRACTOR shall give the OWNER a minimum of ten (10) working days’ notice in writing before the time of any required shutdown of existing pipelines. The OWNER shall determine the actual time and date of shutdown.

B. Authorization: Connections shall be made only in the presence of the OWNER Representative. No connection work will be performed prior to authorization by the OWNER.

C. Time Schedule: The contractor is restricted to a time limit not exceeding 4 hours (unless previously negotiated with the OWNER in writing) to connect the new pipelines to the existing pipeline, with required fittings, and restore service.

F. Connections: Connections shall be made with as little change as possible in the grade of new main.

If the grade of the existing pipe is below that of the new pipeline, a sufficient length of the new line shall be deepened so as to prevent the creation of any high spot or abrupt changes in grade of the new line. Where the grade of the existing pipe is above that of the new pipeline, the new line shall be laid at specified depth, except for the first joint adjacent to the connection, which shall be deflected as necessary to meet the grade of the existing pipe. If sufficient change in direction cannot be obtained by the limited deflection of the first joint, a fitting of the proper angle shall be installed.

Where the connection creates a high or low spot in the line, a standard air release or blow-off assembly shall be installed as directed by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION 33 0010
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
DISINFECTION OF WATER UTILITY PIPING SYSTEMS 33 0110.58-1 SECTION 33 0110.58 - DISINFECTION OF WATER UTILITY PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Disinfection of potable water distribution system

2. Testing and reporting of results

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Disinfection Procedure:

1. Type of disinfectant and calculations indicating quantities of disinfectants required to produce specified chlorine concentration.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer information for proposed chemicals and treatment doses.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

D. Certify that final water complies with disinfectant quality standards of authority having jurisdiction.

E. Include separate Paragraphs for additional certifications.

F. Test and Evaluation Reports: Indicate testing results comparative to specified requirements.

G. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.

H. Qualifications Statements:

1. Qualifications for manufacturer and applicator.

1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Disinfection Report:

1. Type and form of disinfectant used.

2. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and completion.

3. Test locations.

4. Name of person collecting samples.

5. Initial and 24-hour disinfectant residuals in treated water in ppm for each outlet tested.

6. Date and time of flushing start and completion.

7. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work according to AWWA C651.

B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with three years' experience.

C. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with three years' experience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DISINFECTION CHEMICALS
A. Chemicals:

1. Hypochlorite: Comply with AWWA B300.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping system has been cleaned, inspected, and pressure tested.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
DISINFECTION OF WATER UTILITY PIPING SYSTEMS 33 0110.58-2 B. Perform scheduling and disinfecting activity with startup, water pressure testing, adjusting and balancing, and demonstration procedures, including coordination with related systems.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Maintain disinfectant in system for a minimum of 24 hours.

B. Flush, circulate, and clean until required disinfectant quality standard has been achieved using municipal domestic water.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Disinfection, Flushing, and Sampling:

1. Disinfect pipeline installation according to AWWA C651, and per AHJ requirements.

2. Use of liquid chlorine is not permitted.

3. Upon completion of retention period required for disinfection, flush pipeline until chlorine concentration in water leaving pipeline is no higher than that generally prevailing in existing system or is acceptable for domestic use.

4. Disposal:
a. Legally dispose of chlorinated water.
b. If chlorinated discharge may cause damage to environment, apply neutralizing chemical to chlorinated water to neutralize chlorine residual remaining in water.

5. After final flushing and before pipeline is connected to existing system or placed in service, certify that disinfectant level meets quality standards of authority having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION 33 0110.58
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM TESTING 33 0130.13-1
SECTION 33 0130.13 - SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM TESTING
PART 1 -– GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Perform all pipeline flushing and testing, complete, for sanitary sewer and storm drainage system piping as specified herein and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Be responsible for providing conveyance of test water to the point of usage and also for disposal, as required, of water used in the testing operations.

1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Commercial Standards:

ASTM A746 Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe
ASTM F1417 Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 3300 - Submittals.

B. Proposed plans for testing of the sanitary sewer system. The methods used may be air or water as described herein. If water method is used then provide the water conveyance, control and disposal.

Advance written notice of its proposed testing schedule for review and concurrence of the ENGINEER shall be submitted.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS
A. Temporary valves, plugs, bulkheads and other air pressure testing and water control equipment and materials shall be provided, subject to the ENGINEER's review. No materials shall be used which would be injurious to pipeline structure and future function. Air test gages shall be laboratorycalibrated test gages and shall be recalibrated by a certified laboratory at the Contractor’s expense prior to the leakage test, if required by the ENGINEER.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise specified, water for testing will be furnished however, all necessary provisions for conveying the water from the designated source to the points of use shall be made.

B. Release of water from pipelines, after testing has been completed, shall be performed as reviewed by the ENGINEER.

C. All testing operations shall be performed in the presence of the ENGINEER.

D. All testing shall be performed per the CITY Standards, and or Adopted Environmental Codes, or equal. If local requirements exist on testing, use most stringent.

3.02 TESTING OF PIPING
A. General: All gravity sewer pipes and service laterals shall be tested for exfiltration, infiltration and deflection, as specified. All manholes shall be tested for leakage, as specified. Manholes shall be tested prior to backfill placement. All leakage tests shall be completed and approved prior to placing of permanent resurfacing. When leakage or infiltration exceeds the amount allowed by the Specifications, locate the leaks and make the necessary repairs or replacements in accordance with the Specifications to reduce the leakage or infiltration to the specified limits. Any individually B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM TESTING 33 0130.13-2
detectable leaks shall be repaired, regardless of the results of the tests. The OWNER reserves the right to require testing of the entire installation. Cost of repairs or corrections necessary to conform to the following testing requirements will be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency.

B. Pressure sewers (force mains); water pressure test at 120% of maximum operating pressure, measured at the lowest point of the pipeline section being tested.

C. Gravity sewers pipe lines and manholes shall be subject to acceptance testing after backfilling has been completed but prior to the placement of the finished surface material.

1. Low Pressure Air Test: Testing will be accomplished by the means of “Low Pressure Air Testing.” Tests may be conducted by the Contractor or an independent testing firm.

However, acceptance tests shall be made only in the presence of the Engineer or District Representative.
a. Test Procedure:
1) Before testing, the pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned. 2) The Contractor shall seal off the section of pipe to be tested at each manhole connection. Test plugs must be securely braced within the manholes. 3) A minimum of two connecting hoses to link the air inlet test plug with an above ground test monitoring panel must be provided.
a) One hose is to induce air through the test plug and into the test chamber. b) The second hose is for the purpose of monitoring the test pressure from within the enclosed pipe.
4) UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES ARE WORKERS TO BE ALLOWED IN

THE CONNECTING MANHOLES WHILE A PRESSURE TEST IS BEING
CONDUCTED.
5) Add air slowly into the test section. After an internal pressure of 4.0 psi is obtained, allow internal air temperature to stabilize.
6) After stabilization period, adjust the internal air pressure to 3.5 psi, disconnect the air supply and begin timing the test.
7) Refer to Table 3.3-1 to determine the length of time (minutes) the section under test must sustain while not losing in excess of 1 psi as monitored by the test gauge. If the section of line to be tested includes more than one pipe size, calculate the test time for each size and add the test times to arrive at the total test time for the section.
8) Sections so determined to have lost 1 psi or less during the test period will have passed the leakage test. Those sections losing in excess of 1 psi during the test period will have failed the leakage test.
9) Appropriate repairs must then be completed and the line retested for acceptance.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM TESTING 33 0130.13-3
TABLE 3.3-1

SANITARY SEWER AIR TEST
Minimum Test Time for Various Pipe Sizes*
Nominal Pipe Size, in. T (time), min/100 ft. Nominal Pipe Size, in. T (time), min/100 ft. 3 0.2 21 3.0
4 0.3 24 3.6
6 0.7 27 4.2
8 1.2 30 4.8
10 1.5 33 5.4
12 1.8 36 6.0
15 2.1 39 6.6
18 2.4 42 7.3
* The time has been established using the formulas contained in ASTM C-828, Appendix.

2. Hydrostatic Test: Exfiltration Testing (water): Sanitary sewer testing by means of exfiltration should only be considered when low pressure air testing cannot be used and only with the approval of the Engineer.
a. Testing Procedure:
1) The Contractor shall furnish all equipment for testing. 2) Seal off the downstream end of the line and fill with water to a minimum head of 4 feet in a stand pipe at the high end.
3) A period of at least one hour will be allowed for absorption time before making the test.
4) A suitable meter or method of measuring the quantity of water used is necessary.
5) The allowable water loss for sanitary sewers shall not exceed 0.158 gallons per hour per 100 feet of pipe per inch of diameter of pipe under a minimum test head of 4 feet above the top of the pipe at the upper end.

D. Deflection Test for HDPE and PVC Pipe:

1. In addition to the tests prescribed above, the Contractor shall perform a deflection test on the system as directed by the Engineer. Any part of the installation which shows deflection in excess of 5% of the nominal inside diameter per Section 738 for HDPE pipe or in excess of 5% of the average inside diameter per ASTM D3034 for PVC pipe, shall be corrected.

2. After acceptance by prior to the termination of the warranty period, the Contracting Agency may test the long term deflection of the sewer. If the Contracting Agency determines that the deflection has exceeded 7 ½ % of the average inside diameter, that portion of the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Contracting Agency.

3.03 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF MANHOLES – See Section 33 0505.31 A. General: All sewer manholes shall be hydrostatically tested for leakage after installation, but prior to being backfilled. Prior to hydrostatic testing, all manholes shall be visually inspected for leaks.

All leaks or cracks shall be repaired, prior to hydrostatic testing, to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. All pipes entering the manhole shall be sealed at a point outside the manhole walls so as to include testing of the pipe/manhole joints. The manhole shall be filled with water to a level 2 inches below the top of the frame. Safety lines shall be secured to all plugs utilized. After a period of at least one hour to allow the water level to stabilize, the manhole shall be refilled and the water level shall be checked. The water level shall again be checked after a period of 4 hours. If the water level is reduced by more than ¼-inch, the leakage shall be considered excessive, the required repairs shall be made and the manhole retested. The exterior of the manhole shall be inspected during this period for visible evidence of leakage. Visible moisture, sweating or beads B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM TESTING 33 0130.13-4
of water on the exterior of the manhole shall not be considered leakage, but any water running across the surface will be considered leakage and shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER regardless of the volume of water lost.

END OF SECTION 33 0130.13
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
MANHOLES RIM ADJUSTMENT 33 0130.86-1
SECTION 33 0130.86 - MANHOLE RIM ADJUSTMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Raising manhole frames and covers

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer information for manhole covers and riser rings construction, features, configuration, dimensions.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

C. Manufacturer Instructions: Installation requirements, including storage and handling procedures.

D. Source Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections.

E. Qualifications Statements:

1. Qualifications for manufacturer and installer.

2. Manufacturer's approval of installer.

1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual grade-adjusted elevation of manholes.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work according to District standards.

B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with three years' experience.

C. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with three years' experience.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.

B. Protection:

1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas.

2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.

1.06 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements:

1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS
A. Manufacturers:

1. South Bay Foundry #1900 CHP in traffic areas; Certainteed Pamrex CDPA60EHSEW with Penta lock C14 outside of traffic areas, or as approved by District.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
MANHOLES RIM ADJUSTMENT 33 0130.86-2

2.02 RISER RINGS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Jensen Precast, Old Castle Precast, or equal
B. Riser Rings:

1. Thickness of 3 Inches to 6 Inches:
a. Material: Precast concrete
b. Comply with ASTM C478

2. Thickness of Less than 6 Inches:
a. Material: Cast iron
b. Comply with AASHTO M306

3. Rubber Seal Wraps:
a. Wraps and Band Widths: Comply with ASTM C877
C. As specified in Section 33 0513 – Manholes and Structures.

D. Accessories:

1. Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C990

2. Bolts: Stainless steel; ASTM F593

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assembly.

B. Certificate of Compliance:

1. If manufacturer is approved by authorities having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at manufacturer's facility conforms to Contract Documents.

2. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify and locate manholes requiring grade adjustment.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Raising Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Locate and raise manholes to grade as indicated.

2. Use flat or tapered rubber manhole rings to achieve indicated elevation for frame and cover.

3. Do not adjust elevation greater than 4 inches with rubber manhole rings.

4. Use sealant to seal joints between manhole top, rubber rings, and frame.

B. Replacing Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Locate manholes for replacement of frames and covers as indicated.

2. Deliver removed manhole frames and covers to Owner as maintenance materials.

3. Install new frames and covers for manholes as indicated.

4. Adjust new frames and covers to match finished grade as indicated.

5. Seal joints between manholes and manhole frames.

C. Paving Restoration:

1. Restore bituminous paving areas as specified in Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving.

END OF SECTION 33 0130.86
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
HYDROSTATIC TESTING 33 0505.31-1
SECTION 33 0505.31 - HYDROSTATIC TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Hydrostatic testing of pressure piping. City Standards for requirements.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit following items prior to start of testing:

1. Testing procedures

2. List of test equipment

3. Testing sequence schedule

4. Provisions for disposal of flushing and test water

5. Certification of test gage calibration
B. Test and Evaluation Reports: Indicate results of piping tests.

C. Qualifications Statement:

1. Qualifications for applicator

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work according to City Standards.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with three years' experience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
A. Equipment:

1. Pressure pump

2. Pressure hose

3. Water meter

4. Test connections

5. Pressure relief valve

6. Pressure Gage: Calibrated to 0.1 psi
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping is ready for testing.

B. Verify that trenches are backfilled.

C. Verify that pressure piping thrust restraints have been installed.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Pressure Piping:

1. Test system according to AWWA C600 and following:
a. Hydrostatically test each portion of pressure piping, including valved section, at

1.5 times working pressure of piping, based on elevation of lowest point in piping corrected to elevation of test gage.
b. Conduct hydrostatic testing for at least two hours.
c. Slowly fill with water portion of piping to be tested, expelling air from piping at high points.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
HYDROSTATIC TESTING 33 0505.31-2
d. Install corporation cocks at high points.
e. Close air vents and corporation cocks after air is expelled. f. Raise pressure to specified test pressure.
g. Observe joints, fittings, and valves undergoing testing. h. Remove and renew cracked pipes, joints, fittings, and valves that show visible leakage. i. Retest.
j. Correct visible deficiencies and continue testing at same test pressure for additional two hours to determine leakage rate.
k. Maintain pressure within plus or minus 5.0 psi of test pressure. l. Leakage is defined as quantity of water supplied to piping necessary to maintain test pressure during period of testing.
m. Compute maximum allowable leakage using following formula:
1) L = [SxDx√P]/C.
2) L = testing allowance, gph.
3) S = length of pipe tested, feet.
4) D = nominal diameter of pipe, inches.
5) P = average test pressure during hydrostatic testing, psig. 6) C = 148,000.
7) If pipe undergoing testing contains sections of various diameters, calculate allowable leakage from sum of computed leakage for each pipe size.

2. If testing of piping indicates leakage greater than that allowed, locate source of leakage, make corrections, and retest until leakage is within acceptable limits.

3. Correct visible leaks regardless of quantity of leakage.

END OF SECTION 33 0505.31
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
MANDREL TESTING 33 0505.43-1
SECTION 33 0505.43 - MANDREL TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Deflection testing of plastic sewer piping.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit following items prior to start of testing:

1. Testing procedures

2. List of test equipment

3. Testing sequence schedule

4. Provisions for disposal of flushing and test water

5. Certification of test gage calibration

6. Deflection mandrel drawings and calculations
B. Test and Evaluation Reports: Indicate results of piping tests PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DEFLECTION TESTING
A. Equipment:

1. Properly sized rigid ball

2. Pull/retrieval ropes
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping is ready for testing.

B. Verify that trenches are backfilled.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Lamping:

1. Lamp gravity piping after flushing and cleaning.

2. Perform lamping operation by shining light at one end of each pipe section between manholes.

3. Observe light at the other end.

4. Pipe not installed with uniform line and grade will be rejected.

5. Remove and reinstall rejected pipe sections.

6. Clean and lamp until pipe section is installed to uniform line and grade.

B. Plugs:

1. Plug outlets, wye branches, and laterals

2. Brace plugs to resist test pressures.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Deflection Testing of Plastic Sewer Piping:

1. Perform vertical ring deflection testing on PVC and ABS sewer piping after backfilling has been in place for at least 14 days, but not longer than 1.5 months.

2. Allowable maximum deflection for installed plastic sewer pipe is no greater than five percent of original vertical internal diameter.

3. Perform deflection testing using properly sized rigid ball B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
MANDREL TESTING 33 0505.43-2

4. Diameter:
a. Not less than 95 percent of base or average ID of pipe b. Pipe Diameter: Comply with ASTM D2122

5. Perform testing without mechanical pulling devices.

6. Locate, excavate, replace, and retest piping that exceeds allowable deflection.

END OF SECTION 33 0505.43
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES 33 0513-1
SECTION 33 0513 - MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENT
A. Precast concrete manholes for sanitary sewers and storm sewers, per the CITY Standard Design and Specifications.

B. Precast concrete sanitary sewer manholes with special coating liner as indicated in Section 09 9700.

C. Pile-supported concrete foundation used for unstable subgrade treatment for manhole base.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. CITY Standard Design and Construction Standards and Details B. Commercial Standards:

ASME B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry ASTM C443 Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets.

ASTM C478 Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections ASTM C923 Standard Specifications for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures and Pipes
ASTM C1107 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink) ASTM D1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3))
ASTM D2996 Standard Specification for Filament-Wound "Fiberglass" (Glass-FiberReinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe ASTM D2997 Standard Specification for Centrifugally Cast "Fiberglass" (Glass-FiberReinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe AWWA C213 Standard for Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating for Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
C. Soils Report: This work shall conform to the requirements of the latest Geotechnical Evaluation and/or Soils Report.

D. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Submit manufacturer's data and details of following items for approval:

1. Shop drawings of manhole sections, base units and construction details, including reinforcement, jointing methods, materials and dimensions.

2. Summary of criteria used in manhole design including, as minimum, material properties, loadings, load combinations, and dimensions assumed. Include certification from manufacturer that precast manhole design is in full accordance with ASTM C478 and design criteria as established in Paragraph 2.01E of this Specification.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES 33 0513-2

3. Frames, grates, rings, and covers

4. Materials to be used in fabricating drop connections

5. Materials to be used for pipe connections at manhole walls

6. Materials to be used for stubs and stub plugs, if required

7. Materials and procedures for corrosion-resistant liner and coatings, if required

8. Plugs to be used for sanitary sewer hydrostatic testing

9. Manufacturer's data for pre-mix (bag) concrete, if used for channel inverts and benches C. Submit testing plan, documentation methods, and proposed schedule.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES
A. Provide manhole sections, base sections, and related components conforming to ASTM C478.

Provide base riser section with integral floors, unless shown otherwise. Provide adjustment rings which are standard components of manufacturer of manhole sections. Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer on inside of barrel.

B. Construct barrels for precast manholes from standard reinforced concrete manhole sections of diameter indicated on Drawings. Use various lengths of manhole sections in combination to provide correct height with fewest joints. Design wall sections for depth and loading conditions in Paragraph 2.01 E, with minimum thickness of 5 inches. Base section shall have minimum thickness of 12 inches under invert.

C. Provide tops to support HS-20 vehicle loading, and receive cast iron frame covers.

D. Where manholes larger than 48-inch diameter are indicated on Drawings, provide precast base sections with flat slab top precast sections used to transition to 48-inch diameter manhole access riser sections. Transition can be concentric or eccentric unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

Locate transition to provide minimum of 7-foot head clearance from base to underside of transition unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER.

E. Design Loading Criteria: Manhole walls, transition slabs, cone tops, and manhole base slab shall be designed, by manufacturer, to requirements of ASTM C478 for depth as shown on Drawings and to resist following loads.

1. AASHTO HS-20 vehicle loading applied to manhole cover and transmitted down to transition and base slabs

2. Unit soil weight of 120 pcf located above portions of manhole, including base slab projections

3. Lateral soil pressure based on saturated soil conditions producing an at-rest equivalent fluid pressure of 100 pcf

4. Internal liquid pressure based on unit weight of 63 pcf

5. Dead load of manhole sections fully supported by transition and base slabs F. Design: Manhole walls, transition slabs, cone tops, and manhole base slab shall be designed according to requirements of ASTM C478 and following:

1. Design additional reinforcing steel to transfer stresses at openings. Area of steel to be no less than shown on Drawings.

2. Wall loading conditions:
a. Saturated soil pressure acting on empty manhole
b. Manhole filled with liquid to a halfway depth as measured from invert to cover, with no balancing external soil pressure

3. Minimum clear distance between two wall penetrations shall be 12 inches or half diameter of smaller penetration, whichever is greater.

G. Manhole Grade Rings:

1. Manhole grade rings for extensions shall be a maximum 6 inches high. Extensions will be limited to 15 inches.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES 33 0513-3

2. Finish grade for solid covers shall be 1/2 inch below flush in concrete or asphalt concrete paved areas, and 6 inches above finish grade in unpaved areas, except flush where gated covers are specified.

3. Grade rings shall have anchor bolt holes for bolt-down frames and covers.

4. Finish installation in accordance with City Standards.

H. Eccentric Sections: Eccentric cones shall be provided for all manholes except as otherwise shown on the Drawings. Cones shall have the same wall thickness and reinforcement as the precast manhole section.

I. When base is cast monolithic with portion of vertical section, extend reinforcing in vertical section into base.

J. Precast Concrete Base: Suitable cutouts or holes to receive pipe and connections. Lowest edge of holes or cutouts: For water line manhole, no less than 6 inches above inside surface of floor of base.

2.02 CONCRETE
A. Conform to requirements of Section 03 3000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete B. Channel Inverts: Use 5 sack premix (bag) concrete or Class A concrete for inverts not integrally formed with manhole base, with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi.

C. Cement Stabilized Sand Foundation: Provide cement stabilized sand foundation under base section in lieu of foundation slab, as shown on Drawings.

D. Concrete Foundation: Provide Class A concrete with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi for concrete foundation slab under manhole base section where indicated on Drawings.

2.03 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Conform to requirements of Section 03 2000 – Concrete Reinforcing.

2.04 MORTAR
A. Conform to requirements of Section 04 2200.

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
A. Provide cast-iron frames, rings, and covers conforming to requirements of Section 33 0130.86.

2.06 DROP CONNECTIONS AND STUBS
A. Provide drop connections and stubs conforming to same pipe material requirements used in main pipe, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2.07 PIPE CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLE
A. Sanitary Sewer: Provide resilient connectors conforming to requirements of ASTM C 923. Use the following materials for metallic mechanical devices as defined in ASTM C923:

1. External clamps: Type 304 stainless steel

2. Internal, expandable clamps on standard manholes: Type 304 stainless steel, 11 gauge minimum.

3. Internal, expandable clamps on corrosion-resistant manholes:
a. Type 316 stainless steel, 11 gauge minimum
b. Type 304 stainless steel, 11 gauge minimum, coated with minimum 16 mil fusionbonded epoxy conforming to AWWA C213

4. Where rigid joints between pipe and cast-in-place manhole base are specified or shown on Drawings, provide polyethylene-isoprene water-stop meeting physical property requirements of ASTM C923, such as Press-Seal WS Series, or approved equal.

B. Storm Sewer Connections: Provide watertight connections in accordance with ASTM C923.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES 33 0513-4
C. Water Lines:

1. Where smooth exterior pipes, i.e., steel, ductile iron, or PVC pipes are connected to manhole base or barrel, seal space between pipe and manhole wall with assembly consisting of rubber gasket or links mechanically compressed to form a watertight barrier. Assemblies: PressWedge, Res-Seal, Thunderline Link-Seal, or approved equal. See Drawings for placement of assembly in manhole sections.

2. When connecting concrete or cement mortar coated steel pipes, or as option for connecting smooth exterior pipes to manhole base or barrel, space between pipe and manhole wall may be sealed with an assembly consisting of a stainless steel power sleeve, stainless steel takeup clamp and a rubber gasket. Take-up clamp: Minimum of 9/16 inch wide. Provide PSX positive seal gasket system by Press-Seal Gasket Corporation or approved equal.

2.08 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Provide sealing materials between precast concrete adjustment ring and manhole cover frame, Adeka Ultraseal P201, or approved equal.

B. Provide approved external sealing material from Canusa Wrapid Seal manhole encapsulation system, or approved equal.

C. Provide Butyl Sealant: Provide Press-Seal EZ Stick, or equal, for HDPE rings.

2.09 BACKFILL MATERIALS
A. Conform to requirements of CITY Standards.

2.10 NON-SHRINK GROUT
A. Provide prepackaged, inorganic, flowable, non-gas-liberating, non-metallic, cement-based grout requiring only addition of water.

B. Meet requirements of ASTM C 1107 and have minimum 28-day compressive strength of 6000 psi.

2.11 VENT PIPES
A. Provide external vent pipes for manholes where indicated on Drawings.

B. Buried Vent Pipes: Provide 3 inch or 4 inch PVC DWV pipe conforming to ASTM D 2665.

Alternatively, provide FRP pipe as specified for vent outlet assembly.

C. Vent Outlet Assembly: Provide vent outlet assembly as shown on Drawings, constructed of following specified materials:

1. FRP Pipe: Provide filament wound FRP conforming to ASTM D2996 or centrifugally cast FRP conforming to ASTM D2997. Seal cut ends in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Joints and Fittings: Provide epoxy bodied fittings and join pipe to fittings with epoxy adhesive

3. Flanges: Provide socket-flange fittings for epoxy adhesive bonding to pipe ends where shown on Drawings. Meet bolt pattern and dimensions for ASME B16.1, 125-pound flanges. Flange bolts shall be Type 304 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc coated, conforming to ASTM A307, Class A or B.

4. Coating: Provide approved 2-component, aliphatic polyurethane coating using primer or tie coat recommended by manufacturer. Provide two or more coats to yield dry film thickness of at least 3 mils. Color shall be selected by ENGINEER from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.12 PROHIBITED MATERIALS
A. Do not use brick masonry for construction of sanitary sewer manholes, including adjustment of manholes to grade. Use only specified materials listed above.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES 33 0513-5

2.13 MANHOLE LADDER FOR WATERLINE MANHOLES
A. Manhole Ladder: Fiberglass with 300-lb rating at appropriate length; conform to requirements of Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA), U.S. Department of Labor except where shown on Drawings

1. Use components, including rungs, made of fiberglass, fabricated with nylon or aluminum rivets and/or epoxy. Apply non-skid coating to ladder rungs. Mount ladder using manufacturer's recommended hardware.

2. Provide ladder as manufactured by Saf-Rail or approved equal. Locate ladder as shown on Drawings.

3. Fiberglass: Premium type polyester resin, reinforced with fiberglass; constructed to provide complete wetting of glass by resin; resistant to rot, fungi, bacterial growth and adverse effects of acids, alkalis and residential and industrial waste; yellow in color.

B. Provide approved petroleum-based tape encapsulating bolts in access manhole.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that lines and grades are correct.

B. Determine if subgrade, when scarified and recompacted, can be compacted to 95 percent of maximum Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D1557 prior to placement of foundation material and base section. When proper density is not reached, moisture condition subgrade until that density is reached or treat as unstable subgrade.

C. Do not build manholes in ditches, swales, or drainage paths unless approved by District and ENGINEER.

3.02 PLACEMENT
A. Install precast manholes to conform to locations and dimensions shown on Drawings.

B. Place sanitary and storm manholes at points of change in alignment, grade, size, pipe intersections, and end of sewer unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

3.03 MANHOLE BASE SECTIONS AND FOUNDATIONS
A. Place precast base on 12-inch-thick (minimum) foundation of crushed stone wrapped in filter fabric, cement stabilized sand, or concrete foundation slab.

B. Unstable Subgrade Treatment: When unstable subgrade is encountered, notify ENGINEER for examination of subgrade to determine if subgrade has heaved upwards after being excavated. When heaving has not occurred, over-excavate subgrade to allow for 24-inch-thick layer of crushed stone wrapped in filter fabric as foundation material under manhole base. When there is evidence of heaving, provide pile-supported concrete foundation, as detailed on Drawings, under manhole base.

3.04 PRECAST MANHOLE SECTIONS
A. Install sections, joints, and gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations.

B. Install precast adjustment rings above tops of cones or flat-top sections as required to adjust finished elevation and to support manhole frame.

C. Seal any lifting holes with non-shrink grout.

D. Place at least two precast concrete grade rings with thickness of 12 inches or less, under casting.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES 33 0513-6

3.05 PIPE CONNECTIONS AT MANHOLES
A. Install approved resilient connectors at each pipe entering and exiting manholes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Where smooth exterior pipes, i.e. steel, ductile iron or PVC pipes are connected to manhole base or barrel, space between pipe and manhole wall shall be sealed with an assembly consisting of rubber gaskets or links mechanically compressed to form watertight barrier.

Assemblies: "Press-Wedge," "Res-Seal," "Thunderline Link-Seals," or approved equal. See Drawings for placement of assembly in manhole sections.

2. When connecting concrete or cement mortar coated steel pipes, or as an option for connecting smooth exterior pipes to manhole base or barrel, space between pipe and manhole wall may be sealed with an assembly consisting of stainless steel power sleeve, stainless steel take-up clamp and rubber gasket. Take-up clamp: Minimum of 9/16 inch wide. Provide PSX positive seal gasket system by Press-Seal Gasket Corporation or approved equal.

B. Grout storm sewer connections to manhole unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Grout pipe penetration in place on both inside and outside of manhole.

C. Ensure no concrete, cement stabilized sand, fill, or other rigid material is allowed to enter space between pipe and edge of wall opening at and around resilient connector on either interior or exterior of manhole. If necessary, fill space with compressible material to ensure full flexibility provided by resilient connector.

D. Where new manhole is constructed on existing sewer, rigid joint pipe may be used. Install waterstop gasket around existing pipe at center of cast-in-place wall. Join ends of split waterstop material at pipe springline using an adhesive recommended and supplied by waterstop manufacturer.

E. Test connection for watertight seal before backfilling.

3.06 INVERTS FOR SANITARY SEWERS
A. Construct invert channels to provide smooth flow transition waterway with no disruption of flow at pipe-manhole connections. Conform to following criteria:

1. Slope of invert bench: 1 inch per foot minimum; 1-1/2 inches per foot maximum

2. Depth of bench to invert:
a. Pipes smaller than 15 inches: one-half of largest pipe diameter b. Pipes 15 to 24 inches: three-fourths of largest pipe diameter c. Pipes larger than 24 inches: equal to largest pipe diameter

3. Invert slope through manhole: 0.10-foot drop across manhole with smooth transition of invert through manhole, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

B. Form invert channels with concrete if not integral with manhole base section. For direction changes of mains, construct channels tangent to mains with maximum possible radius of curvature. Provide curves for side inlets and smooth invert fillets for flow transition between pipe inverts.

3.07 DROP CONNECTIONS FOR SANITARY SEWERS
A. Backfill drop assembly with crushed stone wrapped in filter fabric, cement stabilized sand, or Class A concrete to form solid mass. Extend cement stabilized sand or concrete encasement minimum of 4 inches outside bells.

B. Install drop connection when sewer line enters manhole higher than 24 inches above invert of manhole.

3.08 STUBS FOR FUTURE CONNECTIONS
A. In manholes, where future connections are indicated on Drawings, install resilient connectors and pipe stubs with approved watertight plugs.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES 33 0513-7

3.09 MANHOLE FRAME AND ADJUSTMENT RINGS
A. Combine precast concrete or HDPE adjustment rings so elevation of installed casting cover matches pavement surface. Seal between concrete adjustment ring and precast top section with non-shrink grout; do not use mortar between adjustment rings. Apply latex-based bonding agent to precast concrete surfaces joined with non-shrink grout. Set cast iron frame on adjustment ring in bed of approved sealant material. Install sealant bed consisting of two beads of sealant, each bead having minimum dimensions of 1/2-inch and 1/2-inch wide.

B. Wrap manhole frame and adjustment rings with external sealing material, minimum 3 inches beyond joint between ring and frame and adjustment rings and precast section.

C. For manholes in unpaved areas, set top of frame minimum of 6 inches above existing ground line unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. In unpaved areas, encase manhole frame in mortar or nonshrink grout placed flush with face of manhole ring and top edge of frame. Provide rounded corner around perimeter.

3.10 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill materials in area of excavation surrounding manholes in accordance with requirements of Division 31. Provide embedment zone backfill material, as specified for adjacent utilities, from manhole foundation up to an elevation 12 inches over each pipe connected to manhole. Provide trench zone backfill, as specified for adjacent utilities, above embedment zone backfill.

B. Where rigid joints are used for connecting existing sewers to manhole, backfill under existing sewer up to springline of pipe with Class B concrete or flowable fill.

C. In unpaved areas, provide positive drainage away from manhole frame to natural grade. Provide minimum of 4 inches of topsoil.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Conduct leakage testing of sanitary sewer manholes in accordance with requirements of Division

33. 3.12 PROTECTION
A. Protect manholes from damage until work has been accepted. Repair damage to manholes at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION 33 0513
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
UTILITY IDENTIFICATION 33 0526-1
SECTION 33 0526 - UTILITY IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Commercial Standards: ANSI A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit samples of all types of identification devices and signs to be used in the work.

B. All submittals shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer and model shall be described on the Drawings or Engineer approved equal.

B. The manufacturer shall provide a 2-year warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING
A. Identification of all exposed pipe shall be accomplished by color-coding with bands or painting of the pipe and by lettering as specified in Part 3, herein. Color bands shall either be painted directly upon the pipe or shall be pressure-sensitive adhesive-backed vinyl cloth or plastic tape.

B. Each pipe identification shall consist of two color-coded bands, a printed label identifying the name of the pipe, and a flow arrow to indicate direction of flow in the pipe. All labels shall be preprinted on pressure-sensitive adhesive-backed vinyl cloth or plastic tape. Arrows shall be die-cut of the same type of material as the labels. Arrows and labels may be stenciled on the pipes at the discretion of the Engineer.

C. Letter sizes and colors for lettering, arrows and background shall conform to ANSI A13.1.

2.02 IDENTIFICATION OF VALVES AND SHORT PIPE LENGTHS
A. Identifying devices for valves and the sections of pipe that are too short to be identified with color bands, lettered labels, and arrows shall be identified with metal or plastic tags as specified herein.

B. Metal tags shall be supplied with embossed lettering. Plastic tags shall be of solid black phenolic with white letters. All tags shall be designed to be attached, by chain, to the valves or short pipes.

2.03 SAFETY SIGNS
A. Color, legend and layout shall conform to OSHA 1910.145 requirements.

B. “DANGER” Signs: Two-inch high white letters “Danger” in red oval surrounded by a rectangular black field. Text wording 1½-inch high black capital letters on white field.

C. Signs: Two-inch high yellow letters on black field. Text wording 1½-inch high black capital letters on yellow field.

B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
UTILITY IDENTIFICATION 33 0526-2
D. Chemical precaution signs:

1. In accordance with ANSI Z129.1

2. 12 inches x 14 inches

3. Made to withstand most chemicals. Special ink for printing to be absorbed into sign surface.

Ultraviolet inhibitors and clear face coating for resisting fading and scratching. Semi-rigid linear polyethylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. All labels and identification tags shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, and shall be neat and uniform in appearance. All such tags or labels shall be readily visible from all normal working locations.

3.02 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve tags shall be attached to the valve or structure by means of a chain.

3.03 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Each pipe shall be identified at intervals of 30-feet, and at least one time in each room (where applicable). Piping shall also be identified at a point approximately within 2-feet of all turns, elbows, valves and on the upstream side of all distribution fittings or branches.

B. Pipe identification shall consist of 2 elements, i.e., a lettered label, and a directional label.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Application of identifying devices shall conform to the following color codes in Table in Section 09 9700 – Special Coatings, Part 3.6.

END OF SECTION 33 0526
B629 LAMPSON WELL TREATMENT
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 0507-1
SECTION 40 0507 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide pipe supports, hangers, guides, and anchors, complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures and Section 01 6010 – Seismic Design Criteria.

B. Shop Drawings shall include the following information:

1. Drawings of pipe supports, hangers, anchors and guides

2. Calculations for special supports and anchors for floor and wall mounted equipment over 500 pounds.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Compliance: All piping systems and pipe connections to equipment shall be properly anchored and supported to prevent undue deflection, vibration, dislocation due to line pressures, and stresses on piping, equipment and structures. All supports and parts thereof shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping, except as supplemented or modified in the tables within this Specification. Supports for plumbing piping shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the applicable plumbing code or local administration requirements.

B. Structural Members: Wherever possible, pipes shall be supported from structural members. Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing members, such supplementary members shall be provided. All supplementary members shall be in accordance with the requirements of the building code and the American Institute of Steel Construction.

C. Pipe Hangers: Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation, allowing free expansion and contraction of the piping, and preventing excessive stress on equipment. All hangers shall have a means of vertical adjustment after erection. Hangers shall be designed to prevent becoming disengaged by any movement of the supported pipe. Hangers subject to shock or thrust imposed by the actuation of safety valves, shall include hydraulic shock suppressors. All hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only.

D. Hangers Subject to Horizontal Movements: At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit such movement. Where horizontal pipe movement is greater than 1/2-inch, or where the hanger rod deflection from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold to the hot position of the pipe, the hanger rod and structural attachment shall be offset in such a manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position.

E. Spring-Type Hangers: Spring-type pipe hangers shall be provided for piping subject to vibration or vertical expansion and contraction, such as engine exhausts and similar piping. All spring-type hangers shall be sized to the manufacturer's printed recommendations and the loading conditions encountered. Variable spring supports shall be provided with means to limit misalignment, buckling, eccentric loading, or to prevent overstressing of the spring, and with means to indicate at all times the compression of the spring. Supports shall be capable of accommodating at least 4 times the maximum travel due to thermal expansion.

F. Thermal Expansion: Wherever expansion and contraction of piping is expected, a sufficient number of expansion loops or joints shall be provided, together with the necessary rolling or sliding supports, anchors, guides, pivots, and restraints permitting the piping to expand and contract freely in directions away from the anchored points. All components shall be structurally suitable to HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 0507-2
withstand all loads imposed.

G. Heat Transmission: Supports, hangers, anchors, and guides shall be so designed and insulated, that excessive heat will not be transmitted to the structure or to other equipment.

H. Riser Supports: Where practical, risers shall be supported on each floor with riser clamps and lugs, independent of the connected horizontal piping.

I. Freestanding Piping: Free-standing pipe connections to equipment such as chemical feeders and pumps shall be firmly attached to steel frames fabricated from angles, channels, or I-beams anchored to the structure. Exterior, free-standing overhead piping shall be supported on fabricated pipe stands consisting of pipe columns anchored to concrete footings, with horizontal, welded steel angles and U-bolts or clamps securing the pipes.

J. Materials of Construction:

1. General: All pipe support assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, shall be steel construction, galvanized after fabrication, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Submerged Supports: All submerged piping, as well as piping, conduits, and equipment in hydraulic structures within 24 inches of the water level, shall be supported with support, assemblies, including framing, hardware, constructed of Type 304 stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. All bolts and nuts shall be 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193, Grade B8M, for bolts and ASTM A194, Grade 8M, for nuts.

K. Point Loads: Any meters, valves, heavy equipment, and other point loads on PVC, FRP, and other plastic pipes, shall be supported on both sides, according to manufacturer's recommendations to avoid undue pipe stresses and failures. To avoid point loads, all supports on PVC, FRP, and other plastic piping shall be equipped with extra wide pipe saddles or galvanized steel shields.

L. Noise Reduction: To reduce transmission of noise in piping systems, all copper tubes in buildings and structures shall be wrapped with a 2-inch wide strip of rubber fabric or similar, suitable material at each pipe support, bracket, clip, or hanger.

2.02 SUPPORT SPACING
A. Supports for piping with the longitudinal axis in approximately a horizontal position shall be spaced to prevent excessive sag, bending, and shear stresses in the piping, with special consideration given where components such as flanges and valves impose concentrated loads. Pipe support spacing shall not exceed the maximum spans in the tables on the following pages. For temperatures other than ambient temperatures, or those listed, and for other piping materials or wall thicknesses, the pipe support spacing shall be modified in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Vertical supports shall be provided to prevent the pipe from being overstressed from the combination of all loading effects.

1. Support Spacing for Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 Steel Pipe:

Nominal Pipe Diameter (inches) Maximum Span (feet)
½ 6
¾ and 1 8
1¼ to 2 10
3 12
4 14
6 17
8 and 10 19
12 and 14 23
16 and 18 25
20 and Greater 30
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 0507-3

2. Support Spacing for Welded Fabricated Steel Pipe:
a. The support spacing shall be designed so that the stress on the pipe does not exceed 5,000 psi. Maximum deflection of pipe shall be limited to 1/360th of the span and shall be calculated by using the formula:

L = (7500tD/(32t+D))1/2
where: t = Thickness (inches)
D = Diameter (inches)
L = Maximum span (feet)

3. Support Spacing for Ductile-Iron Pipe:

Nominal Pipe Diameter (inches) Maximum Span (feet)
All Diameters Two supports per pipe length or 10 feet
(one of the 2 supports located at joint)

4. Support Spacing for Copper Tubing:

Nominal Pipe Diameter (inches) Maximum Span (feet)
½ to 1½ 6
2 to 4 10
6 and greater 12

5. Support Spacing for Schedule 40 or 80 PVC Pipe:

Nominal Pipe Diameter (inches) Maximum Span (feet)
½ 4
3/4 4
1 5
1¼ 5
1½ 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
6 10
8 11
10 12
12 13

2.03 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTS
A. Stock Parts: Where not specifically indicated, designs which are generally accepted as exemplifying good engineering practice and use stock or production parts, shall be utilized wherever possible.

Such parts shall be locally available, new, of best commercial quality, designed and rated for the intended purpose.

B. Manufacturers, or Equal:

1. TOLCO Inc.

2. Bergen-Paterson Pipe Support Group., Woburn, MA;

3. Grinnell Corp. (Supply Sales Company), Cranston, RI;

4. NPS Products, Inc., Westborough, MA;

5. Power Piping Company, Pittsburgh, PA;

6. ZSI
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 0507-4

2.04 COATING
A. Galvanizing: Unless otherwise indicated, all fabricated pipe supports other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports shall be blast-cleaned after fabrication and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 - Specifications for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

B. Other Coatings: Other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports, all supports shall receive protective coatings in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 9700 – Special Coatings.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: All pipe supports, hangers, brackets, anchors, guides and inserts shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. All concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be coordinated with the formwork.

B. Appearance: Pipe supports and hangers shall be positioned to produce an orderly, neat piping system. All hanger rods shall be vertical, without offsets, unless noted otherwise. Hangers shall be adjusted to line up groups of pipes at the proper grade for drainage and venting, as close to ceilings or roofs as possible, without interference with other work.

3.02 FABRICATION
A. Quality Control: Pipe hangers and supports shall be fabricated and installed by experienced welders and fitters, using the best welding procedures available. Fabricated supports shall be neat in appearance without sharp corners, burrs, and edges.

END OF SECTION 40 0507
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 0510-1
SECTION 40 0510 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide all piping systems indicated, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all piping in Division 02 and Division 40.

C. The mechanical drawings define the general layout, configuration, routing, method of support, pipe size and pipe type. The mechanical drawings are not pipe construction or fabrication drawings.

Details for construction shall be developed as necessary to construct all mechanical piping systems, to accommodate the specific equipment provided, and to provide all spools, spacers, adapters, and connectors for a complete and functional system.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Shop Drawings shall contain the following information:

1. Drawings: Layout drawings including all necessary dimensions, details, pipe joints, fittings, specials, bolts and nuts, gaskets, valves, appurtenances, anchors, guides, and material lists.

Fabrication drawings shall indicate all spool pieces, spacers, adapters, connectors, fittings and supports to accommodate the equipment and valves in a complete and functional system.

C. Certifications: All necessary certificates, test reports and affidavits of compliance shall be obtained.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Extent of Work: Pipes, fittings and appurtenances shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Pipe, fittings, and appurtenances not expressly shown in the Contract Documents shall be supplied by the Contractor to provide a complete and operable system.

B. Pipe Supports: Pipes shall be adequately supported, restrained and anchored in accordance with Section 40 0507 – Pipe Supports, and as indicated.

C. Lining: Application, thickness and curing of pipe lining shall be in accordance with the applicable Sections of Division 2, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Coating: Application, thickness and curing of pipe coating shall be in accordance with the applicable Sections of Division 2, unless otherwise indicated. Pipes above ground or in structures shall be field-coated in accordance with Section 09 9700 - Special Coating.

E. Pressure Rating: Piping systems shall be designed for the maximum expected pressure.

F. Inspection: Pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture. During the fabrication of the pipe, the ENGINEER shall be given access to all areas where manufacturing is in progress and shall be permitted to make all inspections necessary to confirm compliance with requirements.

G. Tests: Except where otherwise indicated, materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the applicable specifications and standards. Welds shall be tested as indicated.

H. Welding Requirements: Welding procedures used to fabricate pipe shall be prequalified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. Welding procedures shall be reviewed for longitudinal and girth or spiral welds for pipe cylinders, spigot and bell ring attachments, reinforcing plates and ring flange welds, and plates for lug connections.

I. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be done by skilled welders and welding operators who have had adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used. Welders shall be qualified under COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 0510-2
the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 by an independent local, approved testing agency not more than 6 months prior to commencing work on the pipeline. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the WORK shall be used in qualification tests. Qualification testing of welders and materials used during testing are part of the WORK.

2.02 PIPE FLANGES
A. General: Flanges shall have flat faces and shall be attached with bolt holes straddling the vertical axis of the pipe unless otherwise indicated. Attachment of the flanges to the pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C207. Flange faces shall be perpendicular to the axis of the adjoining pipe. Flanges for miscellaneous small pipes shall be in accordance with the standards indicated for these pipes.

B. Pressure Ratings:

1. 150 psi or less: Flanges shall conform to either ANSI/AWWA C207 - Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service--Sizes 4-inch. Through 144-inch, Class D, or ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, 150-lb class.

2. 150 psi to 275 psi: Flanges shall conform to either ANSI/AWWA C207 Class E or Class F, or ANSI/ASME B16.5 150-lb class.

3. 275 psi to 700 psi: Flanges shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.5, 300-lb class.

4. Selection based on test pressure: AWWA flanges shall not be exposed to test pressures greater than 125 percent of rated capacity. For higher test pressures, the next higher rated AWWA flange or an ANSI-rated flange shall be selected.

C. Blind Flanges: Blind flanges shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C207, or as indicated for miscellaneous small pipes.

D. Flange Coating: Machined faces of metal blind flanges and pipe flanges shall be coated with a temporary rust-inhibitive coating to protect the metal until the installation is completed.

E. Flange Bolts: Bolts and nuts shall conform to Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications. Bolts and nuts shall be installed with anti-seize per Loctite, or equal (or thread locker to be confirmed with Fire Camp Operations). Studs and bolts shall extend through the nuts a minimum of ¼-inch. All-thread studs shall be used on all valve flange connections, where space restrictions preclude the use of regular bolts.

F. Insulating Flanges: Insulated flanges shall have bolt holes ¼-inch diameter greater than the bolt diameter.

G. Insulating Flange Sets: Insulating flange sets shall be provided where indicated or as needed. Each insulating flange set shall consist of an insulating gasket, insulating sleeves and washers and a steel washer. Insulating sleeves and washers shall be one piece when flange bolt diameter is 1½-inch or smaller and shall be made of acetal resin. For bolt diameters larger than 1½-inch, insulating sleeves and washers shall be 2-piece and shall be made of polyethylene or phenolic material. Steel washers shall be in accordance with ASTM A 325 - Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. Insulating gaskets shall be full-face.

H. Flange Gaskets:

1. Gaskets for flanged joints used in general water and wastewater service shall be full-faced type, with material and thickness in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C207. Blind flanges shall have gaskets covering the entire inside face of the blind flange and shall be cemented to the blind flange. Ring gaskets shall not be permitted, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Gaskets for flanged joints used in chemicals, air, solvents, hydrocarbons, steam, chlorine and other fluids shall be made of materials compatible with the service, pressure and temperature.

2.03 THREADED INSULATING CONNECTIONS
A. General: Threaded insulating bushings, unions, or couplings, as appropriate, shall be used for joining threaded pipes of dissimilar metals and for piping systems where corrosion control and cathodic protection are involved.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 0510-3
B. Materials: Threaded insulating connections shall be of nylon, Teflon, polycarbonate, polyethylene or other non-conductive materials, and shall have ratings and properties to suit the service and loading conditions.

2.04 MECHANICAL-TYPE COUPLINGS (GROOVED OR BANDED PIPE) A. General: Cast mechanical-type couplings shall be provided where indicated. The couplings shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications. Gaskets for mechanical-type couplings shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized, in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations. The wall thickness of grooved piping shall conform with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations to suit the highest expected pressure. To avoid stress on equipment, equipment connections with mechanical-type couplings shall have rigid-grooved couplings or flexible type coupling with harness in sizes where rigid couplings are not available, unless thrust restraint is provided by other means. Mechanical-type couplings shall be bonded. The Subcontractor shall have the coupling manufacturer's service representative verify the correct choice and application of couplings and gaskets, and the workmanship, to assure a correct installation. To assure uniform and compatible piping components, all grooved fittings, couplings and valves shall be from the same manufacturer.

2.05 SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS
A. Construction: Sleeve-type couplings shall be provided where indicated, in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C219 - Standard for Bolted Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe. Couplings shall be steel with steel bolts, without pipe stop. Couplings shall be of sizes to fit the pipe and fittings indicated. The middle ring shall be not less than ¼-inch thick or at least the same wall thickness as the pipe to which the coupling is connected. If the strength of the middle ring material is less than the strength of the pipe material, the thickness of the middle ring shall be increased to have the same strength as the pipe. The coupling shall be either 5 or 7 inches long for sizes up to and including 30 inches and 10 inches long for sizes greater than 30 inches, for standard steel couplings, and 16 inches long for long-sleeve couplings. The followers shall be single-piece contoured mill sections welded and cold-expanded as required for the middle rings, and of sufficient strength to accommodate the number of bolts necessary to obtain adequate gasket pressures without excessive rolling. The shape of the follower shall be of such design as to provide positive confinement of the gasket. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications. Buried sleeve-type couplings shall be epoxy-coated at the factory as indicated.

B. Pipe Preparation: Where indicated, the ends of the pipe shall be prepared for flexible steel couplings. Plain ends for use with couplings shall be smooth and round for a distance of 12 inches from the ends of the pipe, with outside diameter not more than 1/64-inch smaller than the nominal outside diameter of the pipe. The middle ring shall be tested by cold-expanding a minimum of one percent beyond the yield point, to proof-test the weld to the strength of the parent metal. The weld of the middle ring shall be subjected to air test for porosity.

C. Gaskets:

1. Gaskets for sleeve-type couplings shall be rubber-compound material that will not deteriorate from age or exposure to air under normal storage or use conditions. Gaskets for wastewater and sewerage applications shall be Buna "N," Grade 60, or equivalent suitable elastomer.

The rubber in the gasket shall meet the following specifications:
a. Color - Jet Black
b. Surface - Non-blooming
c. Durometer Hardness - 74 plus and minus 5
d. Tensile Strength - 1000 psi Minimum
e. Elongation - 175 percent Minimum

2. The gaskets shall be immune to attack by impurities normally found in water or wastewater.

All gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2000 - Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications, AA709Z, meeting Suffix B13 Grade 3, except as noted above. Where sleeve couplings are used in water containing chloramine or other fluids, which COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 0510-4
attack rubber materials, gasket material shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized.

D. Insulating Couplings: Where insulating couplings are required, both ends of the coupling shall have a wedge-shaped gasket which assembles over a rubber sleeve of an insulating compound in order to obtain insulation of all coupling metal parts from the pipe.

E. Restrained Joints: Sleeve-type couplings on pressure lines shall be harnessed unless thrust restraint is provided by other means. Harnesses shall be designed by the pipe manufacturer in accordance with AWWA Manual M11, or as indicated. Harness sets shall be designed for the maximum test pressure of the pipe in which they are installed. Where harness sets are installed near the suction and discharge of the pump, harness bolts shall have zero elongation to prevent misalignment of the pump imparted by the thrust within the piping system.

2.06 DISMANTLING JOINTS
A. General: Dismantling joints shall be provided where indicated, and provide up to 5” of longitudinal adjustment and up to 2 degrees of misalignment in flanged piping systems. The flange spool shall meet the requirements of AWWA Class D Ring Flange, compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles. The end and body ring shall meet the requirements of ASTM A536 ductile iron meeting or exceeding Grade 65-45-12 for 3” to 12” sizes and ASTM A36 Carbon Steel with AWWA C207 Class D flanges for 14” to 72” sizes. Dismantling joints shall be provided with gaskets compounded for water and sewer service in accordance with ASTM D2000. Dismantling joints shall have a fusion bonded epoxy coating. Bolts and nuts (including tie-rods) shall conform to the requirements of Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications. Dismantling joints shall be per Romac Industries, or approved equal.

2.07 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Piping subject to expansion and contraction shall be provided with sufficient means to compensate for such movement without exertion of undue forces to equipment or structures. This may be accomplished with expansion loops, bellow-type expansion joints or sliding-type expansion joints.

Expansion joints shall be of stainless steel, rubber, or other materials best suited for each individual service.

2.08 PIPE THREADS
A. Pipe threads shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (inch), and be made up with Teflon tape or chemical sealant unless otherwise indicated.

2.09 PIPE INSULATION
A. Pipe thermal insulation for exterior freeze protection shall be self-sealing, flexible, tubular polyolefin/ polyethylene foam insulation. The insulation shall have a low thermal conductivity (not to exceed

0.04 W/mK) and shall have a service temperature range between -330°F and 120°F. Minimum thickness shall be 1-inch. Insulation shall be acceptable for use with heat tracing/ heat tape.

B. Where called out in the Contract Documents, heat tape shall be provided for freeze protection. Heat tape shall be wrap-type cable with built-in thermostat for automatic heat control and energy efficiency. It shall be used in conjunction with foam insulation. The low wattage design shall utilize a 120-volt power with outlet plug. Heat tape shall be manufactured by Wrap-On Co., Inc or approved equal.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 0510-5
C. Where called out in the Contract Documents, Pipe insulation for personnel protection against high temperature shall be provided. Protective insulation shall be fiber glass bonded with a thermosetting resin with a jacket designed to protect personnel again accidental contact with hot pipes. The insulation shall be designed to be used on systems operating up to 1000°F. Minimum thickness shall be 1-inch.

2.10 GENERAL
A. Pipes, fittings and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Division 2 and Division 40.

B. Lined Piping Systems: The lining manufacturer shall take full responsibility for the complete, final product and its application. Pipe ends and joints of lined pipes at screwed flanges shall be epoxy-coated to assure continuous protection.

C. Core Drilling: Where core drilling is required for pipes passing through existing concrete, core drilling locations shall be determined by radiograph of concrete construction to avoid damage to embedded raceways and reinforcing bars.

D. Cleanup: After completion of the WORK, cuttings, joining and wrapping materials, and other scattered debris shall be removed from the Site. The entire piping system shall be handed over in a clean and functional condition.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPE
A. Piping shall be installed in accordance with the respective piping material Sections within Division 02 and Division 40.

END OF SECTION 40 0513
STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING 40 0523-1
SECTION 40 0523 - STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish all materials, tools, equipment, transportation, labor, supervision and incidentals required to supply, store, install, clean, and test the shop fabricated stainless steel pipe & fittings as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

B. The requirements of Section 40 0510 – Common Work Results for Process Piping apply to the WORK of this Section.

1.02 QUALIFICATIONS
A. All shop fabricated stainless steel pipe and fitting shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who is experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture and fabrication of the items to be furnished. The pipe and fittings shall be shop fabricated and field installed in accordance with common industry wide practices and methods and shall comply with these specifications.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for review and approval piping layouts, schedules, shop fabrication drawings, specifications, catalog cuts and other data necessary to show conformance of the complete piping systems to the specifications. The submittal shall include dimensions, fittings, locations of equipment, valves, and appurtenances, joint locations and details, types and locations of supports, coordination with all other work and existing conditions, and all other pertinent technical specifications for the piping systems to be furnished.

B. Shop fabrication drawings shall show alloys, diameters, pipe wall thicknesses, flanges and other joint preparation details, finishing details, dimensions, fittings and other appurtenances to be supplied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe shall be manufactured from ASTM-A240 annealed and pickled sheets and plates in accordance with ASTM A778 in type (304L and 316L) stainless steel. Pipe shall be manufactured to nominal pipe sizes as listed in ANSI B36.19, and shall have the following nominal wall thicknesses. 304L stainless is required for all project stainless piping, with the exception of the permeate piping upstream of the permeate pump, and the stainless piping above the chlorine contact basin as depicted in M8.4, which shall be 316L stainless. Rolled grooved ends will be acceptable. *See Table
Pipe Size
(inches)
Outside
Diameter
(inches)
Identification
Wall
Thickness
- t -
(inches)
Inside
Diameter
- d -
(inches)
Steel Stainless
Steel
Schedule No. Iron Pipe Size Schedule No.
1/8 0.405
.

STD
XS
.
40 80
10S
40S
80S
.049
.068
.095
.307
.269
.215
STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING 40 0523-2
Pipe Size
(inches)
Outside
Diameter
(inches)
Identification
Wall
Thickness
- t -
(inches)
Inside
Diameter
- d -
(inches)
Steel Stainless
Steel
Schedule No. Iron Pipe Size Schedule No.
1/4 0.540
.

STD
XS
.
40 80
10S
40S
80S
.065
.088
.119
.410
.364
.302
3/8 0.675
.

STD
XS
.
40 80
10S
40S
80S
.065
.091
.126
.545
.493
.423
1/2 0.840
.
.

STD
XS
.

XXS
.
.
40 80
160
.
5S
10S
40S
80S
.
.
.065
.083
.109
.147
.187
.294
.710
.674
.622
.546
.466
.252
3/4 1.050
.
.

STD
XS
.

XXS
.
.
40 80
160
.
5S
10S
40S
80S
.
.
.065
.083
.113
.154
.219
.308
.920
.884
.824
.742
.612
.434
1 1.315
.
.

STD
XS
.

XXS
.
.
40 80
160
.
5S
10S
40S
80S
.
.
.065
.109
.133
.179
.250
.358

1.185

1.097

1.049
.957
.815
.599
1 1/4 1.660
.
.

STD
XS
.

XXS
.
.
40 80
160
.
5S
10S
40S
80S
.
.
.065
.109
.140
.191
.250
.382

1.530

1.442

1.380

1.278

1.160
.896
1 1/2 1.900
.
.

STD
XS
.

XXS
.
.
40 80
160
.
5S
10S
40S
80S
.
.
.065
.109
.145
.200
.281
.400

1.770

1.682

1.610

1.500

1.338

1.100
STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING 40 0523-3
Pipe Size
(inches)
Outside
Diameter
(inches)
Identification
Wall
Thickness
- t -
(inches)
Inside
Diameter
- d -
(inches)
Steel Stainless
Steel
Schedule No. Iron Pipe Size Schedule No.
2 2.375
.
.

STD
XS
.

XXS
.
.
40 80
160
.
5S
10S
40S
80S
.
.
.065
.109
.154
.218
.344
.436

2.245

2.157

2.067

1.939

1.687

1.503
2 1/2 2.875
.
.

STD
XS
.

XXS
.
.
40 80
160
.
5S
10S
40S
80S
.
.
.083
.120
.203
.276
.375
.552

2.709

2.635

2.469

2.323

2.125

1.771
3 3.500
.
.

STD
XS
.

XXS
.
.
40 80
160
.
5S
10S
40S
80S
.
.
.083
.120
.216
.300
.438
.600

3.334

3.260

3.068

2.900

2.624

2.300
3 1/2 4.000
.
.

STD
XS
.
.
40 80
5S
10S
40S
80S
.083
.120
.226
.318

3.834

3.760

3.548

3.364
4 4.500
.
.

STD
XS
.
.

XXS
.
.
40 80
120
160
.
5S
10S
40S
80S
.
.
.
.083
.120
.237
.337
.438
.531
.674

4.334

4.260

4.026

3.826

3.624

3.438

3.152
5 5.563
.
.

STD
XS
.
.

XXS
.
.
40 80
120
160
.
5S
10S
40S
80S
.
.
.
.109
.134
.258
.375
.500
.625
.750

5.345

5.295

5.047

4.813

4.563

4.313

4.063
STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING 40 0523-4
Pipe Size
(inches)
Outside
Diameter
(inches)
Identification
Wall
Thickness
- t -
(inches)
Inside
Diameter
- d -
(inches)
Steel Stainless
Steel
Schedule No. Iron Pipe Size Schedule No.
6 6.625
.
.

STD
XS
.
.

XXS
.
.
40 80
120
160
.
5S
10S
40S
80S
.
.
.
.109
.134
.280
.432
.562
.718
.864

6.407

6.357

6.065

5.761

5.501

5.187

4.897
8 8.625
.
.
.
.

STD
.

XS
.
.
.

XXS
.
.
.
20 30
40 60
80 100
120
140
.
160
5S
10S
.
.
40S
.
80S
.
.
.
.
.
.109
.148
.250
.277
.322
.406
.500
.594
.719
.812
.875
.906

8.407

8.329

8.125

8.071

7.981

7.813

7.625

7.437

7.187

7.001

6.875

6.813
10 10.750
.
.
.
.

STD
XS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20 30
40 60
80 100
120
140
160
5S
10S
.
.
40S
80S
.
.
.
.
.
.134
.165
.250
.307
.365
.500
.594
.719
.844

1.000

1.125

10.482

10.420

10.250

10.136

10.020

9.750

9.562

9.312

9.062

8.750

8.500
STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING 40 0523-5
Pipe Size
(inches)
Outside
Diameter
(inches)
Identification
Wall
Thickness
- t -
(inches)
Inside
Diameter
- d -
(inches)
Steel Stainless
Steel
Schedule No. Iron Pipe Size Schedule No.
12 12.75
.
.
.
.

STD
.

XS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20 30
.
40 .
60 80
100
120
140
160
5S
10S
.
.
40S
.
80S
.
.
.
.
.
.
.156
.180
.250
.330
.375
.406
.500
.562
.688
.844

1.000

1.125

1.312

12.438

12.390

12.250

12.090

12.000

11.938

11.750

11.626

11.374

11.062

10.750

10.500

10.126
14 14.00
.
.
.
.

STD
.

XS
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
10 20
30 40
.
60 80
100
120
140
160
5S
10S
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
156
.188
.250
.312
.375
.438
.500
.594
.750
.938

1.094

1.250

1.406

13.688

13.624

13.500

13.376

13.250

13.124

13.000

12.812

12.500

12.124

11.812

11.500

11.188
16 16.00
.
.
.
.

STD
XS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10 20
30 40
60 80
100
120
140
160
5S
10S
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.165
.188
.250
.312
.375
.500
.656
.844

1.031

1.219

1.438

1.594

15.670

15.624

15.500

15.376

15.250

15.000

14.688

14.312

13.938

13.562

13.124

12.812
STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING 40 0523-6
Pipe Size
(inches)
Outside
Diameter
(inches)
Identification
Wall
Thickness
- t -
(inches)
Inside
Diameter
- d -
(inches)
Steel Stainless
Steel
Schedule No. Iron Pipe Size Schedule No.
18 18.00
.
.
.
.

STD
.

XS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10 20
.
30 .
40 60
80 100
120
140
160
5S
10S
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.165
.188
.250
.312
.375
.438
.500
.562
.750
.938

1.156

1.375

1.562

1.781

17.670

17.624

17.500

17.376

17.250

17.124

17.000

16.876

16.500

16.124

15.688

15.250

14.876

14.438
20 20.00
.
.
.

STD
XS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10 20
30 40
60 80
100
120
140
160
5S
10S
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.188
.218
.250
.375
.500
.594
.812

1.031

1.281

1.500

1.750

1.969

19.624

19.564

19.500

19.250

19.000

18.812

18.376

17.938

17.438

17.000

16.500

16.062
22 22.00
.
.
.

STD
XS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10 20
30 60
80 100
120
140
160
5S
10S
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.188
.218
.250
.375
.500
.875

1.125

1.375

1.625

1.875

2.125

21.624

21.564

21.500

21.250

21.000

20.250

19.75 19.25

18.75 18.25

17.75 STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING 40 0523-7 Pipe Size
(inches)
Outside
Diameter
(inches)
Identification
Wall
Thickness
- t -
(inches)
Inside
Diameter
- d -
(inches)
Steel Stainless
Steel
Schedule No. Iron Pipe Size Schedule No.
24 24.00
.
.

STD
XS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10 20
.
30 40
60 80
100
120
140
160
5S
10S
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.218
.250
.375
.500
.562
.688
.969

1.219

1.531

1.812

2.062

2.344

23.564

23.500

23.250

23.000

22.876

22.624

22.062

21.562

20.938

20.376

19.876

19.312
26 26.00
.

STD
XS
10 .
20 .
.
.
.312
.375
.500

25.376

25.250

25.000
28 28.00
.

STD
XS
.
10 .
20 30
.
.
.
.
.312
.375
.500
.625

27.376

27.250

27.000

26.750
30 30.00
.
.

STD
XS
.
.
10 .
20 30
5S
10S
.
.
.
.250
.312
.375
.500
.625

29.500

29.376

29.250

29.000

28.750
32 32.00
.

STD
XS
.
.
10 .
20 30
40 .
.
.
.
.
.312
.375
.500
.625
.688

31.376

31.250

31.000

30.750

30.624
34 34.00
.

STD
XS
.
.
10 .
20 30
40 .
.
.
.
.
.344
.375
.500
.625
.688

33.312

33.250

33.000

32.750

32.624
STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING 40 0523-8
Pipe Size
(inches)
Outside
Diameter
(inches)
Identification
Wall
Thickness
- t -
(inches)
Inside
Diameter
- d -
(inches)
Steel Stainless
Steel
Schedule No. Iron Pipe Size Schedule No.
36 36.00
.

STD
XS
.
.
10 .
20 30
40 .
.
.
.
.
.312
.375
.500
.625
.750

35.376

35.250

35.000

34.750

34.500
42 42.00
STD
XS
.
.
.
20 30
40 .
.
.
.
.375
.500
.625
.750

41.250

41.000

40.720

40.500
• Standard wall - STD
• Extra strong wall - XS
• Double extra strong wall - XXS
B. Fittings shall be butt weld type manufactured in accordance with ASTM-A-774 of the same raw material and in the same thicknesses as the pipe. Long radius elbows up to 24 inches diameter shall be smooth flow; i.e., centerline to end of elbow equals 1.5 times the nominal pipe size. All short radius, special radius, and reducing elbows and long radius elbows greater than 24 inches diameter shall be of mitered construction with at least five (5) miter sections for 90 degree bends, three (3) mitered sections for 45 to 60 degree bends, and two (2) mitered sections for 30 degree and smaller bends. Reducers shall be straight tapered, cone type. Tees, crosses, laterals and wyes shall be shop fabricated from pipe.

C. The finish on the raw material, manufactured to ASTM A240 will be No. 1, HRAP (hot rolled annealed and pickled) or better. The finish on the completed pipe and fittings shall be as specified in ASTM A778 and A774, respectively. See PART 3 of this specification for pickling and passivation requirements on piping fabrications.

2.02 FLANGES
A. Flanged pipe ends shall be made up of type (304L or 316L) stainless steel slip-on type rolled angle face rings drilled to ANSI 16.1 class 125 standard. The angle face ring thickness shall be equal to or greater than the wall of the pipe or fitting to which it is welded and it shall be continuously welded on both sides to the pipe or fitting. The angle leg shall not interfere with the flange bolt holes.

2.03 COUPLINGS
A. The piping will be shop prepared for pipe couplings where shown on the drawings or specified herein.

1. Sleeve type couplings shall be of standard steel construction. Pipe shall be plain end with external weld beads ground smooth to insure proper gasket seating. For pressure pipe lines, sleeve coupling joints will be restrained by the use of harness rods connecting across the joint to flange lugs on adjacent flange joints. Where no adjacent flange joints exist, stainless steel harness lugs shall be welded to the pipe to receive the harness rods. All sleeve couplings, flange lugs, harness rods and hardware shall be provided.

STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING 40 0523-9

2. Arched band type couplings shall be stainless steel of equal of superior alloy and wall thickness as the pipe and will be Depend-O-Lok type as manufactured by Brico or equal.

Couplings will be Fixed – FxF, Expansion – ExE, of Fixed by Expansion – FxE as noted on the drawings or as required. The pipe shall be plain end with external weld beads ground smooth and with S.S. restraining rings shop welded to the piping for fixed type couplings.

3. Split type couplings shall be malleable iron or ductile iron. Gaskets shall be suitable for the service conditions. The pipe ends shall be roll grooved to the coupling manufacturers specifications. Where roll grooving is impractical, the pipe shall have heavy wall machine grooved pipe nipples or machined ring collars fully welded to the pipe or fitting. Nipples shall be taper or bored to the I.D. of the adjoining pipe to allow full weld penetration. Collars shall be welded on both sides to the piping.

4. Expansion couplings shall be the flanged rubber arch type. Pipe flanges shall be provided for these couplings where shown on the drawing.

2.04 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Threaded pipe, gauge or instrument connections shall be made using stainless steel 150-pound threaded half couplings conforming to ASTM A182 or ASTM A276, shop welded to the pipe at the locations shown on the drawings.

2.05 JOINTS
A. Flanges shall be provided as a minimum at all flanged valves, meters, couplings, and other equipment. Couplings will be provided as shown on the drawings.

B. Pipe and fitting spools shall be shop fabricated to the fullest extent possible in 40’0” maximum lengths with 7’6” maximum widths for efficient commercial transport to the project site. Spools with fitting may exceed 40 ft so long as length allows commercial transport. Smaller pipe spools shall be provided with joints as shown on the drawings for special handling, installation and/or disassembly requirements.

C. All other joints required for shipping, handling and installation of the piping spools shall be (filed welds, flange joints, sleeve couplings, band couplings, or split couplings.)

2.06 BOLTING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall supply and install flange bolting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 – GENERAL
A. Welding of pipe spools shall be performed using welders and procedures qualified in accordance with ASME Section IX. Piping with wall thicknesses up to and including 11 gauge (0.125”) shall be welded with the TIG (GTAW) process. Heavier walls shall be beveled according to procedure, root pas welded with TIG (GTAW), and have subsequent weld passes performed using the TIG (GTAW), or Metallic Arc (SMAW) process. Filler metal of equal or superior ELC grades only shall be added to all welds to provide a cross section at the weld equal to or greater than the parent metal. Weld deposit shall be smooth and evenly distributed, weld reinforcement shall be as follows:

Wall Thickness Weld Reinforcement (Max)
I.D. O.D.

Up to 12 Ga. (0.109”) 1/16” 3/32”
11 Ga. (0.125”) to 3.16” PI. 3/32” 1/8”
1/4” Plate & Larger 1/8” 3/16”
Concavity, undercut, cracks or crevices shall not be allowed. Butt welds shall have full penetration to the interior surface, and inert argon gas shielding shall be provided to the interior and exterior of the joint. Angle face rings shall be continuously welded on both sides to pipe or fitting. Exterior welds, such as the back side of face rings or flanges and structural attachments, may be welded by STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING 40 0523-10
the MIG (GMAW) or Metallic Arc (SMAW) process; however, care must be taken to avoid melting through to the interior surface on very light walls. Excessive weld deposits, slag, splatter and projections shall be removed by grinding. Welds on gasket surfaces shall be ground smooth.

B. Spools shall be fabricated to the “Pipe Fabrication Institute” fabricating tolerances ES-3 (1981).

C. After shop fabrication into pipe spools, exterior welds shall be manually scrubbed or brushed win non-metallic pads or stainless steel wire brushes to remove weld discoloration, rinsed with clean water and allowed to air dry. The finish on the completed piping shall have a glass bead blasted surface, surface preparation SSPC-SP5/NACE-1. Pickle and passivate by complete immersion (15 minutes minimum) in a citric acid or nitric acid, based solution, heated to the correct temperature. Material to be rinsed in a neutralizing bath and air dried. Use of stainless steel pipe/fittings received Full Immersion Pickling and Passivation at the time of manufacturer, followed by field cleaning weld effected areas with “Wonder Gel” (or equal) on the O.D. and I.D., per the manufacturer’s listed procedure, is acceptable.

D. All fabricated piping shall have openings plugged and flanges secured for storage and/or transport after fabrication. All fabricated piping shall be piece marked with identifying number or codes which correspond to the layout and installation drawings. The marks will be located on the spools at opposite ends and 180 degrees apart.

E. Use extreme care to avoid the contact of any ferrous materials with the stainless steel piping. All saws, drills, files, wire brushes, etc. shall be uses for stainless steel piping only. Pipe storage and fabrication racks shall be non-ferrous or stainless steel or rubber lined. Nylon slings or straps or ally chains or cable shall be used for handling stainless steel piping. After installation, wash and rinse all foreign matter from the piping surface. If rusting of embedded iron occurs, pickle the affected surface with Oakite Deoxidizer SS, Wonder Gel, or equal, scrub with stainless steel brushes and rinse clean.

F. Supply and install the stainless steel piping with a consistently clean surface. After installation, identifying spool piece marks shall be removed with paint thinner or solvents and the entire stainless steel surface shall be washed with detergent and rinsed clean. Final marking of the pipeline will be in accordance with Section 40 0553 – Identification for Process Piping.

G. After installation, the piping system shall be tested according to Section 40 0513 – Common Work Results for Process Piping.

END OF SECTION 40 0523
PLASTIC PROCESS PIPING 40 0530-1
SECTION 40 0530 - PLASTIC PROCESS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish and install polyvinyl chloride, chlorinated polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, and polypropylene pipe and fittings in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.02 PIPE DESIGNATIONS:

A. The following plastic pipe designations are defined:

Designation Definition
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
CPVC Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
PE Polyethylene
PP Polypropylene

1.03 RELATED WORK SPECFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Related Sections:

1. Dvision 31 – Earthwork

2. Section 40 0507 – Pipe Supports

3. Section 40 0513 – Common Work Results for Process Piping

4. Section 40 0560 – Common Work Results for Process Valves

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittals Procedures.

B. Submit materials list and catalogue data sheets naming each product to be used identified by manufacturer and type number.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE REFERENCES
A. This section contains references to some or all of the following documents, most recent edition. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Reference Title
ASTM D1248 Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials ASTM D1784 Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds
ASTM D1785 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 ASTM D2241 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR series) ASTM D2464 Threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 ASTM D2466 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 ASTM D2467 Socket-Type Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 ASTM D2564 Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3034 Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings ASTM D4101 Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials ASTM F402 Practice for Safe Handling of Solvent Cements and Primers used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings
ASTM F437 Threaded Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 PLASTIC PROCESS PIPING 40 0530-2
Reference Title
ASTM F438 Socket-Type Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 ASTM F439 Socket-Type Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 ASTM F441 Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 ASTM F477 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe ASTM F493 Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PVC PIPE
A. General: PVC materials for pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D1784, Cell Classification 12454-B. Pipe and fitting materials shall be specially formulated with sufficient UV protection additives to provide for long term outdoor exposure with no deleterious effects. Flanges shall be one-piece solid design or two-part van stone type which utilize the tapered, serrated face and fullface gasket technique for joining and are compatible with ANSIN16.5 Class 150 metal flanges.

Unions shall be the O-ring type having interchangeable components with true union valves for maximum system versatility.

B. Schedule 40, 80, and 120: Pipe in accordance with ASTM D1785. Schedule 80 PVC socket type fittings shall conform to ASTM D2467. Schedule 40 PVC fittings shall conform to ASTM D2466.

PVC solvent weld cement for socket connections shall meet the requirement of ASTM D2564/ Schedule 80 PVC threaded fittings shall conform to ASTM D2464.

2.02 POLYETHYLENE PIPE
A. Pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3350, NSF14/61, and AWWA C901/C906.

2.03 POLYETHYLENE TUBING
A. Polyethylene tubing shall be extruded from high molecular weight resins and conform with ASTM D-148 Type 1, Class A, Category 4, Grade E5. Stress crack resistance shall be per ASTM D-1693.

Tubing shall have a minimum working pressure of 120 psi. Fittings shall be polyethylene construction, same type as for polypropylene. All connections shall be leak proof.

2.04 POLYPROPYLENE TUBING
A. Polypropylene tubing shall be formulated of polypropylene conforming to ASTM D4101. Tubing shall have a working pressure of 300 psi. Fittings shall be FAST and TITE polypropylene fittings with SST grab ring and Viton O-rings. PVC insert fittings and SST hose clamps may only be used as approved by the Engineer. All connections shall be leak proof.

2.05 BRAIDED VINYL TUBING
A. Install clear braided vinyl tubing for diluted polymer solution. A synthetic fiber braid shall be sandwiched between two layers of plasticized PVC. The nominal inside diameter shall be one (1) inch, wall thickness 5/32”. Tubing shall be rated for a rated working pressure of 140 psi.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. General: In accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and Section 40 0513 – Common Work Results for Process Piping, whichever is more stringent.

B. Pipe and fittings shall be of the sizes indicated. Clean pipe interior of all foreign matter before installing. Pipe shall be square cut with fine tooth saw or other cutter or knife designed for use with plastic pipe. Remove burrs by smoothing edges with a knife, file, or sandpaper. Replace any section of pipe found to be defective or damaged with new acceptable pipe. Handle pipe carefully PLASTIC PROCESS PIPING 40 0530-3
to prevent gouging or scratching. Any length of pipe has a gouge, scratch, or other permanent indentation more than 10 percent of the wall thickness in depth shall be rejected.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF SOLVENT WELD JOINT TYPE PIPE
A. In accordance with the recommendations of the pipe manufacturer and the following supplementary requirements:

1. Do not solvent weld joints if it is raining, if atmospheric temperature is below 40 degrees F or above 90 degrees F, if the pipe is exposed to direct sunlight.

2. Test fit dry pipe and fittings before applying cement. Pipe should enter socket without forcing at least one-third but not more than two-thirds the depth of socket. Fittings that are looser or tighter shall not be used. Thoroughly clean and dry the pipe end and socket of fitting with methyl, ethyl, ketone, acetone, or similar cleaner. Apply cement evenly to outside surface and end of pipe and inside surface of socket. Avoid excess application of cement but insure complete coverage of all bonding surfaces. Mark depth of socket on pipe to guide application of cement and insure full insertion of pipe. Insert pipe in socket, twisting pipe or fitting approximately ½ turn as pipe is being seated in socket. Make sure pipe is fully seated providing a bond between end of pipe and shoulder of socket. Immediately wipe excess cement from pipe leaving no more than a 1/8-inch fillet at fitting end. Hold assembled joint in place for approximately 15 seconds and allow to set for 30 minutes before moving. Avoid rough handling for 48 hours. Longer periods may be required in cold or wet weather.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF TUBING
A. Carefully slip tubing inside of PVC conduits without kinking or damaging the tubing. Tubing shall be continuous between boxes and equipment. No joints shall be allowed in conduits. Tubing shall be tested as specified in Section 40 0513 – Common Work Results for Process Piping for 72 hours with no visible leaks.

3.04 TESTING
A. In accordance with Section 33 0110.58 – Disinfection of Water Utility Piping Systems and Section 40 0510 – Common Work Results for Process Piping.

END OF SECTION 40 0530
COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES 40 0551-1
SECTION 40 0551 - COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish and install all valves, actuators, and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. This Section shall apply to valves, actuators, and appurtenances to be provided by process equipment vendors as part of process systems or equipment. The vendor shall indicate any deviations from the Contract Documents.

B. The requirements of Section 46 0000 – Water and Wastewater Equipment, apply to the WORK of this Section.

C. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all valves and valve actuators except where otherwise indicated. Valves and actuators in particular locations may require a combination of units, sensors, limit switches, and controls indicated in other Sections of the Specifications.

D. Where a valve is to be supported by means other than the piping to which it is attached, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the valve manufacturer a design for support and foundation that satisfies the criteria in Section 46 0000. The design, including drawings and calculations sealed by an engineer, shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings. When the design is approved, the support shall be provided.

E. Unit Responsibility: A single manufacturer shall be made responsible for coordination of design, assembly, testing, and furnishing of each valve; however, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for compliance with the requirements of each valve section. Unless indicated otherwise, the responsible manufacturer shall be the manufacturer of the valve.

F. Single Manufacturer: Where two or more valves of the same type and size are required, the valves shall be furnished by the same manufacturer.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall contain the following information:

1. Valve name, size, CV factor, pressure rating and identification number (if any).

2. Complete information on valve actuator, including size, Manufacturer, model number, limit switches, and mounting.

3. Cavitation limits for all control valves.

4. Assembly drawings showing part nomenclature, materials, dimensions, weights, and relationships of valve handles, handwheels, position indicators, limit switches, integral control systems, needle valves, and control systems.

C. Technical Manual: The Technical Manual shall contain the required information for each valve.

D. Spare Parts List: A Spare Parts List shall contain the required information for each valve assembly, where indicated.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valve manufacturer and model shall be as described in the Drawings or Engineer approved equal.

1.04 SPARE PARTS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the required spare parts suitably packaged and labeled with the valve name, location, and identification number. The CONTRACTOR shall also furnish the name, address, and telephone number of the nearest distributor for the spare parts of each valve. Spare parts are intended for use by the OWNER after expiration of the correction of defects period.

COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES 40 0551-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCTS
A. General: Valves and gates shall be new and of current manufacture. Shut-off valves 6-inches and larger shall have actuators with position indicators. Buried valves shall be provided with valve boxes and covers containing position indicators and valve extensions. Manual shut-off valves mounted higher than 7-feet above working level shall be provided with chain actuators. Valves with no clear way to determine position shall be provided with position indicators. Stem extensions shall be provided on valves where operation of the valve cannot be easily accomplished from ground level.

B. Valve Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, valve actuators shall be in accordance with Section 40 9213 – Primary Control Valves and Section 40 9243 – Rotary Actuators.

C. Valve Labeling: A label shall be provided on all shut-off valves and control valves except for hose bibs. The label shall be of 1/16-inch plastic or steel, minimum 2 inches by 4 inches in size, as indicated in Section 33 0526 – Utility Identification, and shall by permanently attached to the valve or on the wall adjacent to the valve as directed by the ENGINEER.

D. Valve Testing: As a minimum, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by the ENGINEER, valves 3 inches in diameter and smaller shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer's standard and 4 inches in diameter and larger shall be factory tested as follows:

1. Hydrostatic Testing: Valve bodies shall be subjected to internal hydrostatic pressure equivalent to twice the water rated pressure of the valve. Metallic valves rating pressures shall be at 100 degrees F and plastic valves shall be 73 degrees, or at higher temperature according to type of material. During the hydrostatic test, there shall be no leakage through the valve body, end joints, or shaft seals, nor shall any part of the valve be permanently deformed. The duration shall be sufficient time to allow visual examination for leakage.

Test duration shall be at least 10 minutes.

2. Seat Testing: Valves shall be tested for leaks in the closed position with the pressure differential across the seat equal to the water rated pressure of the valve. The duration of test shall be sufficient time to allow visual examination for leakage. Test duration shall be at least 10 minutes. Leakage past the closed valve shall not exceed 1 fluid ounce per hour per inch diameter for metal seated valves and drop-tight for resilient seated valves.

3. Performance Testing: All valves shall be shop operated from fully closed to fully open position and reverse under no-flow conditions in order to demonstrate the valve assembly operates properly.

E. Valve Marking: Valve bodies shall be permanently marked in accordance with MSS SP25 - Standard Marking Systems for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions.

2.02 MATERIALS
A. General: Materials shall be suitable for the intended application. Materials not indicated shall be high-grade standard commercial quality, free from defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended. Unless otherwise indicated, valve and actuator bodies shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Cast Iron: Close-grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings, Class 30, or to ASTM A126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings.

2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A536 - Ductile Iron Castings, or to ASTM A395 - Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures.

3. Steel: ASTM A216 - Steel Castings, Carbon Suitable for Fusion Welding for HighTemperature Service, or to ASTM A515 - Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service.

4. Bronze: ASTM B62 - Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, and valve stems not subject to dezincification shall conform to ASTM B584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications.

COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES 40 0551-3

5. Stainless Steel: Stainless steel valve and operator bodies and trim shall conform to ASTM A351 - Steel Castings, Austenitic, for High-Temperature Service, Grade CF8M, or shall be Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.

6. PVC: Poly Vinyl Chloride materials for valve body, flanges, and cover shall conform to Cell Classification 12454.

7. CPVC: Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride materials for valve body, flanges, and cover shall conform to Cell Classification 23447.

8. NSF Standard 14 and 61: All materials shall be listed for use in contact with potable water, where applicable.

F. Bodies: Valve bodies shall be cast, molded (in the case of plastic valves), forged, or welded of the materials indicated, with smooth interior passages. Wall thicknesses shall be uniform in agreement with the applicable standards for each type of valve, without casting defects, pinholes, or other defects that could weaken the body. Welds on welded bodies shall be done by certified welders and shall be ground smooth. Valve ends shall be as indicated, and be rated for the maximum temperature and pressure to which the valve will be subjected.

G. Bonnets: Valve bonnets shall be clamped, screwed, or flanged to the body and shall be of the same material, temperature, and pressure rating as the body. The bonnets shall have provision for the stem seal with the necessary glands, packing nuts, or yokes. Below grade valves with above grade worm gear drives/handwheels or electric actuators shall include extended bonnets for mating up to the worm gear drives/handwheel or electric actuators.

H. Stems: Valve stems shall be of the materials indicated, or, if not indicated, of the best commercial material for the specific service, with variable stem packing, O-rings, Chevron V-type packing, or other suitable seal. Where subject to dezincification, bronze valve stems shall conform to ASTM B62, containing not more than 5 percent of zinc or more than 2 percent of aluminum, with a minimum tensile strength of 30,000 psi, a minimum yield strength of 14,000 psi, and an elongation of at least 10 percent in 2 inches. Where dezincification is not a problem, bronze conforming to ASTM B584 may be used, except that zinc content shall not exceed 16 percent.

I. Stem Guides: Stem guides shall be provided, spaced 10-feet on centers unless the manufacturer can demonstrate by calculation that a different spacing is acceptable. Submerged stem guides shall be 304 stainless steel.

J. Internal Parts: Internal parts and valve trim shall be as indicated for each individual valve. Where not indicated, valve trim shall be of Type 316 stainless steel or other best suited material.

K. Nuts and Bolts: Nuts and bolts on valve flanges and supports shall be in accordance with Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications.

L. Coatings: Valve coatings shall be in accordance with Section 09 9700 - Special Coatings or as recommended by the valve manufacturer.

M. Environment: Submerged valves shall be of stainless-steel construction as recommended by the valve manufacturer or as approved by the ENGINEER.

2.03 VALVE ACCESSORIES
A. Valves shall be furnished complete with the accessories required to provide a functional system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. General: Valves, actuating units, stem extensions, valve boxes, and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated. Gates shall be adequately braced to prevent warpage and bending under the intended use. Valves shall be firmly supported to avoid undue stresses on the pipe.

B. Access: Valves shall be installed with easy access for actuation, removal, and maintenance and to avoid interference between valve actuators and structural members, handrails, or other equipment.

COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES 40 0551-4
C. Valve Accessories: Where combinations of valves, sensors, switches, and controls are indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall properly assemble and install such items so that systems are compatible and operating properly. The relationship between interrelated items shall be clearly noted on Shop Drawing submittals.

END OF SECTION 40 0551
IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 0553-1
SECTION 40 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide safety signs and identification devices for all exposed piping and valves using color bands, lettering, flow direction arrows, and related permanent identification devices, and all appurtenant works, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Piping Identification and Signage Systems shall match existing facility identification and signage, where applicable.

1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Commercial Standards: ANSI A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit samples of all types of identification devices and signs to be used in the work.

B. All submittals shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer and model shall be described on the Drawings or Engineer approved equal.

B. The manufacturer shall provide a 2-year warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

C. Letter sizes and colors for lettering, arrows and background shall conform to ANSI A13.1.

2.03 SAFETY SIGNS
A. Color, legend and layout shall conform to OSHA 1910.145 requirements.

B. “DANGER” Signs: Two-inch high white letters “Danger” in red oval surrounded by a rectangular black field. Text wording 1½-inch high black capital letters on white field.

C. “CAUTION” Signs: Two-inch high yellow letters on black field. Text wording 1½-inch high black capital letters on yellow field.

D. Chemical precaution signs:

1. In accordance with ANSI Z129.1

2. 12 inches x 14 inches
IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 0553-2

3. Made to withstand most chemicals. Special ink for printing to be absorbed into sign surface.

Ultraviolet inhibitors and clear face coating for resisting fading and scratching. Semi-rigid linear polyethylene.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

3.02 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve tags shall be attached to the valve or structure by means of a chain.

3.03 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. All visible piping ½ -inch and greater which is accessible for maintenance and operations shall have appropriate identification markers. Direction of flow arrows are to be included with each identification mark unless otherwise specified. All none stainless steel pipe shall be color-coded.

B. Each marker shall be black lettering on a yellow or white background and have a clearly printed legend to identify the contents of the pipe.

C. Locations for pipe markers to be as follows:

1. Adjacent to each valve (except as plumbing fixtures and equipment).

2. At each branch and riser take-off.

3. At each pipe passage through wall, floor and ceiling construction.

4. At each pipe passage to underground

5. On all horizontal pipe runs, marked every 30 feet.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Application of identifying devices shall conform to the following color codes:

Process or Fluid Description Color Tnemec Color #
Potable Water (“POT”) Dark Blue 11SF
Raw Sewage (“RAW”)
Influent (“RAW”) Dark Gray 33GR
Emergency Storage Basin (“RAW”)
Tertiary/Recycled (“RW”) Purple (Pantone) 14SF
Sludge (“WAS”)
WAS (“WAS”) Dark Brown 84BR
RAS ("RAS")
Backwash Waste ("BW") Light Brown 62BR
Compressed Air (“AIR”) Dark Green 91GN
Fire Protection (“FIRE”) Red 06SF
Foul Air (“ODOR”) White 11WH
Sodium Hypochlorite (Solution)
(“NAOCL2”) Yellow 02SF
Polymer (“POLY”) Orange
04SF
Sodium Aluminate (“ALUM”) Orange w/ White Band
Sodium Hydroxide ("BASE") Green 49HT
END OF SECTION 40 0553
MISCELLANEOUS VALVES 40 0560-1
SECTION 40 0560 - MISCELLANEOUS VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide all miscellaneous valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The requirements of Section 40 0551 – Common Work Results for Process Valves, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Complete Shop Drawings
C. Drawings valves and actuators.

D. Drawings showing valve port diameters complete with dimensions, part numbers and materials of construction.

1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. O&M Manuals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 7823 – Operating and Maintenance Data.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer and model shall be described on the Drawings, as specified herein, or ENGINEER approved equal.

B. The manufacturer shall provide a 2-year equipment warranty.

1.05 SPARE PARTS
A. Spares shall be as requested by the ENGINEER. Payment for spares shall be made in accordance with the General Conditions.

B. A list of spare parts for each piece of equipment shall be obtained from the manufacturer and submitted at the same time as Shop Drawings. The name, address, and telephone number of the nearest distributor for each piece of equipment shall be furnished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRESSURE RELIEF/SUSTAINING VALVES
A. Quality Assurance: The valve manufacturer shall warrant the valve to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of three years from date of shipment, provided the valve is installed and used in accordance with all applicable instructions. Electrical components shall have a one year warranty. Valves shall be subjected to performance, leakage, and hydrostatic tests in accordance with procedures and acceptance criteria established by AWWA C530.

B. General: The pressure sustaining valve shall maintain a constant upstream and/or downstream pressure regardless of changing flow rate and/or inlet pressure. Valve shall be NSF 61 certified.

C. Main Valve: The valve shall be hydraulically operated, single diaphragm-actuated, globe pattern.

The valve shall consist of three major components: the body, cover, and diaphragm assembly. The diaphragm shall be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve, separating operating pressure from line pressure. Packing glands and/or stuffing boxes are not permitted and there shall be no pistons operating the main valve or pilot controls.

D. Body: Valve body shall be ductile iron construction. Valve body shall be cast as one piece. No fabrication or welding shall be used in manufacturing.

MISCELLANEOUS VALVES 40 0560-2
E. Disc: The valve shall contain a resilient, synthetic rubber disc, with a rectangular cross-section contained on three and one-half sides by a disc retainer and forming a tight seal against a single removable seat insert. No O-ring type discs (circular, square, or quad type) shall be permitted as the seating surface. The disc guide shall be of the contoured type to permit smooth transition of flow and shall hold the disc firmly in place. The disc retainer shall be of a sturdy one-piece design capable of withstanding opening and closing shocks. It must have straight edge sides and a radius at the top edge to prevent excessive diaphragm wear as the diaphragm flexes across this surface.

No hourglass-shaped disc retainers shall be permitted and no V-type or slotted type disc guides shall be used.

F. Diaphragm: The diaphragm assembly containing a non-magnetic 303 stainless steel stem with sufficient diameter to withstand high hydraulic pressures shall be fully guided at both ends by a bearing in the valve cover and an integral bearing in the valve seat. No center guides shall be permitted. The stem shall be drilled and tapped in the cover end to receive and affix such accessories as may be deemed necessary. The diaphragm assembly shall be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve, separating operating pressure from line pressure.

G. The flexible, non-wicking, FDA approved diaphragm shall consist of nylon fabric bonded with synthetic rubber compatible with the operating fluid. The center hole for the main valve stem must be sealed by the vulcanized process or a rubber grommet sealing the center stem hole from the operating pressure. The diaphragm must withstand a Mullins Burst Test of a minimum of 600 psi per layer of nylon fabric and shall be cycle tested 100,000 times to insure longevity. The diaphragm shall not be used as the seating surface. The diaphragm shall be fully supported in the valve body and cover by machined surfaces which support no less than one-half of the total surface area of the diaphragm in either the fully opened or fully closed position.

H. Seat & Stem: The main valve seat and the stem bearing in the valve cover shall be removable. The lower bearing of the valve stem shall be contained concentrically within the seat and shall be exposed to the flow on all sides to avoid deposits. To ensure proper alignment of the valve stem, the valve body and cover shall be machined with a locating lip. No “pinned” covers to the valve body shall be permitted. Cover bearing, disc retainer, and seat shall be made of the same material.

All necessary repairs and/or modifications other than replacement of the main valve body shall be possible without removing the valve from the pipeline. Packing glands and/or stuffing boxes shall not be permitted and components including cast material shall be of North American manufacture.

I. Pilot System: Pilot tubing shall be 316 S.S. construction. The pressure reducing pilot control shall be a direct-acting, adjustable, spring-loaded, normally open, diaphragm valve designed to permit flow when controlled pressure is less than the spring setting. The pilot control is held open by the force of the compression on the spring above the diaphragm, and it closes when the delivery pressure acting on the underside of the diaphragm exceeds the spring setting. The pilot control system shall include a fixed orifice. No variable orifices shall be permitted. The pilot system shall include an opening speed control on all valves. The pilot control shall have a second downstream sensing port which can be utilized to install a pressure gauge. A full range of spring settings shall be available in ranges of 0 to 450 psi.

J. Valve Position Indicator: As required by the project documents, each pressure relief/sustaining valve shall be provided with a dependable positive acting limit switch tied to the position of the valve when it is open or closed. Switch contacts shall be 24VDC rated if wired directly to a PLC or 120VAC in all other applications.

K. The valve manufacturer shall also provide a computerized cavitation chart which show flow rate, differential pressure, percentage of valve opening, Cv factor, system velocity, and if there will be cavitation damage.

L. Manufacturers, or Equal: Valve manufacturer and model shall be CLA-VAL, or approved equal.

2.02 BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. General: Backflow preventers shall be a double check valve or reduce pressure principle type backflow preventer unit and associated components shall be equal in quality and performance to a MISCELLANEOUS VALVES 40 0560-3
“Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research”. Backflow preventers shall be Febco, Watts, Wilkins, or approved equal. All backflow preventers shall be submitted for approval by the District regardless of make or model.

2.03 VENTURI AIR INJECTORS
A. General: Furnish and install a venturi injector that utilizes differential pressure to induce air intake.

The injector shall be constructed of stainless steel and shall be provided with ANSI B16.5, Class 150 flanged inlet and outlet connections. The inlet, outlet, and suction port size shall be as recommend by the manufacturer to meet the project design requirements. The venturi injector shall be cleaned for passivation per ASTM A380 and passivated per ASTM A967. The suction port of the venturi injector shall be provide with a ball valve to reduce air intake, if required. The venturi air injector shall be Mazzei, or equal.

2.04 CHEMICAL DOSING ACCESSORIES
A. Calibration Column:

1. Calibration column shall be provided for each chemical pump group. The calibration column shall be sized for the max flow of the chemical pump and shall be manufactured by Koflo Corporation or equal.

B. Pulsation Dampeners:

1. Shall be of the single diaphragm design, capable of arresting water hammer in the pump discharge lines created by the metering pumps.

2. Materials of construction of diaphragm and body shall be CPVC and corrosion resistant to the chemical fluid pumped.

3. Provide one dampener on the discharge side of each metering pump.

4. Each pulsation dampener shall include an integral pressure gauge.

5. Pulsation dampeners shall be sized appropriately for each pump to remove a minimum of 95% of the pulsations. The manufacturer shall provide calculations to verify sizing if requested by the ENGINEER.

C. Pressure Relief, Pressure Sustaining Valve:

1. Adjustable diaphragm pressure relief, pressure sustaining type valve installed on pump discharge header and set at location according to Mechanical and P&ID Plans.

2. Materials of construction of body shall be CPVC and corrosion resistant to the chemical fluid pumped. Diaphragm shall be PTFE.

3. Valve shall be true-union connection.

4. Valve shall have capability of adjustable pressure setting.

D. Pressure Gauge and Diaphragm Isolators:

1. Piping shall be Schedule 80 CPVC.

2. True-union CPVC ball valves shall be provided for isolation of major equipment.

3. Seals shall be compatible with the chemical being pumped.

2.05 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. General: Furnish and install pressure reducing control valves in accordance with the project documents. The pressure reducing control valve shall automatically throttle to reduce a higher incoming pressure and maintain an accurate and constant lower downstream pressure regardless of changing flow rate and/or inlet pressure. If downstream pressure increases above the pilot spring setting, the valve shall close. When the outlet pressure is greater than the inlet pressure, the valve shall be provided with a check feature allowing the outlet pressure to be admitted into the main valve cover chamber closing the valve and preventing return flow.

B. Materials specification for the pressure reducing control valves shall be as follows:

Component Material
Body and Cover Ductile Iron-ASTM A536
Main Valve Trim Stainless Steel
MISCELLANEOUS VALVES 40 0560-4
Seat Stainless Steel
Stem, Nut and Spring Stainless Steel
Seal Disc Buna-N Rubber
Diaphragm Nylon Reinforced Buna-N Rubber
Internal Trim Parts Stainless Steel
End Detail Flanged
Pressure Rating AWWA Class D Flanges (pressure class 150) Temperature Range Water up to 180 degrees F
Any other wetted metallic parts Stainless Steel
Coating NSF 61 Certified Fusion bonded epoxy coating
(interior and exterior)
Accessories Position Indicator, opening speed controls
through pilot system, isolation valves for pilot
system, inlet and outlet pressure gauges.

C. The main valve shall be hydraulically operated, single diaphragm actuated, globe pattern. The valve shall consist of three major components; the body with seat installed, the cover with bearing installed and the diaphragm assembly. The diaphragm assembly shall be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve, separating the operating pressure from line pressure. Packing glands, stuffing boxes and or rolling diaphragm technology will not be permitted and there shall be no pistons operating the main valve or pilot controls. No fabrication or welding shall be used in the manufacturing process. Y-pattern valves shall not be permitted.

The main valve shall comply with NSF/ANSI standard 61 and certified lead free to NSF/ASNI 372 as a safe drinking water system component.

D. The diaphragm assembly containing a non-magnetic stainless-steel stem; of sufficient diameter to withstand high hydraulic pressures and shall be fully guided at both ends by a bearing in the main valve cover and an integral bearing in the valve seat. The valve seat shall be a solid, one-piece design and shall have a minimum five-degree taper on the seating surface for a positive, drip-tight shut off. No center guides shall be permitted. The stem shall be drilled and tapped in the cover end to receive and affix such accessories as may be deemed necessary. The diaphragm assembly shall be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve, separating the operating pressure from the line pressure. No bolts or cap screws shall be permitted for use in the construction of the diaphragm assembly.

E. The flexible, non-wicking, FDA approved diaphragm shall consist of nylon fabric bonded with synthetic rubber compatible with the operating fluid. The diaphragm’s center hole for the main valve stem must be sealed by the vulcanized process or a rubber grommet sealing the center stem hole from the operating pressure. The diaphragm must withstand a Mullins Burst Test of a minimum of 600 X per layer of nylon fabric and shall be cycled tested 100,000 times to insure longevity. The diaphragm shall not be used as the seating surface. The diaphragm shall be fully supported in the valve body and cover by machined surfaces which support no less than one-half of the total surface area of the diaphragm in either the fully opened or fully closed position.

Bellofram type rolling diaphragms shall not be permitted.

F. The main valve seat and stem bearing in the valve cover shall be removable. The main valve seat shall be retained by flat head machine screws for ease of maintenance. The lower bearing of the valve stem shall be contained concentrically within the seat and shall be exposed to the flow on all sides to avoid deposits. To ensure proper alignment of the valve stem, the valve body and cover shall be machined with a locating lip. No “pinned” covers to the valve body shall be permitted.

Cover bearing, disc retainer and seat shall be made of the same material. All necessary repairs and/or modifications other than replacement of the main valve body shall be possible without removing the valve from the pipeline. The valve shall be designed such that both the cover assembly and internal diaphragm assembly can be disassembled and lifted vertically straight up MISCELLANEOUS VALVES 40 0560-5
from the top of a narrow opening/vault. Y- pattern valves shall not be permitted. The seat shall be of the solid one piece design. Two piece seats or seat inserts shall not be permitted. Packing glands and/or stuffing boxes shall not be permitted.

G. Pilot Control System: The pressure reducing pilot control shall be a direct-acting, adjustable, spring-loaded, normally open, diaphragm valve designed to permit flow when controlled pressure is less than the spring setting. The pilot control is held open by the force of the compression on the spring above the diaphragm and it closes when the delivery pressure acting on the underside of the diaphragm exceeds the spring setting. The pilot control system shall include a strainer and a fixed orifice closing speed. No variable orifices shall be permitted. The pilot system shall include an opening speed control on all valves sizes 3” and smaller as standard equipment. The pilot control shall have a second downstream sensing port which can be utilized to install a pressure gauge. A full range of spring settings shall be available in ranges of 0 to 400 psi. Pilot shall comply with NSF/ANSI 61 and certified lead free to NSF/ANSI 372 as a safe drinking water system component.

The pilot control system shall include a strainer and a fixed orifice closing speed. No variable orifices shall be permitted. The pilot system shall include an opening speed control on all valves sizes 3” and smaller as standard equipment. A full range of spring settings shall be available in ranges of 0 to 400 psi. Pilot to be manufactured by control valve manufacturer.

H. Materials specification for the pilot control shall be as follows:

Component Material
Body and Cover Bronze
Pilot Trim Stainless Steel 303
Rubber Buna-N
Connections FNPT
Pressure Rating 400 psi max
Temperature Range Water to 180 degrees F Max
Control Tubing Stainless Steel
Control Fittings Stainless Steel
I. Each control valve shall be factory assembled, and the manufacturer shall make all necessary adjustments and correct any defects.

Each control valve shall be factory tested by the manufacturer in accordance with their requirements. At a minimum the tests shall include a valve body and cover, seat, and stroke leakage test. Control valves and pilot valves, in the partially open position, with both ends closed off with blind flanges (valves) and pipe plugs (pilots), shall be subject to an air test. The applied air pressure shall be 90 psi minimum. All air pressure tests shall be applied for a minimum of 15 minutes. No visible leakage is permitted through the valve seat, the pressure boundary walls of the valve body, valve cover, pilot body, pilot cover or the body-cover joint. A direct factory representative shall be made available by the equipment supplier for start-up service, inspection and necessary adjustments.

2.06 AIR-VACUUM AND AIR-RELEASE VALVES
A. Air and Vacuum Valves: Air and vacuum valves shall be capable of venting large quantities of air while pipelines are being filled, and allowing air to re-enter while pipelines are being drained. They shall be of the size indicated, with flanged or screwed ends to match piping. Bodies shall be of carbon steel. The float, seat, and all moving parts shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel. All bolts and nut fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel and provided with dielectric isolation kits. Seat washers and gaskets shall be of a material insuring water tightness with a minimum of maintenance. Valves shall be designed for minimum 150 psi waterworking pressure, unless otherwise indicated. Air-Release Valves: Air-release valves shall vent accumulating air while system is in service and under pressure and be of the size indicated and shall meet the same general requirements as indicated for air and vacuum valves except that the vacuum feature will not be required. Valves shall be designed for a minimum water-working pressure of 150 psi, unless otherwise indicated.

MISCELLANEOUS VALVES 40 0560-6
B. Combination Air Valves: Combination air valves shall combine the characteristics of air and vacuum valves and air release valves by exhausting accumulated air in systems under pressure and releasing or re-admitting large quantities of air while a system is being filled or drained, respectively. Valves shall have the same general requirements as indicated for air and vacuum valves.

C. Valves shall be manufactured by:

1. Dezurik

2. Or Approved Equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations, and with provisions of Section 40 0551 – Common Work Results for Process Valves.

B. Vented ball valves shall be installed with off gassing chemicals and in accordance with the provisions of Section 40 0551 – Common Work Results for Process Valves. Care shall be taken that valves in plastic lines are well supported at each end of the valve.

C. The flap valve shall be mounted perpendicularly and free of tension. Valve connection is specified per plans and anchor and mounting bolts shall be of stainless steel AISI 316. Between the moving HDPE parts will be stainless steel AISI 316L. The valve flap shall be provided with ballast to prevent the door from floating in the water and ensure complete closing of the door under the water line. The ballast applied on the door ensure that the specific weight of the door is being increased to 1100 kg/ M3 ensuring full closing of the door below water level and yet maintains differential opening pressures of less than 10 mm water column when completely submerged.

END OF SECTION 40 0560
PLUG VALVES 40 0562-1
SECTION 40 0562 - PLUG VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide plug valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The requirements of Section 40 0551 – Common Work Results for Process Valves apply to this Section.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. O&M Manualsshall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 7823 – Operating and Maintenance Data.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer shall provide a 2-year equipment warranty.

1.05 SPARE PARTS
A. Spares shall be as requested by the ENGINEER. Payment for spares shall be made in accordance with the General Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES
A. General: Plug valves shall be of the quarter-turn, non-lubricated, eccentric type with resilient faced plug. Plug valves shall be designed for a working pressure of 175 psi for valves 12” and smaller, 150 psi for valves 14” and larger. Valves shall provide tight shut-off at rated pressure. Valves 20” and smaller shall have round port design. 24” and larger valves shall have rectangular port design. Minimum port area for all valves shall be 80% of corresponding pipe area.

B. Valve Body: The plug valve body shall be cast iron ASTM A126 Class B with welded-in overlay of greater than 90% nickel alloy content on all surfaces contacting the face of the plug. Sprayed, plated, nickel welded rings or seats screwed into the body are not acceptable. All cover bolts shall be corrosion resistant. The “SEAT END” of the valve shall be designated on the valve body.

C. Coating: Plug valves shall be coated in accordance with Section 09 9700 – Special Coating. The valve shall be provided with a shop coating per the manufacturer’s requirements for the installation location.

D. Valve Plug: The valve plug shall be cast iron ASTM A126 Class B, with Buna N resilient seating surface to mate with the body seat.

E. Valve Connections: Flanged valves shall be drilled in compliance with ANSI B16.1, Class 125.

Mechanical joint valves shall comply with AWWA C111. Threaded valves shall have NPT full size inlets with hexagonal wrench connection.

F. Valve Bearings: Plug valves shall be furnished with permanently lubricated sleeve type bearings conforming to AWWA C504. Bearings shall be of sintered, oil impregnated type 316 stainless steel ASTM A743 Grade CF-8M or bronze ASTM B127.

PLUG VALVES 40 0562-2
G. Valve Bonnet: Refer to Section 40 0551 – Common Work Results for Process Valves.

H. Valve Shaft Seals: Valve shaft seals shall be of the “U” cup type, in accordance with AWWA C504.

Seals shall be self-adjusting and replaceable without removing the bonnet from the valve.

I. Valve Actuators: Valves 2.5” and smaller shall be provided with a hand lever. Valves 3” and larger shall be specified as equipped with either a handwheel or 2” square nut for direct quarter-turn operation.

1. Where specified, a totally enclosed and sealed worm gear actuator with position indicator and externally adjustable open and closed stops shall also be included. The worm segment gear shall be ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron with precision bore and keyway for connection to the valve shaft. All buried valves shall be provided with worm and gear actuators suited for the intended service. All gear actuators shall be designed to withstand, without damage, a rim pull of 200 lbs for handwheels and an input torque of 300 ft-lbs for nuts.

2. Buried service actuators shall be packed with grease and sealed for temporary submergences to 20 feet of water. Exposed worm shafts shall be stainless steel.

J. Electric Actuators: When specified, electric actuators shall be in accordance with Section 40 9243 – Electric Actuators.

K. Manufacturers, or Equal:

1. Dezurik

2. Or Engineer Approved Equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Section 40 0560 – Common Work Results for Process Valves.

END OF SECTION 40 0562
BALL VALVES 40 0563–1
SECTION 40 0563 - BALL VALVES
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide ball valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The requirements of Section 40 0551 – Common Work Results for Process Valves apply to this Section.

C. The requirements of Section 40 9213 – Primary Control Valves apply to this Section.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. The ball valve type and its actuator shall be as indicated in the contract documents. All actuators shall be in accordance with Section 40 9213.

2.02 BALL VALVES (3- TO 12-INCH)
A. Construction: Ball valves shall be full bore with a design working pressure of 150 psig. Valve construction shall conform to the following:

1. Top Flange shall be design for direct mounting of actuator and gear operators. Top flange shall provide easy access for adjustment of gland bolts. Design shall conform to EN ISO 5211.

2. Valve Design shall conform to ASME B16.34-2004/ API 6D / BS EN ISO 17292 Class 150

3. Valve end-to-end dimensions shall be per ASME B16.10 / API 6D.

4. Valve Body shall be flanged, two-piece design in cast construction and shall be coated with two-coat zinc rich epoxy paint.

5. Ball shall be floating design, stainless steel with superior finish and sphericity to ensure extended seat life and low operating torque.

6. Stem shall be stainless steel, heavy duty construction with double “D” (sizes up to 4”) and round and keyed (sizes 6” and greater) configurations.

7. Seat shall be contoured and be reinforced with PTFE seat.

8. Body joint bolting shall conform to ASTM A 193 B7/ ASTM A 194 2H for carbon steel bodies and ASTM A 193 GR.B8/ ASTM A 194 GR.8 for stainless steel bodies.

9. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, ball valves shall have manual hand lever or wheel actuators.

B. Manufacturers, or Equal:

1. Apollo

2. Nibco

3. Valtorc

4. or Engineer Approved Equal

2.03 BALL VALVES (SMALLER THAN 3-INCH)
A. Construction: Ball valves, smaller than 3-inch, for general purpose use, shall be heavy-duty type for industrial service, with butt weld, grooved, threaded, or soldered ends to match the piping. The bodies shall be cast red bronze conforming to ASTM B584. The ball and threaded pack gland shall be brass with a reinforced PTFE seat ring. The stem shall be of silicon bronze. All valves shall have a pressure rating of minimum 125 psi steam, and 200 psi cold-water, unless otherwise indicated.

BALL VALVES 40 0563–2
B. Construction (Thermoplastic Ball Valves): PVC and CPVC ball valves, smaller than 3-inch, for general purpose use, shall be heavy-duty type for industrial service, with butt socket, threaded, or flanged ends to match the piping. The ball valves shall be true union type constructed from PVC Type I, ASTM D1784, or CPVC Type IV, ASTM D1784. All O-rings shall be EPDM or Viton. All ½” to 2” valves shall be pressure rated at 235 psi and all 2-1/2” to 3” valves shall be pressure rated at 150 psi, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Manufacturers, or Equal:

1. Apollo;

2. Nibco

3. or Engineer Approved Equal
PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. Ball valves shall be installed in accordance with the provisions of Section 40 0560 – Common Work Results for Process Valves. Care shall be taken that valves in plastic lines are well supported at each end of the valve.

END OF SECTION 40 0563
BUTTERFLY VALVES 40 0564 - 1
SECTION 40 0564 – BUTTERFLY VALVES
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. TheWORK of this Section includes providing butterfly valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Complete Shop Drawings:

C. Drawings of butterfly valves and actuators.

D. Drawings showing valve port diameter complete with dimensions, part numbers, materials of construction, installation location, and a confirmation letter that the valve materials are suitable for the service location.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves shall be subjected to performance, leakage, and hydrostatic tests in accordance with procedures and acceptance criteria established by AWWA C504.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 BUTTERFLY VALVES (AWWA)
A. General: Butterfly valves shall conform to AWWA C504 & C516, shall be of offset disc design. Valves shall have corrosion-resistant shaft, stainless steel disc edge, and selfcompensating shaft seals. Molded-in body seat with disc locators provides positive sealing and longer seat life on sizes 3” - 20" (80 - 500mm). Large AWWA butterfly valves, 24" and larger shall feature adjustable, replaceable seat, non-hollow disc structure and rubber seat retained within a dovetail groove in the valve body and locked in place by an epoxy wedge.

1. Valves shall have flanged or grooved ends to ANSI B16.1 Class 125, or Class 250 as indicated and / or required. Shaft seals shall be designed for use with standard split-V type packing or other approved seals, and the interior passage shall not have any excessive obstructions or stops. Cartridge-type valve seats, or valve employing snap rings to retain the rubber seats, will not be acceptable. The rubber seat shall be mounted in the valve body. Seats shall be mechanically retained without being penetrated by fasteners and shall be field adjustable and field replaceable for valves 24” and larger.

2. For valves 30” and larger, the valve port diameter shall not be reduced less than 1-1/2 inches of the nominal pipe diameter. Shaft shall be sealing shall be adjustable stuffing box with actuator bracket mounted. When / Where required or recommended by the manufacturer, support bases shall be provided on two sides such the valve can be installed in either position. The support bases shall extend below all other valve parts such as the body flanges and body ribs. The support brackets shall be cast integrally with the valve body to support the valve on a foundation base plate. The support brackets shall be ribbed and shall have a mounting base for bolting to a base plate. The support bracket shall be designed and constructed to provide a base which properly distributes the stresses due to the weight of the valve assembly and content.

B. Materials of Construction:

BUTTERFLY VALVES 40 0564 - 2
Description Sizes 3” To 20” Sizes 24” and Larger
Body Cast Iron, ASTM A126 Class B/
Ductile Iron., ASTM A536.

Ductile Iron., ASTM A536 Grade
65- 45-12
Disc
Cast Iron, ASTM A48 Class
40C/Ductile Iron, ASTM A536/316
Stainless Steel
Ductile Iron, ASTM A536 Grade 65-
45- 12
Seat
NBR/EPDM permanently bonded to
the body. Elastomer shall be suitable
for fluid type flowing through the
valve. The CONTRACTOR shall
submit proof of elastomer
compatibility.

NBR/EPDM mechanical retained.

Elastomer shall be suitable for fluid
type flowing through the valve. The
CONTRACTOR shall submit proof
of elastomer compatibility.

Disc Seating Edge 316 Stainless Steel 316 Stainless Steel Shaft 316 Stainless Steel 316 Stainless Steel
Bearings Nylon with Buna seat & Teflon
with EPDM seat Teflon
Packing NBR/EPDM NBR/EPDM
Lower Shaft 316 Stainless Steel 316 Stainless Steel
Gland N/A Bronze ASTM B62 for valves 54”
and larger
O-Ring N/A NBR/EPDM
Fasteners 316 Stainless Steel/18-8 Stainless
Steel
316 Stainless Steel/18-8
Stainless Steel
C. Buried Service: Bearings shall be sleeve type that is corrosion resistant and selflubricating.

D. Actuators shall be fully grease packed and have stops in the open/close position. The actuator shall have a mechanical stop, which will withstand an input torque of 450 ft. lbs. against the stop. Unless noted otherwise, all butterfly valves shall be equipped with wormgear operators. Above-grade manually operated valves shall be equipped with a handwheel. Buried manually operated valves shall be supplied with a 2-inch square operating nut, valve neck, extension, valve box, and cover. Buried operators shall be lubricated and sealed to prevent entry of dirt or water into the operator at a water pressure of 20 feet of head.

E. The valve interior and exterior surfaces except for seating shall be coated with Ameron Amerlock 370, or approved equal, in accordance with AWWA C550 and C504. All internal and/or external surfaces shall be covered with a polyamide cured epoxy coating applied over a sand blasted “new white metal surface" per SSPC-SP10 to a minimum of 6 mils in compliance with AWWA C550.

F. Manufacturers, or equal:

1. DeZurik

2. Muller

3. Or ENGINEER-approved equal.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All exposed butterfly valves shall be installed with a means of removing the complete valve assembly without dismantling the valve or operator. Installation shall be in accordance with Section 40 0551 – Common Work Results for Process Valves.

END OF SECTION 40 0564
40 05 65 – CHECK VALVES
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 WORK OF THIS SECTION
A. The WORK of this Section includes providing check valves of the types and sizes indicated with epoxy coating, appurtenances, and accessories complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.02 REFERENCE CODES, AND STANDARDS
2 The WORK of this Section shall comply with the codes and standards indicated in Section 15100.

2.01 SUBMITTALS
A. The following shall be submitted in compliance with Sections 01300 and 15100:

1. Manufacturer's product data including catalog cuts.

2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

3. Shop drawings showing details and dimensions.

4. Manufacturer's certification that products comply with the indicated requirements.

5. Schedule of valves indicating valve identification and location.

6. Manufacturer's certification that epoxy coatings have been factory tested and comply with the indicated requirements.

2.02 OWNER’S MANUAL
A. The Owner’s Manual shall be provided in accordance with Section 15100.

2.03 FACTORY TESTING
A. Factory testing shall be provided in accordance with Sections 15100, AWWA C506, and AWWA C508.

B. Proof-of-design tests shall be submitted in compliance with Section 15100 for all check valves size 10 inches and larger.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 SWING CHECK VALVES - THREADED/FLANGED/GROOVED/WAFER A. Swing check valves designed for water, sewage, sludge, and general service shall be of the outside lever and spring or weight type, complying with AWWA C508, and fullopening, and shall be rated for 150 psig, cold water, nonshock. All valve components shall be replaceable without removing the valve body from the line.

B. Swing check valves intended for steam, water, oil, or gas in sizes 2½ inches and smaller shall be designed for a steam pressure of 150 psig and a cold water pressure of 300 psig.

They shall have threaded ends and caps.

C. Design: The valve body shall be full flow equal to nominal pipe diameter area at all points through the valve and shall be equipped with a threaded adjustable open/stop. The body seat shall be O-ring sealed and field replaceable. The end flanges shall comply with ANSI B16.1 Class 125#contain integrally case mounting pads. Provide the valve body with a 1 inch drain and vent tap in the flanged bonnet. The drain tap and vent tap shall be fitted with stainless steel plugs.

1. The top access port shall be full size, allowing removal of the disc without removing the valve from the line. The access cover shall be domed in shape to provide flushing action over the disc for operating in lines containing high solids content.

2. The disc shall be of one-piece construction and connected to the shaft with a disc arm and two pivot pins to provide pivot action to allow self-adjusting seating at all pressures. 14” and larger discs shall be convex shape for lift, stabilization and strength. The disc seat shall be resilient with integral type sealing surface for drop tight shut-off at high and low pressures. The resilient seat shall be secured with a Type 316 stainless steel retainer plate and Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for easy replacement.

3. The shaft seals shall consist of V-type packing in a fixed gland with an adjustable follower designed to prevent over compression of the packing and to meet design parameter of the packing manufacturer. Removable, slotted shims shall be provided under the follower flanges to provide for adjustment and prevent over loading of the packing.

D. Material of Construction
End Connection Threaded Flanged/ Grooved Flanged Wafer
Size 2 1/2” and Smaller 3” to 12” 14” and larger 1” to 60“ Body/Bonnet Bronze ASTM 61 Cast Iron ASTM Ductile Iron Cast Iron ASTM A126 A126/Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade B/Ductile Iron
ASTM A536 Grade Grade 65-45-12 ASTM A395 (Note 1)
65-45-12 (Note 1) 316 stainless steel
ASTM A351 CF8M
Disc Bronze ASTM 61 Cast Iron ASTM Ductile Iron Cast Iron ASTM A126 A126 ASTM A536 Grade B/Ductile Iron
Grade 65-45-12 ASTM A395 (Note 1)/
316 stainless steel
ASTM A351 CF8M
Seat Metal Seat Resilient Buna-N/EPDM (Note 2)
Seat Ring N/A 316 Stainless steel
Pivot Pin Bronze ASTM 61 316 Stainless Steel
Pivot Pin Bearings Bronze
Fasteners Bronze 316 Stainless steel
Notes:

1. Ductile iron body shall be provided, as noted on Contract Documents valve schedule.

2. EPDM seat shall be provided where operating temperature is 100°F and higher, as noted on Contract Documents valve schedule.

E. Miscellaneous

1. The valve shall be factory equipped with a lever and weight assembly. The lever shall be equipped with three holes for adjusting the bolted weight assembly. When the valve is closed, the lever and weight shall be located 30 degrees below horizontal.

2. When specified, the valve shall be factory equipped with a lever and air cushion assembly mounted between the weight assembly and the valve body. The air cushion assembly shall consist of a clevis mounted tie-rod type closed cylinder with speed control valves.

3. When specified, the valve shall be factory equipped with a lever and spring assembly.

The spring shall be mounted to a bracket on the side of the valve body with a bolt assembly to adjust the spring tension.

4. When specified, the lever and weight assembly shall be enclosed within a removable safety guard constructed of perforated metal for visibility.

F. A pre-wired limit switch shall be provided to indicate open/closed position to a remote location. The mechanical type limit switch shall be activated by the external arm and rated for NEMA 4, 6,or 6P and shall have U.L. rated 5 amp, 125 VAC contacts.

G. Coating: The exterior and interior of the valve shall be coated with ANSI/NSF 61 approved fusion bonded epoxy coating.

2.02 FLEXIBLE DISK SWING CHECK VALVES
A. General: Check Valves shall comply with AWWA C508 and shall be suitable for cold working pressures of 150 psig in water, wastewater, abrasive, and slurry service. The check valve shall be of the full body type, with a domed access cover and only two moving parts, the flexible disc and the disc accelerator.

B. Design: The valve body and cover shall be provided with flanges ANSI B16.1, Class 125#.

1. The valve body shall be full flow equal to nominal pipe diameter at all points through the valve. The seating surface shall be on a 45 degree angle to minimize disc travel.

A threaded port with pipe plug shall be provided on the bottom of the valve to allow for field installation of a backflow actuator, or hydraulic cushion without special tools or removing the valve from the line.

2. The top access port shall be full size, allowing removal of the disc without removing the valve from the line. The access cover shall be domed in shape to provide flushing action over the disc for operating in lines containing high solids content. A threaded port with pipe plug shall be provided in the access cover to allow for field installation of a mechanical, disc position indicator.

3. The disc shall be of one-piece construction, precision molded with an integral o-ring type sealing surface, and contain alloy steel and nylon reinforcement in the flexible hinge area. The flex portion of the disc shall be warranted for twenty five years.

Non-Slam closing characteristics shall be provided through a short 35 degree disc stroke and a disc accelerator to provide a cracking pressure of 0.3 psig.

4. The disc accelerator shall be of one piece construction and provide rapid closure of the valve in high head applications. The disc accelerator shall be enclosed within the valve and shall be field adjustable and replaceable without removal of the valve from the line. The disc accelerator shall be securely held in place by being captured between the cover and disc. It shall be formed with a large radius to allow smooth movement over the disc surface.

5. The valve disc shall be cycle tested 1,000,000 times in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C508 and show no signs of wear, cracking, or distortion to the valve disc or seat and shall remain drop tight at both high and low pressures.

C. Material of Construction
End Connection Flanged/ Grooved Flanged
Size 2” to 12” 14” and larger
Body/Bonnet Cast Iron ASTM A126/Ductile Iron
ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 (Note 1)
Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12
Disc Buna-N/Viton (Note 2) Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 Disc Accelerator 316 Stainless Steel
Fasteners 316 Stainless steel
Notes:

1. Ductile iron body shall be provided, as noted on Contract Documents valve schedule.

2. Viton seat shall be provided, as noted on Contract Documents valve schedule.

D. Miscellaneous:

1. A screw-type backflow actuator shall be provided to allow opening of the valve during no-flow conditions. Buna-N seals shall be used to seal the stainless steel stem in a bronze bushing. The backflow device shall be of the rising-stem type to indicate position. A stainless steel T-handle shall be provided for ease ofoperation.

2. A mechanical indicator shall be provided to provide disc position indication on valves 4” and larger. The indicator shall have continuous contact with the disc under all operating conditions to assure accurate disc position indication.

3. A pre-wired limit switch will be provided to indicate open/closed position to a remote location. The mechanical type limit switch shall be activated by the external position indicator. The switch shall be rated for NEMA 4 and shall have U.L. rated 5 amp, 125 VAC contacts.

4. A bottom mounted oil dashpot (oil cushion) shall be provided to provide hydraulic control of the final 10% of valve closure and reduce valve slam and water hammer normally associated with rapid flow reversal conditions on pump shut down. The dashpot shall consist of a high pressure hydraulic cylinder, adjustable external flow control valve, oil reservoir, pressure gauge, stainless steel air inlet valve, and piping designed to control the closing speed of the last 10% of travel in 1-5 seconds. A threaded brass dashpot bushing unit with a grease fitting for lubrication shall connect the cylinder to the valve and shall have an air gap to prevent hydraulic fluid from entering the valve and contaminating the water system. A snubber rod fitted with O-ring seals and rod wiper scrapers shall make contact with the lower portion of the disc’s stainless steel strike plate.

E. Testing: All valves shall be hydrostatically tested and seat tested to demonstrate zero leakage. When requested the Manufacturer shall provide test certificates, dimensional drawings, parts list drawings, and operation and maintenance manuals.

F. Coating: The exterior and interior of the valve shall be coated with ANSI/NSF 61 approved fusion bonded epoxy coating.

2.03 TILTED DISC CHECK VALVES
A. General: Slanting disc check valves intended for water and sewage service, shall have replaceable seat rings and disc rings. The water passage cross-sectional area shall be equal to the full pipe area. Valves shall have sufficient clearance around the pivot pins to permit free seating of the disc without binding and shall not stick in the closed position.

Slanting disc check valves shall have position indicators (with electrical signal switches for indication of disc position) and two flanged connections for attachment of dashpots or hydraulic snubbers. The valves shall be designed for a water working pressure of 150 psi, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Design: The valve body shall consist of two sections bolted together as a central diagonal flange inclined at an angle of 55 degrees. The inlet body section shall contain a seat ring positioned and captured by the diagonal flange. The outlet body section shall accept eccentrically located pivot pin trunnions with sealed covers and lubrication grease fittings.

The eccentric pivot trunnions shall be located to divide the disc into approximately 1/3 and 2/3 proportions and allow the seating surface of the disc to rotate away from the seating surface of the seat ring without contact. Clearance shall be provided between the pivot pin and bushing when the disc is seated to prevent binding and to ensure a tight seal. The flow area through the valve body inlet and outlet shall be equal to the nominal pipe size and gradually increase to an area 40 percent greater at the valve seat. The valve flow way shall be contoured and unrestricted to provide full flow areas at all locations within the valve. Full flow shall be based on an open stroke of 40 degrees to assure stabilization of the disc when open. A position indicator shall be supplied on 6 in. and larger valves and visually show disc position at all times. The valve disc and seat shall have a seating surface finish of 32 micro-inch or better to ensure positive seating at all pressure. The leakage rate shall not exceed one-half of the allowable rate allowed by AWWA Standard C508 or 0.5 oz (15 ml) per hour per inch (mm) of valve size.

1. Body: The valve body shall be provided with ANSI B16.1 Class 125 pound flanged or grooved ends, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Disc: The valve disc shall be designed with an "aerofoil" configuration and shall be partially balanced with a short travel, designed to resist slamming.

3. Seat Ring: The seat ring shall be fabricated with beveled edges, and be firmly clamped or screwed into the valve body.

4. Pins: The pivot pins shall be designed to allow free movement of the disc without binding.

C. Material of Construction
Valve Size 3” to 10” 12” and Larger
Body Cast Iron ASTM A126 Class B Cast Iron ASTM A126 Class B Disc Aluminum Bronze ASTM B148 Cast Iron ASTM A126 Class B Seat/Disc Ring Aluminum Bronze ASTM B148 Aluminum Bronze ASTM B271 Seat/Disc Ring Seal Buna-N
Pivot Pin Aluminum Bronze ASTM B505
Pivot Bearings Aluminum Bronze ASTM B505
D. Miscellaneous

1. Dashpot: A bottom mounted oil dashpot (oil cushion) shall be provided to provide hydraulic control of the final 10% of valve closure and reduce valve slam and water hammer normally associated with rapid flow reversal conditions on pump shut down.

The dashpot shall consist of a high pressure hydraulic cylinder, adjustable external flow control valve, oil reservoir, pressure gauge, stainless steel air inlet valve, and piping designed to control the closing speed of the last 10% of travel in 1-5 seconds.

A threaded brass dashpot bushing unit with grease fitting for lubrication shall connect the cylinder to the valve and shall have an air gap to prevent hydraulic fluid from entering the valve and contaminating the water system. A snubber rod fitted with Oring seals and rod wiper scrapers shall make contact with the lower portion of the disc’s stainless steel strike plate.

2. A pre-wired limit switch will be provided to indicate open/closed position to a remote location. The mechanical type limit switch shall be activated by the external position indicator. The switch shall be rated for NEMA 4 and shall have U.L. rated 5 amp, 125 VAC contacts.

E. Coating: The exterior and interior of the valve shall be coated with ANSI/NSF 61 approved fusion bonded epoxy coating.

2.04 INTERNAL SPRING-LOADED CHECK VALVES (GLOBE STYLE)
A. General: Internal spring-loaded check valves designed for water pumps, compressors, gas, air, and steam shall be of the full-flow internal spring-loaded poppet type. The valves shall be designed for a water-working pressure of not less than 150 psig unless otherwise indicated.

B. Body: Bodies of valves in sizes 3 inch and larger shall be fabricated of cast iron with ANSI B16.1 Class 125# flanged or grooved ends, unless otherwise indicated. Valves shall include positive, watertight seal between the removable seat and valve body and the stem guide shall be integrally cast with the body or screwed into the body.

C. Valves smaller than 3 inches shall have bronze bodies suitable for the intended use with threaded ends conforming to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, suitable for a minimum working pressure of 200 psi, and temperature of 250 degrees F, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Disc and Stem: The disc and stem of valves in sizes 3 inches and larger shall be fabricated with bronze or stainless steel. The stem shall have two-point bearings with the downstream bearing fabricated of bronze or other suitable bushings designed to provide smooth operation.

E. Valves smaller than 3 inches shall have discs and retaining rings of Teflon, Nylon, or other suitable material, and stem of bronze, brass, or stainless steel suitable for the intended service.

F. Seat: Valves for general service at temperatures up to 250° F shall have bubble-tight shutoff with resilient seats of Buna-N, Teflon, or other suitable material. Valves for steam service and temperatures over 250° F shall have metal-to-metal seating of bronze or stainless steel, as recommended by the Manufacturer for the specific service condition.

Resilient seats shall be firmly attached to the seating ring by compression- molding or other acceptable method.

G. Spring: Valves in sizes 3 inches and larger shall have stainless steel springs, and valves smaller than 3 inch shall have stainless steel or beryllium copper springs and be suitable for the service. The spring tension of the valves shall be designed for the individual pressure condition indicated for each valve.

2.05 DOUBLE-LEAF CHECK VALVES
A. General: Double-leaf check valves intended for air and gas service and where indicated, shall be of the wafer/lug type designed to fit between ASME B16.1 Class 125# or ASME B16.5 Class 150# flanges. The check valve leaves shall be spring-loaded. Flow from one direction shall cause the valve to open, and upon valve shutoff, the spring shall shut the valve leaves before reverse flow starts and at a point of zero velocity, with non-slam closure. The spring-tension of each valve shall be designed for the individual operating condition.

B. Material of Construction
CV6A CVAB
2” – 12” 14” - 66 2” - 66
Body Cast Iron ASTM A126
Class B or Ductile Iron
ASTM A536 Gr 65-45-12
Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Gr
65-45-12
Cast 316 Stainless Steel
ASTM A351 Gr CF8M
Leaves Aluminum Bronze ASTM B148 or Stainless Steel ASTM A351 Gr CF8M
Stainless Steel ASTM
A351 Gr CF8M
Seat Resilient Buna-N or Viton
Metal Stainless Steel Inlay on Cast or Ductile Iron Body Same as Body Material on 316 Stainless Steel Body
Pin 316 Stainless Steel
Spring Stainless Steel 316 Type 17-7PH ASTM A313 Stainless Steel 316/ Type 17-7PH ASTM A313
Fasteners 316 Stainless Steel in compliance with Section 15000, Paragraph 2.01 I C. Body: Shall be cast construction with integrally-cast seat, rated for a minimum of 150 psig working pressure at up to 250° F.

D. Leaves: Leaves shall revolving on hinge pins with retainers.

E. Seat: The valves shall have resilient or metal seats designed for bubble-tight shut-off suitable for temperatures up to 250° F without sticking. The seat rings shall be firmly attached to the body or disc by compression-molding or proper method.

F. Springs: The springs shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer for use in the service indicated.

2.06 PLASTIC BALL CHECK VALVES – CV7
A. General: Plastic ball check valves designed for corrosive fluids, in sizes up to 4 inches, shall be used for vertical upflow conditions only, unless the valves include springactions.

B. Construction: The valve bodies and balls shall be fabricated with polyvinyl chloride (PVC), chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC), polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), or polypropylene (PP) and recommended by the Manufacturer for the service indicated. Valves shall include unions with socket connections, or flanged ends conforming to ANSI B16.5, class 150.

Seals shall have Viton O-rings and valve design shall minimize possibility of the balls sticking or chattering. Valves shall be suitable for a maximum working non-shock pressure of 150 psi at 73 degrees F.

2.07 PLASTIC SWING CHECK VALVES
A. General: Plastic swing check valves intended for corrosive fluids, in sizes up to 8 inches, may be used for either horizontal or vertical upflow conditions.

1. Construction: Valve bodies and discs shall be fabricated with PVC, PP, or PVDF and recommended by the Manufacturer for use in the service indicated. Valves shall have flanged ends conforming to ANSI B16.5, class 150, and flanged top access covers, and shall be designed for positive shut-off at no-flow conditions. Seats and seals shall be EPDM, Teflon, or Viton. PVC valves shall be rated for a maximum non-shock working pressure of 150 psi at 73 degrees F for sizes 3 inches and smaller. For larger sizes and other materials and temperatures the pressure rating will be recommended by the Manufacturer for use in the service indicated.

B. PVC Backwater Valves: Backwater Type valves constructed from PVC shall have EPDM seats and seals, shall have an external arrow flow indicator. Valves shall be pressure rated to 43 psi (100 feet of Head) for water @ 73°F.

C. Y-Check Valves: Y-Check valves constructed from PVC or CPVC shall have Buttress thread bonnet and standard O-ring type seating disc, O-rings shall be EPDM or Viton®. 1/2" - 2" valves shall be pressure rated at 150 psig, and 3" - 4" valves shall be pressure rated at 90 psig for water at 73°F.

D. Diaphragm Check Valves: Diaphragm Check Valves constructed from PVC or CPVC shall have resilient diaphragm seals, high flex and tear resistant Santoprene™ Thermoplastic Elastomer (TPE) with self-seating design and normally closed position. Diaphragm Check Valves shall be Union style with choice of socket or threaded end connections and pressure rated to 150 psig full-flow (open) and 100 psig back pressure (closed) for water @ 73°F. Materials shall be NSF Certified for use with potablewater.

2.08 SLUDGE BALL CHECK VALVES – CV9
A. General: Ball check valves shall be ANSI B16.1 Class 125# flanged body type with a cleanout bonnet and a sinking type, rubber coated, steel ball. The valves shall be rated for 150 psig service in vertical up-flow or horizontal flow.

B. Construction: The valve body shall be cast iron and the ball rubber coating shall be vulcanized nitrile.

2.08 RUBBER CHECK VALVE – FLANGED ENDS & SLIP OVER TYPE A. General: Rubber check valve shall be “duck bill”, flanged end or slip over a pipe end type.

B. Construction: Valve shall be all Hypalon, flanged or sleeve type fastened to the pipe with two stainless steel straps.

2.09 SINGLE PIVOT FLAP CHECK VALVE
A. The Flap Valve shall be flange framed with resilient to bronze seating. The cover & Body shall be cast iron ASTM A126 Class B, the seat and disc ring shall be bronze, the hinge pin and cotter pins shall be 316 stainless steel. The resilient elastomer seat shall be BunaN and shall be mounted in the body of the valve. Attaching hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

2.10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS, OR EQUAL

1. Swing Check Valves (2½ inches and smaller):
a. Milwaukee Valve Company.
b. Stockham Valves and Fittings.
c. Wm. Powell Company.
d. Victaulic Company of America

2. Swing Check Valves (3 inch through 12 inch):
a. APCO (Valve and Primer Corp.).
b. Crispin Valve.
c. Danfoss Flomatic.
d. Kennedy Valve.
e. Mueller Co.
f. Stockham Valves and Fittings.
g. Victaulic Company of America

3. Swing Check Valves (14 inches and larger):
a. APCO.
b. Bray Valve.
c. Crane Valve.
d. Crispin Valve.
e. Danfoss Flomatic.
f. Kennedy Valve.
g. Muller Co.

4. Tilted Disc Check Valves:
a. APCO (Valve and Primer Corporation).
b. Crispin valve.
c. Valmatic Corporation.

5. Flexible Disc Swing Check
a. APCO
b. Kennedy Valve.
c. Muller Co.
d. Valmatic Corporation.

6. Internal Spring-loaded Check Valves (Globe-Style):
a. Crispin Valve.
b. Valmatic Corporation.

7. Double-leaf Check Valves:
a. APCO (Valve and Primer Corporation).
b. Danfoss Flomatic.
c. Kennedy Valve.
d. Valmatic Corporation.

8. Plastic Check Valves:
a. Asahi America.
b. G F Plastic Systems, Inc.
c. Plast-O-matic
d. Spears.

9. Sludge Ball Check Valves
a. Flomatic Corporation.

10. Rubber Check Valve:
a. General Rubber.
b. Proco.
c. Red Valve Tide-Flex.

11. Flap Check Valve
a. Kennedy Valve
b. Penn Troy
PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General installation requirements shall be as indicated in Section 15100.

B. Sludge ball check valve when in horizontal flow orientation shall be orientated with the ball pocket in upward position.

3.02 FIELD TESTING
A. Field testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15100. – END OF SECTION 15105 –
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT 40 0593-1 SECTION 40 0593 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Single- and three-phase motors for application on equipment provided under other Sections.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer information for each motor furnished loose.

2. Nameplate data, compliance with specified standards, electrical ratings and characteristics, physical dimensions, weights, mechanical performance data, and support points.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

C. Qualifications Statements:

1. Qualifications for manufacturer and testing agency.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with three years' experience.

B. Testing Agency: Company specializing in testing products specified in this Section with 3 years' experience.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage:

1. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.

2. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately.

B. Protection:

1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas.

2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.

1.05 WARRANTY
A. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for motors furnished loose.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MOTORS FURNISHED WITH EQUIPMENT
A. Three-Phase Motors:

1. Description: Energy-efficient squirrel-cage induction motor with windings to accomplish starting methods and indicated number of speeds.

2. Comply with NEMA MG 1, Design B.

3. Characteristics: Voltage as indicated in electrical plans, three phase, 60 Hz.

4. Characteristics: As indicated.

5. Service Factor: As indicated.

6. Enclosure: Meet conditions of installation unless specific enclosure is indicated.

7. Design for continuous operation in 100 degree F environment, with temperature rise according to NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.

8. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT 40 0593-2

9. Bearings:
a. Description: Grease-lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication.
b. Comply with ABMA 9.
c. L-10 Life: 200,000 hours.
d. Stamp bearing sizes on motor nameplate.

10. Sound Power Levels: Comply with NEMA MG 1.

B. Single-Phase Motors:

1. Characteristics: As indicated on electrical plans.

C. Wiring Terminations: Furnish terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials.

2.02 THREE-PHASE MOTORS FURNISHED LOOSE
A. Manufacturers:

1. WEG

2. Or Engineer Approved Equal.

B. Description:

1. Characteristics: As indicated.

2. Service Factor: As indicated in electrical plans.

3. Enclosure: Meet conditions of installation.

4. Design for continuous operation in 100 degree environment, with temperature rise according to NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.

5. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.

6. Bearings:
a. Description: Grease-lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication.
b. Comply with ABMA 9.
c. L-10 Life: 200,000 hours.
d. Stamp bearing sizes on motor nameplate.

7. Sound Power Levels: Comply with NEMA MG 1.

8. Wiring Terminations: Furnish terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials.

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test motors according to NEMA MG 1, including winding resistance, no-load speed and current, locked rotor current, insulation high-potential test, and mechanical alignment tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect and remove abandoned motors.

B. Clean and repair existing motors to remain or those to be reinstalled.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Existing Installations:

1. Maintain access to existing motors and other installations remaining active and requiring access.

2. Modify installation or provide access panel.

B. Install motors securely on firm foundation.

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT 40 0593-3 C. Engraved Plastic Nameplates: As specified in Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

D. Grounding and Bonding: As specified in Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test according to NETA ATS, except Section 4.

B. Perform inspections and tests as listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.15.

END OF SECTION 40 0593
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT 40 0596-1 SECTION 40 0596 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Inertia bases

2. Open-spring isolators

3. Restrained-spring isolators

4. Closed-spring isolators

5. Restrained, closed-spring isolators

6. Pad isolators

7. Flexible connections

8. Seismic snubbers

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:

1. Schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each.

2. Catalog information indicating materials and dimensional data.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

C. Delegated Design Submittals: Submit signed and sealed Shop Drawings with design calculations and assumptions verifying that maximum sound levels will not be exceeded.

D. Manufacturer Instructions: Installation requirements, including storage and handling procedures.

E. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.

F. Qualifications Statements:

1. Qualifications for manufacturer, installer, and licensed professional.

2. Manufacturer's approval of installer.

1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of hangers, including attachment points.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with three years' experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with three years' experience and approved by manufacturer.

C. Licensed Professional: Professional Engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in State of California.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.

B. Protection:

1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas.

2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT 40 0596-2

1.06 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements:

1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for inertia bases.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide vibration isolation on motor-driven equipment over 5 hp plus connected piping.

B. Use concrete inertia bases for motors and on base-mounted pumps, blowers, and compressors.

2.02 INERTIA BASES
A. Manufacturers:

B. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc
C. Or Approved Equal
D. Structural Bases:

1. Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine and to transmit design loads to isolators and snubbers.

2. Construction: Welded structural steel with gusset brackets, supporting equipment, and motor with slide rails.

E. Concrete Inertia Bases:

1. Connecting Point: Reinforced to connect isolators and snubbers to base.

2. Concrete: Reinforced 3,000-psi concrete.

2.03 OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.

2. Or Approved Equal
B. Description:

1. Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot-dip galvanized housings and neoprene-coated springs.

2. Code: Color-code springs based on load-carrying capacity.

C. Springs:

1. Minimum Horizontal Stiffness: 75 percent of vertical stiffness.

2. Working Deflection: Between 30 and 60 percent of maximum deflection.

D. Spring Mounts:

1. Furnish leveling devices.

2. Sound Pads:
a. Material: Neoprene.

3. Hardware: Zinc-chromate-plated.

E. Sound Pads:

1. Meet requirements for pad isolators.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT 40 0596-3

2.04 RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.

2. Or Approved Equal.

B. Description:

1. Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot-dip galvanized housings and neoprene-coated springs.

2. Code: Color-code springs based on load-carrying capacity.

C. Spring Mounts:

1. Furnish leveling devices.

2. Sound Pads:
a. Material: Neoprene.

3. Hardware: Zinc-chromate-plated.

D. Restraint: Furnish mounting frame and limit stops.

2.05 CLOSED-SPRING ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc

2. Or Approved Equal
B. Description:

1. Type: Closed-spring mount with top and bottom housing separated by neoprene rubber stabilizers.

2. Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot-dip galvanized housings and neoprene-coated springs.

3. Code: Color-code springs based on load-carrying capacity.

C. Springs
D. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators, and neoprene side stabilizers

2.06 RESTRAINED, CLOSED-SPRING ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Greenheck Fan Corporation

2. Or Approved Equal
B. Description:

1. Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot-dip-galvanized housings and neoprene-coated springs.

2. Code: Color-code springs for load-carrying capacity.

3. Type: Closed-spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers.

C. Springs:

1. Minimum Horizontal Stiffness: 75 percent of vertical stiffness.

2. Working Deflection: Between 30 and 60 percent of maximum deflection.

D. Housings:

1. Neoprene Isolation Pad:
a. Rubber or neoprene waffle pads.
b. Hardness: 30 durometer.
c. Height of Ribs: Not to exceed 70 percent of width.

2. Neoprene Side Stabilizers
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT 40 0596-4

2.07 PAD ISOLATORS
A. Description:

1. Material: Rubber or Neoprene.

2. Hardness: 30 durometer.

3. Height of Ribs: Not to exceed 70 percent of width.

B. Rubber Mount:

1. Molded rubber.

2. Threaded insert.

C. Glass-Fiber Pads: Neoprene-jacketed, pre-compressed molded glass fiber.

2.08 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Mason Industries, Inc.

2. Or Approved Equal
B. Steel Piping:

1. Inner Hose: As indicated

2. Exterior Sleeve: As indicated

3. Pressure Rating: As required.

4. Joints: Connection as indicated.

5. Size: As indicated.

C. Copper Piping:

1. Inner Hose: As indicated

2. Exterior Sleeve: As indicated

3. Pressure Rating: As required.

4. Joints: Connection as indicated.

5. Size: As indicated.

2.09 SEISMIC SNUBBERS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

2. Or Approved Equal
B. Description:

1. Type: Nondirectional and double-acting unit consisting of interlocking steel members restrained by neoprene elements.

2. Neoprene Elements: Replaceable.

3. Capacity: Four times load assigned to mount groupings

4. Attachment Points and Fasteners: Capable of withstanding three times rated load capacity of seismic snubber.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment and piping is installed before Work of this Section is started.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Adjust equipment to proper level.

B. Install isolation for motor-driven equipment.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT 40 0596-5 D. Piping Connections:

1. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height.

2. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load in order to allow shim removal.

E. Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans and on hanger-supported, horizontally mounted axial fans.

F. Snubbers:

1. Provide resiliently mounted equipment and piping with seismic snubbers.

2. Provide each inertia base with minimum four seismic snubbers located close to isolators.

3. Snub equipment designated for post-disaster use.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report, including static deflections.

B. Ensure that equipment operates under loaded conditions without objectionable sound or vibration.

C. Equipment Acceptance: Adjust, repair, modify, or replace components failing to perform as specified and rerun tests.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Closed-Spring Isolators: Adjust such that side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions.

3.05 CLEANING
A. Remove foreign objects that might bridge vibration isolators.

END OF SECTION 40 0596
CATHODIC PROCESS CORROSION PROTECTION 40 4642-1
SECTION 40 4642 - CATHODIC PROCESS CORROSION PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Anodes and attachment to buried metallic components.

B. In case of conflicts, all specific detail specifications for construction materials shall be used.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for including the price of cathodic protection in the bid.

An increase of cost resulting from a change to cathodic protection plan shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.

1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Iron and Steel Components:

1. Negative voltage of 0.85 volts measured between component and saturated reference electrode contacting earth near component.

2. Negative voltage shift of 300 millivolts measured between component and saturated reference electrode contacting earth near component.

3. Polarization voltage shift of 100 millivolts measured between component and saturated reference electrode contacting earth near component.

B. Aluminum Components:

1. Negative voltage of 1.2 volts measured between component and saturated reference electrode contacting earth near component.

2. Negative voltage shift of 150 millivolts measured between component and saturated reference electrode contacting earth near component.

3. Polarization voltage shift of 100 millivolts measured between component and saturated reference electrode contacting earth near component.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Cathodic protection is considered a deferred submittal. Signed/Stamped wiring diagrams, calculations, and supporting information for system design.

B. Design Data: Design Calculation.

C. Product Data: Anodes and test panels.

1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of anodes and test panels. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include periodic test procedures.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with three years' experience.

B. Design system under direct supervision of professional engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of the project.

C. Design Work by parties certified by National Association of Corrosion Engineers and licensed at place of Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Corrpro Companies

2. Or Engineer Approved Equal
CATHODIC PROCESS CORROSION PROTECTION 40 4642-2
B. Magnesium Anode: Core of galvanized steel, tape, rod, bare weight of 32 lb, coating alloy content conforming to following:

1. Aluminum: 0.05 percent, maximum

2. Manganese: 0.5 to 1.3 percent, maximum

3. Zinc: Zero percent, maximum

4. Silicon: Zero percent, maximum

5. Copper: 0.02 percent, maximum

6. Nickel: 0.001 percent, maximum

7. Iron: 0.03 percent, maximum

8. Other Impurities: 0.3 percent, maximum
C. Zinc Anode: ASTM B418 Type I galvanic zinc, tape rod, bare weight of 30 lb.

D. Anode Lead Wire: Solid copper conductor, 12 (or as indicated in details) AWG, Type THW insulation.

E. Field Wiring: Stranded copper conductor, size as indicated in details, Type TW insulation.

F. Conduit: Rigid galvanized steel, and nonmetallic; as specified in Section 26 0533.13 - Conduits.

2.02 ANODE BACKFILL
A. Backfill: Blended granular mixture, 100 percent passing No. 10 sieve mesh screen; composed of following:

1. Hydrated Gypsum: 75 percent

2. Bentonite Clay: 20 percent

3. Sodium Sulfate: 5 percent

2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Concrete Box:

1. Precast concrete of sulfate-resisting portland cement concrete

2. Dimensions as indicated

3. Cast iron or concrete cover

4. CATHODIC PROTECTION TEST identification markings in letters not less than 1.5 inches high
B. Enclosure:

1. NEMA 250 Type 3R (or as required for installation location).

C. Terminal Board: One piece with screw terminals rated 15 amperes D. Shunt: 0.01 ohm, 6 (or as indicated) ampere, accuracy of plus or minus 1 percent E. Current Control Resistor: As indicated in details, adjustable slide wire type F. Metering: As indicated in details
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify buried pipe systems are completed and tested under provisions of Section 26 0533.13 - Conduits.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Edit first two Paragraphs when specifying magnesium anodes.

B. Fasten anode lead wire to anode, tape, or rod by silver brazing. Install wire length of 10 feet (or as indicated in details). Insulate connection to 600 volts, overlapping lead wire insulation by 1/2 inch minimum.

CATHODIC PROCESS CORROSION PROTECTION 40 4642-3
C. Pack anode and backfill in cloth bag; center anode and firmly pack backfill with mechanical vibrator. Use backfill material of packaged weight 2-1/2 times unit weight of anode.

D. Provide bonding to ensure protected components are electrically continuous.

E. Connect system to, ferrous pipe, copper pipe, metal tanks, and other materials/equipment as indicated in plan details by exothermic weld, or mechanical methods.

F. Locate test stations as follows:

1. At each location of protected pipe crossing another metallic pipe

2. At each end of casing under roadway

3. At each inaccessible insulating pipe joint

4. At intervals not to exceed 1,000 feet
G. Install test stations on pipe stanchion 42 inches above grade.

H. Restore corrosion protective coatings and wraps damaged during installation.

I. Coordinate Work with placement of buried Site metallic components requiring protection.

END OF SECTION 40 4642
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 40 9000-1 SECTION 40 9000 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENT
A. This section includes the general requirements for furnishing and installing the Instrumentation, Control and Monitoring equipment as indicated on the Drawings and specified in Division 40 – Process Integration of these specifications. Other instrumentation and control sections of this Division shall supplement this Section as necessary.

B. The intent of the instrumentation and control sections of Division 40 – Process Integration is to require that all instrumentation as indicated, specified and/or required, shall be furnished by a single competent, qualified Instrumentation and Control Integrator (hereinafter referred to as the I&C INTEGRATOR) to assure system compatibility and coordination with all other subsystems.

C. Labor, materials, apparatus, and components essential to the complete functioning of systems described and indicated herein, or which may be reasonably implied as essential, whether mentioned in the Contract Documents or not, shall be furnished and installed by the I&C INTEGRATOR. In case of doubt as to the work intended, or in the event of need for explanation thereof the I&C INTEGRATOR shall refer to the ENGINEER for supplemental instructions.

D. All items not specifically mentioned in these specifications or noted on the Drawings, or on shop drawings, but which are necessary to make a complete and satisfactory, working electrical/instrumentation installation, shall be deemed to be included herein. The Construction Documents are not intended to show every fitting, junction, or component nor every difficulty that may be encountered during installation or coordination with different equipment manufacturers.

The I&C INTEGRATOR shall refer to related data in all Contract Documents and shall verify this information on site.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, all equipment and components shall'be rated for use in the environment installed. Outdoor equipment shall be weatherproof or rated for outdoor use. Equipment installed in corrosive areas shall be rated for that environment. Equipment installed in a hazardous area shall be explosion-proof. In case of doubt as to the area classification, or need for explanation thereof, or discrepancies noted between components specified and the environment installed the I&C INTEGRATOR shall refer to the ENGINEER for supplemental instructions.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. The specifications reference known standards and codes. Each such standard referenced shall be considered a part of the Specifications to the same extent as if reproduced therein in full. The following is a representative list of such Associations, Institutes and Societies, together with the acronym by which each is identified.

AIEE American Institute of Electrical ENGINEERs
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
ICEA Insulated Cable ENGINEERs Association
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics ENGINEERs
NEC National Electrical Code (2002)
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NETA National Electrical Testing Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 40 9000-2 B. Every reference in the Specifications shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the Contract date or latest edition as adopted by the local governing authority.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

1. Where applicable, provide complete manufacturer's part number, identifying scaling, operating range, housing and wetted parts materials, NEMA rating, product options, consumable materials, and other pertinent information.

2. Prior to Final Acceptance of the work, the I&C INTEGRATOR shall provide Operations and Maintenance Manuals, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

3. Descriptive Data: Submit copies of complete descriptive literature, performance data, physical dimensions, power and signal connections for each component and equipment to be furnished. Provide name of manufacturer, style, and complete model number. Listing items "as specified" without both make and model or type designation is not acceptable.

4. Component Data Sheets: Submit a component data sheet for each piece of instrumentation equipment similar to an ISA S20 form. Include equipment tag number, manufacturer's model number, location of service, materials of construction, size and scale range, calibrated range, setpoints, optional accessories and any other useful information.

5. Important Notice:
a. After material or equipment has been submitted and approved, no substitutions will be allowed.
b. If I&C INTEGRATOR's submittal(s) depart from the Contract Documents, the I&C INTEGRATOR shall make specific mention thereof in his letter(s) of transmittal, otherwise review of such submittals by the ENGINEER shall not constitute review of such departure(s).
c. The I&C INTEGRATOR may be charged for costs incurred by the ENGINEER for third and subsequent submittal reviews. Cost for ENGINEER's review time shall be billed at the ENGINEER's standard hourly rates.

6. Control System Drawings: Submit 11" X 17" detailed shop drawings indicating dimensions, component layout, mounting details, wiring diagrams, nameplate legends and bill of materials for each control panel.
a. Wiring diagrams shall include all interconnections, inter-wiring and terminals between all electrical and/or instrumentation units. Wire numbers shall be continuous from start to finish. Wire numbers shall not change when going from one unit, cabinet, enclosure, terminal or any device to another.
b. Discrete control and power circuits: Submit ladder diagrams indicating all panel devices related to discrete functions mounted in or on control panel. c. Show unique rung numbers on left side of each rung. Label each wire, coil and terminal block. Show individual component terminal numbers.
d. Analog signals: Indicate the entire analog loop on the wiring diagram including all devices connected in series and location of each device. Indicate loop power supplies and individual component terminal numbers. Indicate wire and terminal numbers of each device in the loop.
e. Use different symbols for terminal blocks located in different pieces of equipment.

Label each terminal block and wire termination point.
f. Show each PLC I/O point rack, slot, terminal number and PLC configured address on each drawing.

7. Submit a complete PLC I/O listing including instrument tag numbers and descriptions. The I/O list shall contain the PLC rack, slot, terminal number and PLC address. Submit a complete PLC program database cross-reference list linking each database and internal register with its associated I/O point(s).

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 40 9000-3

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment to be furnished under this section shall be the product of firms regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of this type of equipment. Manufacturer shall assume responsibility for, and guarantee performance of equipment furnished. However, this shall not be construed as relieving the I&C INTEGRATOR from responsibility for the proper installation and functioning of the work.

B. The manufacture shall provide a 2-year equipment warranty.

C. The I&C INTEGRATOR must have a minimum of three (3) years’ experience as a system integrator, panel fabricator and instrumentation supplier for other projects of similar type, size and requirements. The I&C INTEGRATOR must submit documentation from his selected panel fabricator verifying the experience and UL 508A file number.

D. All equipment furnished shall be new and of current design. Like equipment shall be of the same manufacturer.

1.05 SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITY
A. The I&C INTEGRATOR shall have total responsibility for the work as specified in the instrumentation and control specifications of this Division. This includes but is not necessarily limited to furnishing system components, system integration and design, wiring diagrams, loop drawings, programming, installation supervision, field instrument calibration, start-up, testing and operator training. The I&C INTEGRATOR is responsible to verify existing field conditions, including the functionality and capability of the existing PLC to be reprogrammed to incorporate any new process controls.

B. The I&C INTEGRATOR is a Subcontractor. Therefore, references made to the responsibilities and requirements of the CONTRACTOR shall only mean that the responsibilities and requirements pass through the CONTRACTOR and that the final responsibility for all Control and Instrumentation systems rests with the I&C INTEGRATOR.

1.06 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals (O&M): The I&C INTEGRATOR shall provide O&M manuals for equipment and materials furnished under this contract. Submit number of copies as specified in Division 1 – General Requirements of these specifications (min 4). Assemble data in a single complete indexed volume and identify the size, model, and features indicated for each item.

Equipment O&M manuals shall include the following information as a minimum:

1. A neatly typewritten index near the front of the manual furnishing immediate information as to the location in the manual of emergency data regarding installation.

2. Installation requirements and procedures.

3. Complete instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of equipment involved.

Instructions and documentation not related to the equipment furnished must be removed or crossed out. O&M manuals must be individually tailored to the project and equipment as furnished.

4. Bill of Materials, component data sheets, descriptive literature, product specification sheets, wiring diagrams and calibration procedures. O&M manuals must be individually tailored to the project and equipment as furnished.

5. Complete nomenclature of replaceable parts, part numbers, current cost, name and address of nearest vendor of replacement parts. Information on equipment or components not related to equipment furnished must be removed or crossed out. O&M manuals must be individually tailored to the project and equipment as furnished

6. Copy of warranties issued on the installation, showing dates of expiration.

7. Provide a copy of all instrument calibration reports.

B. Operator interface/PLC cross-reference table/interface list. The cross-reference list shall include all PLC registers linked to each operator interface display feature. The list shall include the operator interface tag, PLC address, I/O type and range of analog signals in engineering units.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 40 9000-4 C. Four (4) copies of the final PLC programs on 8-1/2" x 11" paper and two (2) copies on CDROM/ Flash Drive after final acceptance of the project. The electronic copies shall be a complete set of fully documented programming files as used by the I&C INTEGRATOR in programming all PLCs.

The programs (including electronic copies provided) shall be well documented with control descriptions.

D. Two (2) copies of all final operator interface configuration files on CDROM/ Flash Drive after final acceptance of the project.

1.07 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Drawings: Upon completion of work, I&C INTEGRATOR shall furnish a complete set of Record Drawings and Shop Drawings which properly reflect final tested system, loop diagrams, PLC programs, etc., as actually installed. Drawings shall accurately record the final constructed system and shall be labeled as "RECORD".

1.08 COORDINATION
A. The I&C INTEGRATOR shall coordinate with all other equipment manufacturers to avoid conflicts and interferences. No extra compensation will be allowed for changes made necessary due to conflicts between various equipment.

B. Any discrepancies noted in these contract documents or discrepancies between Drawings and actual field conditions shall be promptly brought to the ENGINEER for a decision. No extra compensation will be allowed for changes made by the I&C INTEGRATOR without ENGINEER's consent.

C. The I&C INTEGRATOR shall be responsible for coordination of any control panel fabrication, testing and instrumentation system installation with configuration of both PLC's and operator interface's. Project completion will not be granted to the I&C INTEGRATOR until programming and configuration has been completed and complete automatic operation has been tested.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. In addition to specific warranties required by the Specifications, the I&C INTEGRATOR shall leave the entire installation in complete working order and free from defects in materials, workmanship or finish. I&C INTEGRATOR shall repair or replace at his own expense any part that may develop defects due to faulty material or workmanship during the tests and within a period of one year (minimum, or as indicated elsewhere) after substantial completion acceptance. The I&C INTEGRATOR shall repair or replace existing equipment and work that is damaged during the repair of defective apparatus, materials or workmanship at no cost to the OWNER.

B. All manufacturers’ warranties shall be filled out in their entirety by the I&C INTEGRATOR for the OWNER using the OWNER's name and address. Equipment warranty periods will commence on date of final acceptance.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 STANDARD EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish and install equipment of the type specified which has been proven to operate successfully.

Material or equipment that has been specified or called out by manufacturer and/or model number is approved by the ENGINEER. All other equipment may be selected based on equal quality and performance. If the I&C INTEGRATOR wishes to use an alternate manufacturer to that indicated on the plans or specified herein, the I&C INTEGRATOR shall submit to the ENGINEER for approval, along with a written request stating the reason(s) for the substitution. The ENGINEER and the OWNER shall review such requests and have final approval prior to purchase or installation. The I&C INTEGRATOR shall be responsible for the design and installation requirements with no additional charge/fee to the OWNER.

B. All control panel components shall be UL recognized and ground fault protected per UL 508A fabrication standards. Each control panel assembly shall bear a serialized UL 508A label.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 40 9000-5 C. All instrumentation equipment and control panel components shall be capable of operating successfully at full-rated load, without failure, at an ambient air temperature of 50°C, and specifically rated for the altitude in which the equipment will be placed in service. If equipment cannot operate under the specified conditions or excessive heat build-up is expected to exceed component rating, the I&C INTEGRATOR shall supply heat mitigation measures to reduce the operating temperature within the control space to that specified by the manufacturer.

D. Instrument tubing shall be soft annealed, ASTM B280 copper with soldered connections. Tubing bends shall be made with a tubing bender. Tubing shall be run straight, vertical or horizontal and secured with straps or clamps.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST
A. Prior to final acceptance of the work, the I&C INTEGRATOR shall certify the equipment and installation included under this section to be free of defects, and suitable for trouble-free operation under the conditions set forth in these specifications. This requirement is in addition to the manufacture's guarantee.

B. Before delivering any control panels to the site, the I&C INTEGRATOR shall notify the ENGINEER in writing at least two weeks prior so that a factory acceptance test can be performed.

The test shall be conducted only after the I&C INTEGRATOR has performed his testing, calibrations and check-out of the system.

C. The PLC and operator interface programs shall be thoroughly tested. Each input and output signal shall be tested for proper indication and control function. The PLC control logic will be tested by using simulated inputs and tripping interlocks.

D. The factory acceptance test shall be conducted by the I&C INTEGRATOR. The test shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER.

E. A successful factory acceptance test only allows the I&C INTEGRATOR to ship the system to the site. It does not constitute final acceptance by the OWNER.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment and materials specified in this section shall be installed and connected as specified, and as shown on the Plans. The I&C INTEGRATOR shall coordinate the installation with the other trades, to insure proper installation of the control instrument, components and associated conduit and cables.

B. The I&C INTEGRATOR shall calibrate the instruments to the proper ranges, as required by the OWNER and the ENGINEER. Where analog signals are connected to local or remote monitoring equipment, the I&C INTEGRATOR shall verify that the calibrated ranges and scaling of the local and remote indicators are correct.

C. The I&C INTEGRATOR shall furnish the services of instrumentation technicians or control system engineers trained and experienced in the installation of the various instrument and control equipment being supplied. These services shall be utilized by the I&C INTEGRATOR as he deems necessary to supervise installation, calibrate, troubleshoot and put equipment into service.

3.03 INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION
A. The I&C INTEGRATOR shall provide the services of a factory representative with the proper tools and equipment to properly calibrate and adjust each instrument in the field. The ENGINEER shall be notified when the factory representative will be onsite to witness instrumentation calibration and setup. This site visit by the factory representative may also be utilized for the OWNER designated operator training as required below.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 40 9000-6 B. Each instrument shall be tested with certified test instruments simulating inputs at 0, 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent of the calibrated range. Ten (10) data points shall be recorded by ascending to 100 percent than descending back to O. Data shall be recorded on a prepared Instrument Calibration Report with the following information:

1. Instrument description

2. Type and location of service

3. Manufacturer, model and serial number of instruments

4. Scale range and engineering units

5. Testing method and description

6. Input values or settings

7. Output values (recorded data)

8. Calibrations notes or explanations

9. Technician's name, date and signature

10. Copy of the test instrument calibration report. Testing instrument must have been calibrated within one year prior to calibration date.

3.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Upon completion of instrument calibration and system validation, all systems to be retested under process conditions. The OWNER, ENGINEER and I&C INTEGRATOR shall perform this test as a final acceptance test for each instrument or piece of equipment. The process variables will be pushed to their limit to verify accuracy, alarms and interlocks. Any defects or problems will be corrected immediately. Once all testing has been completed to the OWNER's satisfaction, the I&C INTEGRATOR shall submit a certified report with all substantiating data sheets indicating that the total instrumentation and control system meets the functional intent of the Contract Documents.

B. After installation of the system and checkout by the OWNER, ENGINEER and I&C INTEGRATOR, a performance test shall be performed per Section 01 7700 - Contract Closeout.

The test shall include an operational demonstration during which the system shall run continuously without loss of basic functions. The operational demonstration shall confirm that the status, alarm, and process variable signals are valid and are being updated appropriately. If additional time or tests are need due to improper function of the control system, the I&C INTEGRATOR shall perform the necessary work at no cost/fee to the OWNER.

3.05 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide the OWNER with a list of the manufacturers' recommended spare parts.

END OF SECTION 40 9000
PRIMARY SENSORS AND FIELD INSTRUMENTS 40 9010-1
SECTION 40 9010 – PRIMARY SENSORS AND FIELD INSTRUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:

1. Provide primary sensors and field instruments as required by the Contract Documents.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 40 9000, Instrumentation and Control for Process Equipment.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Furnish primary process measurement devices by the named manufacturers or equal equipment by other manufacturers.

2. The named manufacturers have been specified to establish the standard of quality and performance of the equipment to be supplied.

3. Obtain all sensors and field instruments of a given type from the same manufacturer.

B. Manufacturers' Responsibilities and Services:

1. Design, manufacturing, field supervision, inspection, start-up and training in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 9000, Instrumentation and Control for Process Equipment.

1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with the requirements specified in Section 40 9000, Instrumentation and Control for Process Equipment.

B. Primary process measurement devices shall not be delivered to the Site until all product information and sensors and instrument submittals have been approved.

1.04 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION FOR WETTABLE PARTS
A. Provide compatible materials of construction for primary sensors and field instrument (wetted) parts that come in contact with the process fluids shown on the drawings.

1.05 IDENTIFICATION TAGS
A. Performance Requirements:

1. Tag numbers of sensors and field instruments shall be in accordance with tag naming convention outlined on the instrumentation list. For items not shown or specifically tagged, the item tag number shall be established by the system supplier in accordance with tag naming convention. All instruments, whether field or panel mounted, shall have an identification tag.

2. Include the identifying tag number, manufacturer, model number, service, and range.

3. Fasten tags to the device with self-tapping stainless-steel screws. Where fastening with screws cannot be accomplished the tags shall be permanently attached to the device by a circlet of stranded stainless-steel wire rope and clamp.

4. All sensors and field instruments mounted on or within control panels and enclosures shall have the identification tag installed so that the engravings are easily visible to service personnel. Panel mounted devices shall have the tag attached to the rear of the device.

B. Construction Features:

1. Tags shall be engraved with 3/16-inch letters and constructed as follows. a. 3/32-inch thick laminated phenolic for engraving composed of core, laminated on both sides with a matte (non-glare) finish cover sheet.
b. Core to be black; cover sheet to be white.
c. Mounting holes to be centered on width and 1/4-inch from each end.

PRIMARY SENSORS AND FIELD INSTRUMENTS 40 9010-2

1.06 FILLING LIQUID
A. Use silicone except for process fluids containing chlorine. When the process fluid contains chlorine, the filling liquid shall be Halocarbon 63 or Flurolube 63.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 INSTRUMENTATION
A. Provide instrumentation as noted on the Equipment List, P&ID, and drawings.

2.02 PROCESS TAPS, SENSING LINES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Water Pressure Sensing Lines and Accessories for Flow and Pressure Transmitters:

1. Material: Copper Water Tube, ASTM B-88, Type L, drawn temper or annealed

2. Pressure Rating: 150 psi

3. Size: 1/2-inch O.D. for water

4. Connections: Brass Compression Type, "Swagelok" by Crawford, or equal

5. Shut-off Valves:
a. Type: Ball
b. Pressure Rating: 150 psi
c. Body, Ball and Stem: Brass
d. Packing: High Density TFE
e. Handle: Nylon with metal travel stops
f. Support Rings: TFE coated brass
g. End Connections: Removable "Swagelok", or equal
h. Model: Whitey 45 Series for water, or equal

6. Manifolds:
a. Type: 5-valve and 3-valve meter manifolds
b. Materials: Type 316 stainless steel body, bonnets and stems; Delrin seats; Teflon packing
c. Products and Manufacturers:
1) Anderson-Greenwood
2) Or Approved equal
B. Pressure Tap Sensing Lines and Accessories for Pressure Gauges and Pressure Switches:

1. For Process Sensing Taps in Ductile Iron, Steel and Stainless-Steel Piping Systems:
a. Material and Fittings: Type 304 stainless steel pipe (ASTM A312) and threaded fittings and adapters (ASTM A403)
b. Sizes: 1/2-inch minimum for main sensing piping and 1/4-inch gauge and switch connections
c. Pressure Rating: Equal to or greater than the applicable system pressure d. Accessories:
1) For applications not requiring diaphragm seals, provide separate 1/2-inch Type 316 stainless steel threaded ball valve for each gauge and switch. 2) For applications requiring diaphragm seals, provide a separate 1/2-inch threaded Type 316 stainless steel ball valve for seal process side shutoff.

2. For Process Sensing Taps in Copper and Thermoplastic Piping Systems:
a. Pipe Material and Fittings: Use same type of pipe material and fittings as that used in the process piping system.
b. Sizes: 1/2-inch minimum for main process sensing piping and 1/4-inch for gauge and switch connections
c. Accessories:
1) For copper piping system taps with or without seals, provide a separate 1/2-inch minimum threaded brass or bronze ball valve for each gauge and switch. 2) For PVC piping systems with or without diaphragm seals, provide a separate PRIMARY SENSORS AND FIELD INSTRUMENTS 40 9010-3
1/2-inch threaded ball valve for process sensing line shutoff.

2.03 LEVEL SWITCH - FLOAT TYPE
A. Type: Direct acting, pear shaped, eccentric weighted, displacement type liquid level sensor.

B. Construction Features:

1. Float Body: Hollow hermetically sealed, rigidly molded of polypropylene containing mechanical switch and eccentric metal weight.

2. Mechanical Switch: SPDT switch rated 10-16 amps resistive at 120 VAC and five amps resistive at 30 VDC.

3. Weight: Weight to cause sensor to hang straight down from cable when not immersed and only allow float to pivot when immersed in liquid.

4. Electrical Cable:
a. Heavy duty, three conductor, flexible and submersible cable, sheathed in PVC and connected to float and switch with watertight seal.
b. Length furnished to be sufficient to extend to junction box.

C. Products and Manufacturers:

1. Flygt, Model ENM-10

2. Conery, 2900 Series

3. Or equal

2.04 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
A. Type: Solid State two-wire, differential capacitance or resonant wire type transmitter.

B. Function: Monitor system pressures. The transmitter shall display the monitored pressure value and shall output a 4 to 20 mADC signal proportional to the monitored pressure.

C. Performance Requirements:

1. Positive Overrange Protection: At least 1.25 times the maximum span limit

2. Local Indication: Yes

3. Accuracy (includes combined effects of linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability): ±0.10 percent of calibrated span

4. Repeatability: 0.05 percent of calibrated span

5. Hysteresis: 0.05 percent of calibrated span

6. Stability (drift over a six-month period): Not more than ±0.25 percent of transmitters upper range limit

7. Power: Designated to operate on power from receiver or remote power supply, nominal 24 VDC

8. Supply Voltage Effect: Output change not greater than 0.005 percent of span for each one volt change in supply power

9. Output:
a. Isolated direct acting 4 to 20 mADC
b. Digital process variable signal superimposed on 4 to 20 mADC signal without compromising loop integrity

10. Ambient Temperature Limits: -20 to +180 degrees F

11. Ambient Temperature Effect (Total Error per 100 degrees F change between the Ambient Temperature Limits): Not more than ±1.0 percent of the transmitters upper range limit (maximum span)
D. Construction Features:

1. Measuring elements protected by sealing diaphragm.

2. Non-Wetted Parts:
a. Body and Process Connection Bolting: Type 316 stainless steel b. Housing and Cover: Die cast low copper aluminum alloy finished with epoxy paint system; covers shall be threaded and seated on Buna-N O-rings; NEMA 4 rating.

PRIMARY SENSORS AND FIELD INSTRUMENTS 40 9010-4
c. Capsule Fill Liquid: See Article 1.8.

3. Process Wetted Parts: To be compatible with the process fluid

4. Calibration Adjustments:
a. Zero: Adjustable in electronics compartment
b. Span: Coarse and fine adjustments in electronics compartment

5. Zero Elevation and Suppression: The extent that the amount of suppression plus the calibrated span does not exceed the upper range limits of the sensor.

6. Damping: Internal Adjustable

7. Built-in electrical surge and RFI protection

8. Provide a single shutoff valve at each process line tap to enable live process removal of transmitter.

9. Provide Type 316 stainless steel three valve manifold for shutoff and pressure equalization on differential pressure and flow measurement applications.

10. Electrical Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch NPT

11. Process Connection: 1/2-inch NPT

12. Stainless steel mounting bracket and hardware suitable for mounting transmitter on flat vertical surface or a 2-inch diameter pipe

13. Indicator: Provide integral indicator with range in engineering units.

E. Accessories:

1. Valves: Comply with requirements of Article 2.1, above.

2. Hand held interface with keyboard and LED display capable of easily configuring and testing the transmitter
F. Products and Manufacturers:

1. Endress and Hauser, Cerabar S Mode

2. Or Equal

2.05 PRESSURE SWITCHES
A. General

1. Pressure switches shall be capable of the measurement of absolute and gauge pressure in gases, vapors, liquids and dust. The pressure switch shall utilize a piezoresistive sensor, that shall be long-term stable and overload resistant.

B. Requirements

1. Process Connection: NPT female connection. Size per plan

2. Switch Type: SPDT

3. Setpoint: single setpoint, adjustable deadband

4. Enclosure: Switch shall be housed in a NEMA 4X IP66 rated enclosure

5. Switch Contacts: 120V or 24VDC as required by the project documents

6. Actuator Seal: Viton or Teflon

7. Pressure Range: As required by the design requirements

8. Diaphragm seals shall be provided on all chemical lines and as indicated on P&ID unless specifically noted by the engineer.

C. Manufacturers

1. Ashcroft G and L Series Pressure Switches

2. Or equal.

2.06 PRESSURE GAUGE
A. Type: Bourdon Tube Pressure Element Type, Liquid Filled Gauge (for pressure ranges of 15 psi and greater and vacuum ranges to 30-inches Hg):

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Accuracy: ±0.5 percent of span (ANSI B40.1 Grade 2A).

PRIMARY SENSORS AND FIELD INSTRUMENTS 40 9010-5
C. Construction Features:

1. Case:
a. Solid front design constructed of glass filled polyester b. Color: Black

2. Size: 4-1/2-inch

3. Ring: Threaded, glass filled polyester

4. Window: Glass

5. Dial: White with black markings

6. Filling Liquid: See Article 1.8

7. Overpressure protection: Full blowout back

8. Bourdon Tube and Socket:
a. Type 316 stainless steel
b. Heliarc welded, unless otherwise specified

9. Movement:
a. Type 300 series stainless steel
b. Rotary geared with Teflon S coating, or cam and roller type c. Built-in overload and underload movement stops

10. Connection: 1/4-inch male NPT, bottom

11. Mounting: Stem Mount

12. Calibration:
a. Adjustable pointer
b. Externally accessible zero adjustment
D. Accessories:

1. Pressure Snubber: Sintered stainless steel snubber threaded into gauge socket or in external stainless steel housing with 1/4-inch NPT male and female connections

2. Process Isolation: Provide ball valves for process isolation E. Products and Manufacturers:

1. Ashcroft, Duragage 1379 Series

2. Helicoid, Series 900

3. Wika EN 837

4. Or equal

2.07 DIAPHRAGM SEAL
A. General:

1. Furnish diaphragm seals for pressure gauges and switches at locations shown and as specified.

2. The complete diaphragm seal assembly, including gauge, switch or transmitter, shall be factory assembled, filled and calibrated to the ranges and switch setpoints specified prior to shipment.

3. System Supplier Manufacturer shall be responsible for assuring that fill volumes and sensitivities of the supplied seals and diaphragms are suitable to provide the required gauge, switch or transmitter accuracy over the specified measurement range or at switch setpoints.

4. Location and orientation of the gauges, switches and seal assemblies shall be coordinated with the actual piping and equipment installations so that gauges and indicators shall be easily read and accessed for maintenance by plant personnel.

5. Where field mounting and orientation conflicts arise due to incomplete coordination with field changes in the process piping and equipment installation, assemblies shall be relocated, re-oriented, re-assembled and re-calibrated as directed by the ENGINEER.

B. Construction Features:

1. Instrument Connection: 1/4-inch NPT

2. Process Connection: 1/2-inch NPT

3. Flushing Connection: 1/4-inch NPT

4. Top Housing Materials: Type 316 stainless steel
PRIMARY SENSORS AND FIELD INSTRUMENTS 40 9010-6

5. Process Side Housing Materials:
a. Type 316L stainless steel for metallic piping
b. PVC or CPVC to match non-metallic piping

6. Bolting Materials: Type 316 stainless steel

7. Diaphragm, O-Rings, and Gasket Materials: Teflon
C. Accessories:

1. Provide fill/bleed screw to permit filling of instrument and diaphragm seal.

2. Provide a clean-out ring which holds the diaphragm captive in the upper housing to allow the upper housing assembly to be removed for recalibration or cleaning of the process side housing without the loss of filling liquid or change in calibration.

D. Products and Manufacturers:

1. Helicoid, Type 100 HAC

2. Or equal

2.08 MAGNETIC FLOWMETER AND TRANSMITTER
A. Type: Flowmeter with pulsed DC Magnetic Flow Transmitter.

B. Function: Monitor liquid flows. The transmitter shall display the monitored flow value and shall output a 4 to 20 mADC signal proportional to the monitored flow.

C. Performance Requirements:

1. Accuracy (with analog output):
a. ±0.5 percent of flow rate, or better, over a range from 1 fps to 31 fps b. ±0.005 fps, or better, at flows below 1 fps
c. Accuracy unaffected by changes in fluid velocity, density, pressure, temperature or conductivity (above minimum conductivity limits)
d. System accuracy shall be proven by submittal of flow test curves of the actual meters being furnished.
1) Test curves shall show a minimum of ten equally spaced flow points. Tests shall be performed using water and a weight or volume tank. A “master meter” used as a reference standard is not acceptable. The test setup shall be submitted and approved prior to testing.

2. Repeatability: ±0.15 percent of flow rate, or ±0.0015 fps, whichever is greater.

3. Drift: Complete zero stability

4. Minimum Fluid Conductivity Limit: Five microsiemens per centimeter or less

5. Minimum Pre-amp Input Impedance: 1012 ohms

6. Power:
a. 120 VAC ± 10 percent, 60 Hz, ±3 Hz power supply
b. Power Consumption shall not exceed 50 watts for flowmeter and transmitter combined

7. Output:
a. 4 to 20 mADC, direct acting and isolated, into 0 to 1000 ohms b. High accuracy, field adjustable scaled pulse output (0.1 to 10 Hz or greater) to drive local totalizer

8. Operating Temperature: Suitable for operation with process fluid temperature from 0°F to 140°F.

9. Flow Range: As specified in the Instrument List

10. Pipeline Size: As indicated in plans
D. Construction Features

1. Flowmeter:
a. Type: Lined metal flowmeter
b. Interchangeability: Ratio of flow velocity to voltage reference signals generated identical for all meter sizes to permit interchangeability with transmitter without requiring circuit modifications.

PRIMARY SENSORS AND FIELD INSTRUMENTS 40 9010-7
c. Tube Material: Type 304 stainless steel
d. Electrode:
1) Conical or elliptical shaped
2) Material: Compatible with the process fluid
e. Lining: Compatible with the process fluid

2. Enclosure:
a. Materials and Rating:
1) Cast low-copper aluminum alloy or fabricated sheet steel. 2) NEMA 6 rated.
3) Capable of withstanding accidental submergence in 30 feet of water for 48 hours. b. Finish: Finish exterior, except for flange faces, with a high build epoxy paint. c. End Connections: ANSI Class 150 suitable for mating with pipe specified. d. Electrical Connections: 3/4-inch NPT tapped holes for power conduit fitting and signal conduit fittings.

3. Pulsed DC Magnetic Flow Transmitter:
a. Materials and Rating:
1) Die cast, low-copper aluminum alloy.
2) NEMA 4 rated.
b. Solid state construction.
c. Local Indication:
1) 3-1/2 digit minimum LCD meter with field selectable engineering units. 2) Seven-digit electromechanical totalizer or eight-digit electronic LCD totalizer with reset and lithium battery backup. Totalizer shall be integral with transmitter and visible through viewing window or shall be externally mounted in a separate NEMA 4X enclosure or condulet with viewing window and installed adjacent to the transmitter. Totalizer shall read forward, reverse, and net flow. d. Pulse and analog outputs galvanically isolated from input and earth ground. e. Automatic zeroing feature making it unnecessary to zero the instrument before or after placing it in operation.
f. Pre-calibrated span adjustment providing continuous span adjustment over entire range.
g. Range Adjustment: Direct reading thumbwheel switches or calibrated potentiometer, continuously adjustable for full scale settings from 1 to 31 feet per second. h. Signal Conditioning: Adjustable damping circuit with response times of 1 to 25 seconds minimum.
i. Low Flow Cutoff: Provide automatic low flow cutoff circuitry to stop pulse output and local totalization when flow drops below 0.5 percent ± 0.2 percent of the calibrated upper range valve.

E. Accessories:

1. Mounting:
a. Provide complete Type 316 stainless steel mounting hardware. b. All transmitter and driver electronics shall be remotely mounted from the flow tubes at locations shown.
c. Type of mounting (wall, support frame or pipe stand) as required.

2. Shielded cable assemblies of sufficient length for connection between flowmeter and transmitter electronics.

3. Type 316 stainless steel grounding rings for flowmeter.

4. Type 316 stainless steel grounding straps.

5. NEMA 4X rated 120 VAC power on-off selector switch as specified in Article 2.2, above.

6. A spool piece for replacement of each different size flow tube where no bypass piping is provided.

7. One calibrator suitable to calibrate all flow tubes provided.

PRIMARY SENSORS AND FIELD INSTRUMENTS 40 9010-8
F. Products and Manufacturers:

1. Toshiba, LF620F/LF622F

2. E&H, Promag 100.

3. Or Engineer Approved equal.

2.09 CONDUCTIVITY PROBE
A. General: Continuous monitoring system consisting of contacting conductivity sensor and a transmitter designed to measure conductivity of the sample and produce a proportional output linear signal.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Sensor: Range Selectable: 0.0-1000.0 µS/cm
a. Wetted Materials: Titanium electrodes, PTFE insulator, and Viton O-ring seals b. Provide flow-through mounting type sensor
c. Operating Temperature Range: -4 to 392 degrees F.
d. Maximum Flow Rate: Ten feet per second.
e. Sensor Cable: Shielded polyethylene cable. Provide length as required to connect to remotely mounted transmitter (20 feet, minimum length). f. Connection: 3/4-inch NPT female.
g. Accuracy: + 2% of the reading above 200 µS/cm
h. Sensitivity: + 0.5% of reading
i. Repeatability: +0.5% of reading
j. Response Time: 90% of reading within 30 seconds of step change k. Temperature Compensator: Pt 1000 RTD
C. Products and Manufacturers:

1. Hach D3422B3 with Hach digital SC1000

2.10 SPARE PARTS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish and deliver the spare parts and test equipment as outlined below, identical to and interchangeable with similar parts furnished under this Section.

B. Spare parts shall be packed in containers suitable for long term storage, bearing labels clearly designating the contents and the pieces of equipment for which they are intended.

C. The following shall constitute the minimum spare parts:

1. Five of each type input-output relay for each 40 or less furnished for this Contract.

2. One replacement power supply for each type and size furnished for this Contract.

3. A one-year supply of all expendable materials.

4. One per five of gauges, indicators and/or switches used in field complete with diaphragm seals, filled and ready for use.

D. The following shall constitute the minimum test and calibration equipment.

1. Three Fluke, Hewlett-Packard, or equal (latest in series) digital multimeter plus amprobe, high voltage probe, test leads, case and all other recommended spares and accessories.

2. All tooling required to insert, extract and connect any internal or external connector, including edge connectors.

3. All special calibration equipment required for system calibration.

4. A thermocouple calibrator including case.

5. Two signal simulators (4 to 20 mADC; 1 to 5 VDC), including cases. One simulator shall be battery powered and shall include charger.

6. A portable flow meter calibrator (for magnetic use only).

E. All spare parts shall have been operated and tested in the factory as part of factory testing prior to shipment of the control system.

PRIMARY SENSORS AND FIELD INSTRUMENTS 40 9010-9
F. For process sensors and all other analog instruments, the supplier shall submit a separate quotation for a recommended list of spare parts and test equipment. Each item recommended shall be listed and priced separately. The spare parts quotation shall contain a statement that the prices quoted are firm for a period of one year from the installation date of the equipment, and that the supplier understand that the OWNER reserves the right to purchase none, any, or all of the parts quoted.

The supplier is required to show that a stock of spare parts and test-equipment is obtainable within a 48-hour period.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide the services of qualified factory-trained servicemen to assist in the installation of the instrumentation and control system equipment.

B. Install each item in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Transmitters and instruments, which require access for periodic calibration or maintenance, shall be mounted so they are accessible while standing on the floor. Care shall be taken in the installation to ensure sufficient space is provided between instruments and other equipment or piping to allow for easy removal and servicing.

C. Mount and anchor items and instrument components using stainless steel hardware.

D. All field instruments shall be rigidly secured to walls, stands or brackets as required by the manufacturer.

E. Conform to all applicable provisions of the NEMA standards, NEC and local, State and Federal codes when installing the equipment and interconnecting wiring.

3.02 START-UP, CALIBRATION, TESTING, AND TRAINING
A. Provide manufacturer datasheet and field verification documentation that instruments have been installed per manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

B. Verify instrument range against manufacturer datasheet in the field.

C. Test instruments as part of facility testing for integration with the existing controls.

D. Train operators with a focus on instrument maintenance, cleaning, housekeeping and field calibration/range verification.

END OF SECTION 40 9010
PRIMARY CONTROL VALVES 40 9213-1
SECTION 40 9213 - PRIMARY CONTROL VALVES
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide all valve and gate actuators and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all valves and gates, except where otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.

C. Single Manufacturer: Where two or more valve or gate actuators of the same type or size are required, the actuators shall all be produced by the same Manufacturer.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures and Section 40 0551 – Common Work Results for Process Valves. The shop drawing shall substantiate compliance with the Contract Documents requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings of all actuators shall be submitted together with the valve and gate submittals as a complete package.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, all shut-off and throttling valves, and externally actuated valves and gates, shall be provided with manual or power actuators. All actuators shall be complete and operable with mounting hardware, motors, gears, controls, wiring, solenoids, hand wheels, levers, chains, and extensions, as applicable. All actuators shall be capable of holding the valve in any intermediate position between fully open and fully closed without creeping or fluttering.

B. Manufacturers: Where indicated, certain valves and gates may be provided with actuators manufactured by the valve or gate Manufacturer. Where actuators are furnished by different manufacturers, coordinate selection to have the fewest number of manufacturers possible.

C. Materials: All actuators shall be current models of the best commercial quality materials and liberally sized for the maximum expected torque. All materials shall be suitable for the environment in which the valve or gate is to be installed.

D. Mounting: All actuators shall be securely mounted by means of brackets or hardware specially designed and sized for this purpose and of ample strength. The word "open" shall be cast on each valve or actuator with an arrow indicating the direction to open in the counter-clockwise direction.

All gear and power actuators shall be equipped with position indicators. Where possible, manual actuators shall be located between 48 and 60 inches above the floor or the permanent working platform.

E. Standard: Unless otherwise indicated and where applicable, all actuators shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 540 - AWWA Standard for Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates.

F. Functionality: Electric, pneumatic, and hydraulic actuators shall be coordinated with the power requirements of Division 26 - Electrical and instrumentation equipment requirements indicated in Division 40 – Process Integration.

2.02 MANUAL ACTUATORS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, all valves and gates shall be furnished with manual actuators.

Valves in sizes up to and including 8 inches shall have direct acting lever or handwheel actuators of the Manufacturer's best standard design. Larger valves and gates shall have gear-assisted manual PRIMARY CONTROL VALVES 40 9213-2
actuators, with an operating pull of maximum 60 pounds on the rim of the handwheel. All buried and submerged gear-assisted valves, all gates, all gear-assisted valves for pressures higher than 250 psi, all valves 30 inches in diameter and larger, and where so indicated, shall have worm-gear actuators, hermetically-sealed and grease-packed, where buried or submerged. All other valves 10 inches to 24 inches in diameter may have traveling-nut actuators, worm-gear actuators, spur- or bevel-gear actuators, as appropriate for each valve.

G. Buried Valves: Unless otherwise indicated, all buried valves shall have extension stems (or bonnets where shown on the plans) to grade, with square nuts or floor stands, position indicators, and castiron or steel pipe extensions with valve boxes, covers and operating keys. Where so indicated, buried valves shall be in cast-iron, concrete, or similar valve boxes with covers of ample size to allow operation of the valve actuators. Covers of valve boxes shall be permanently labeled as requested by the OWNER, or the ENGINEER. Wrench-nuts shall comply with AWWA C 500 - Metal - Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service, and a minimum of 2 operating keys, or one key per 10 valves, whichever is greater, shall be furnished.

H. Buried and Submerged Actuators: Buried and submerged valve actuators and gear assemblies shall be provided with Type 304 and/or 316 stainless steel bolting and trim, and shall be rated for continuous submerged service. If buried, the valve actuator shall be suitable for a submerged service at a water depth of 10 feet (minimum). If submerged, the actuator shall be suitable for a submerged service at a water depth of 30 feet (minimum).

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All valve and gate actuators and accessories shall be installed in accordance with Section 40 0551 – Common Work Results for Process Valves. Actuators shall be located to be readily accessible for operation and maintenance, without obstructing walkways. Actuators shall not be mounted where shock or vibrations will impair their operation, nor shall the support systems be attached to handrails, process piping, or mechanical equipment.

END OF SECTION 40 9213
ELECTRIC ACTUATORS 40 9243-1
SECTION 40 9243 - ELECTRIC ACTUATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish and install electric actuators in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIC ELSEWHERE
A. Related Sections:

1. Division 26 - Electrical

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements of the General Section.

B. Submit complete manufacturer catalog information showing dimensions, electrical requirements, operating instructions, etc.

1.04 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. O&M Manuals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 7823 – Operating and Maintenance Data.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer shall provide a 2-year equipment warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ELECTRIC ACTUATORS
A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall verify with the vendor/manufacturer that each electric actuator (supplied and installed) delivers the necessary torque requirements for opening and closing the corresponding valve that it is actuating, and provide supporting documentation to the ENGINEER.

Electric actuators shall be suitable as specified on the plans for use on 115VAC, 1-phase, or 480 VAC, 3-phase, 60Hz power supply. The actuators shall incorporate motor, integral reversing starter, local control facilities and terminals for remote control and indication connections housed within a self-contained, sealed enclosure.

1. In order to maintain the integrity of the enclosure, setting of the torque levels, position limits and configuration of the indication contacts, etc. shall be carried out without the removal of any actuator covers over an Infrared interface. Sufficient commissioning tools shall be provided with the actuators and must meet the enclosure protection and certification levels of the actuators. Commissioning tools shall not form an integral part of the actuator and must be removable for secure storage/authorized release. In addition, provision shall be made for the protection of configured actuator settings by a means independent of access to the commissioning tool.

2. The actuator shall include a device to ensure that the motor runs with the correct rotation for the required direction of valve travel irrespective of the connection sequence of the power supply.

B. Enclosure: Actuators shall be 0-ring sealed, watertight to /IP68 7m for 72hrs, NEMA 4, 6. The motor and all other internal electrical elements of the actuator shall be protected from ingress of moisture and dust when the terminal cover is removed for site for cabling. The terminal compartment shall have the same ingress protection rating as the actuator with the terminal cover removed. Enclosure must allow for temporary site storage without the need for electrical supply connection. The enclosure shall be acceptable for use in the following locations:

ELECTRIC ACTUATORS 40 9243-2

1. Non-hazardous indoor or outdoor location to protect against wind-blown dust and rain, splashing water and hose-directed water.

2. Hazardous locations classified as Class I and II, Groups C, D, E, F and G as defined in the National Electrical Code plus non-hazardous locations to protect against wind-blown dust and rain, splashing water and hose-directed water (i.e. CSA Enclosure 4 and 7 – Explosionproof and Weatherproof).

3. All external fasteners shall be zinc plated stainless steel. The use of unplated stainless steel or steel fasteners is not permitted.

C. Actuator Sizing: The actuator shall be sized to guarantee valve closure at the specified differential pressure and temperature. The safety margin of motor power available for seating and unseating the valve shall be sufficient to ensure torque switch trip at maximum valve torque with the supply voltage 10% below nominal. For linear operating valves, the operating speed shall be such as to give valve closing and opening at approximately 10-12 inches per minute unless otherwise noted.

For 90 valve types the operating time will be specified. Actuator manufacturer/vendor shall confirm appropriate opening and closing times for the valve the actuator is operating.

D. Environmental: Actuators shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use. The actuator shall be capable of functioning in an ambient temperature ranging from -33°C (-27°F) to 70°C (158°F), up to 100% relative humidity. Actuators for hazardous area applications shall meet the area classification, gas group and surface temperature requirements specified in data sheet.

E. Motor: The motor shall be an integral part of the actuator, designed specifically for valve actuator applications. It shall be a low inertia high torque design, class F insulated with a class B temperature rise giving a time rating of 15 minutes at 40°C(104°F) at an average load of at least 33% of maximum valve torque. Temperature shall be limited by thermostats embedded in the motor end windings and integrated into its control. Electrical and mechanical disconnection of the motor should be possible without draining the lubricant from the actuator gear case.

F. Motor Protection: Protection shall be provided for the motor as follows:

1. Stall - the motor shall be de-energized within 8 seconds in the event of a stall when attempting to unseat a jammed valve.

2. Over temperature - thermostat will cause tripping of the motor. Auto-reset on cooling

3. Single phasing - lost phase protection.

4. Direction – phase rotation correction.

G. Gearing: The actuator gearing shall be totally enclosed in an oil-filled gear case suitable for operation at any angle. Grease lubrication is not permissible. All drive gearing and components must be of metal construction and incorporate a lost-motion hammer blow feature. For rising spindle valves the output shaft shall be hollow to accept a rising stem, and incorporate thrust bearings of the ball or roller type at the base of the actuator. The design should be such as to permit the opening of the gear case for inspection or disassembled without releasing the stem thrust or taking the valve out of service. For 90 operating type of valves, drive gearing shall be self-locking to prevent the valve back driving the actuator.

H. Manual Operation: A hand wheel shall be provided for emergency operation, engaged when the motor is declutched by a lever or similar means, the drive being restored to power automatically by starting the motor. The hand wheel or selection lever shall not move on restoration of motor drive.

Provision shall be made for the hand/auto selection lever to be locked in both hand and auto positions. It should be possible to select hand operation while the actuator is running or start the actuator motor while the hand/auto selection lever is locked in hand without damage to the drive train. Clockwise operation of the hand wheel shall give closing movement of the valve unless otherwise noted. For linear valve types the actuator hand wheel drive must be mechanically independent of the motor drive and should be such as to permit valve operation in a reasonable time with a manual force not exceeding 400N through stroke and 800N for seating/unseating of the valve.

I. Drive Bushing: The actuator shall be furnished with a drive bushing easily detachable for machining to suit the valve stem or gearbox input shaft. Normally the drive bush shall be positioned ELECTRIC ACTUATORS 40 9243-3
in a detachable base of the actuator. Thrust bearings, when housed in a separate thrust base should be of the sealed for life type.

J. Torque and Turns Limitation: Torque and turns limitation to be adjustable as follows:

1. Position setting range – multi-turn: 2.5 to 100,000 turns, with resolution to 15 deg. of actuator output.

2. Position setting range – direct drive part turn actuators: 90 +/-10, with resolution to 0.1 deg. of actuator output.

3. Torque setting: 40% to 100% rated torque.

4. Measurement of torque shall be from direct measurement of force at the output of the actuator. Methods of determining torque-using data derived from the motor such as motor speed, current, flux, etc. are not acceptable

5. A means for automatic “torque switch bypass” to inhibit torque off during valve unseating and “latching” to prevent torque switch hammer under maintained or repeated control signals shall be provided.

The electrical circuit diagram of the actuator should not vary with valve type remaining identical regardless of whether the valve is to open or close on torque or position limit.

K. Remote Valve Position/ Actuator Status Indication: Four contacts shall be provided which can be selected to indicate any position of the valve. Provision shall be made for the selection of a normally closed or open contact form. Contacts shall maintain and update position indication during hand wheel operation when all external power to the actuator is isolated.

1. The contacts shall be rated at 5A, 250V AC, 30V DC. As an alternative to providing valve position any of the four above contacts shall be selectable to signal one of the following:
a. Valve opening, closing or moving
b. Thermostat tripped, lost phase
c. Motor tripped on torque in mid travel, motor stalled d. Remote selected
e. Actuator being operated by hand wheel

2. Provision shall be made in the design for an additional 4 contacts having the same functionality. Provision shall be made in the design for the addition of a contactless transmitter to give a 4-20mA analogue signal corresponding to valve travel for remote indication when required. The transmitter will auto range to the set limits L. Local Position Indication: The actuator display shall include a dedicated numeric/symbol digital position indicator displaying valve position from fully open to fully closed in 1% increments. Valve closed and open positions shall be indicated by symbols showing valve position in relation to the pipe work to ensure that valve status is clearly interpreted. With main power on the display shall be backlit to enhance contrast at low light levels and shall be legible from a distance of at least 6 feet (2m).

1. Red, green, and yellow lights corresponding to open, closed, and intermediate valve positions shall be included on the actuator display when power is switched on. The digital display shall be maintained and updated during hand wheel operation when all power to the actuator is isolated.

2. In addition, the actuator display shall include a separate text display element with a minimum of 32 characters to display operational, alarm and configuration status. The text display shall be selectable between English and one of the following languages: Spanish, German, French, Italian, and Portuguese. Provision shall be made to upload a different language without removal of any covers or using specialized tools not provided as standard with the actuator.

Provision shall be made to orientate the actuator display through increments of 90°.

M. Local Torque Indication: The digital display shall be capable of indicating real time torque and valve position simultaneously, both being displayed in 1% increments of valve position and actuator rated torque. In addition, torque shall also be displayed in horizontal bar graph form.

N. Integral Starter and Transformer: The reversing starter, control transformer and local controls shall be integral with the valve actuator suitably housed to prevent breathing and condensation. The ELECTRIC ACTUATORS 40 9243-4
starter shall be suitable for 60 starts per hour (for open/close operation) or 1,200 starts per hour, minimum (for modulating, or proportional control) and of rating appropriate to motor size. The controls supply transformer shall be fed from two of the incoming three phases and incorporate overload protection. It shall have the necessary tappings and be adequately rated to provide power for the following functions:

1. Energization of the contactor coils.

2. 24V DC output for remote controls.

3. Supply for all the internal electrical circuits.

O. Local Controls: The actuator shall incorporate local controls for Open, Close and Stop and a Local/Stop/Remote mode selector switch lockable in any one of the following three positions: local control only, stop (no electrical operation), remote control plus local stop only. It shall be possible to select maintained or non-maintained local control. The local controls shall be arranged so that the direction of valve travel can be reversed without the necessity of stopping the actuator.

Provision shall be made to orientate the local controls through increments of 90°.

P. Control Facilities: The necessary control, wiring and terminals shall be provided in the actuator for the following functions:

1. Open and close external interlocks to inhibit local and remote valve opening and/or closing control. It shall be possible to configure the interlocks to be active in remote control only.

Remote controls fed from an internal 24V DC supply and/or from an external supply between 20V and 120V AC or 20V and 60 V DC, to be suitable for any one or more of the following methods of control:
a. Open, Close and Stop control.
b. Open and Close maintained or “push to run” (inching) control. c. Overriding Emergency Shut-down to Close (or Open) valve from a normally closed or open contact.
d. Two-wire control, energize to close (or open), de-energize to open (or close).

2. It shall be possible to reverse valve travel without the necessity of stopping the actuator. The motor starter shall be protected from excessive current surges during rapid travel reversal.

The internal circuits associated with the remote control and monitoring functions are to be designed to withstand simulated lightning impulses of up to 2kV.

3. In locations where the electric actuator is installed 6 feet above the finished grade/floor/working platform the Contractor shall provide a remote control station wired to the electric actuator to allow operation of the valve from the finished grade/floor/working platform.

Q. Monitoring Facilities: Facilities shall be provided for monitoring actuator operation and availability as follows:

1. Monitor (availability) relay, having one change-over contact, the relay being energized from the control transformer will de-energise under any one or more the following conditions:
a. Loss of main or customer 24V DC power supply
b. Actuator control selected to local or stop
c. Motor thermostat tripped
d. Actuator internal fault

2. Where specified, provision shall be made for contacts to provide discreet indication of one or more of the following:
a. Remote selected
1) Thermostat trip
2) Actuator fault

3. Actuator text display indication of the following status/alarms:
a. Closed Limit, open limit, moving open, moving closed, stopped b. Torque trip closing, torque trip opening, stalled
c. ESD active, interlock active
d. Thermostat trip, phase lost, 24V supply lost, Local control failure e. Configuration error, Position sensor failure, Torque sensor failure ELECTRIC ACTUATORS 40 9243-5
f. Battery low, power loss inhibit

4. Integral data logger to record and store the following operational data:
a. Opening last /average torque against position
b. Closing last /average torque against position
c. Opening motor starts against position
d. Closing motor starts against position
e. Total open/closed operations
f. Maximum recorded opening and closing torque values
g. Event recorder logging operational conditions (valve, control and actuator)

5. The data logger shall record relevant time and date information for stored data.

6. Data logger data is to be accessed via non-intrusive IrDA communication. Sufficient standard intrinsically safe tools shall be provided for downloading data logger and actuator configuration files from the actuators and subsequent uploading to a PC. The actuator manufacturer shall supply PC software to enable data logger files to be viewed and analyzed.

R. Wiring and Terminals: Internal wiring shall be tropical grade PVC insulated stranded cable of appropriate size for the control and 3-phase power. Each wire shall be clearly identified at each end. The terminals shall be embedded in a terminal block of high tracking resistance compound.

The terminal compartment shall be separated from the inner electrical components of the actuator by means of a watertight seal and shall be provided with a minimum of 2 threaded cable entries with provision for a maximum of 4.

1. All wiring supplied as part of the actuator shall be contained within the main enclosure for physical and environmental protection. External conduit connections between components are not acceptable.

2. A durable terminal identification card showing plan of terminals shall be provided attached to the inside of the terminal box cover indicating:
a. Serial number
b. External voltage values
c. Wiring diagram number
d. Terminal layout

3. The code card shall be suitable for the CONTRACTOR to inscribe cable core identification alongside terminal numbers.

S. Manufacturers or Equal: Note: Models shall be based on specific application and whether that application requires modulating (or proportional control) or open/close only operation.

CONTRACTOR shall supply submittals based upon the intended application.

1. Rotork Models IQT, or IQTM (for quarter-turn or modulating quarter turn actuated valves) and IQM (for linear/multi-turn actuated valves and gates).

2. AUMA Models SQ, or SQR

3. ENGINEER approved equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Each actuator shall be supplied with a start-up kit comprising installation instruction manual, electrical wiring diagram and cover seals to make good any site losses during the commissioning period. In addition, sufficient actuator commissioning tools shall be supplied to enable actuator set up and adjustment during valve/actuator testing and site installation commissioning C. Each actuator must be performance tested and individual test certificates shall be supplied free of charge. The test equipment should simulate a typical valve load, and the following parameters should be recorded.

1. Current at maximum torque setting

2. Torque at max. torque setting
ELECTRIC ACTUATORS 40 9243-6

3. Flash test voltage

4. Actuator output speed or operating time.

D. In addition, the test certificate should record details of specification such as gear ratios for both manual and automatic and second stage gearing if provided, drive closing direction, wiring diagram number.

END OF SECTION 40 9243
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC PROCESS CONTROLLERS 40 9443-1
SECTION 40 9443 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC PROCESS CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. This section includes the furnishing and installation of Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC), Operator Interface Terminals (OIT), power supplies, interconnecting cables and all associated components for control and monitoring of equipment as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. The PLC programming shall be provided by the I&C INTEGRATOR. The I&C INTEGRATOR shall coordinate the installation and wiring of the PLC with the ENGINEER, and make provisions for on-site start-up and testing of the PLC.

C. The PLCs shall be programmed and configured to perform monitoring and control of the Distributed Control System (DCS) as indicated in this Division and as indicated on the Drawings.

System design and installation shall conform to NEMA ICS 1.1.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall reference APPENDIX B – PLC AS-BUILTS. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing all field wiring to and from the pre-purchased PLC panels.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Sections 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Manufacturer's catalog cut sheets indicating electrical characteristics, capabilities and physical attributes for each PLC component including CPU, power supplies, I/O modules, special interface modules or devices, module racks, operator's interface, interconnecting cables and any other equipment related to the PLC.

C. Wiring Diagrams showing connections to all devices; input and output, analog and discrete. The wiring diagrams shall indicate the I/O address point to be used in the PLC program. System interconnection diagram indicating all major networked components and indicating each connection port.

D. A tabular list will be required for all discrete and analog I/O which will include:

1. Rack number, module number, module I/O point number.

2. Name of each I/O field device.

3. Instrument tag number of the I/O device located in the contract documents.

4. Electrical characteristics of I/O signal.

5. PLC internal address.

E. I/O being monitored and controlled with each Operator Interface.

F. Component layout drawing for each PLC enclosure.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer shall provide a 2-year equipment warranty.

1.04 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide all spare parts anticipated to be required for the first 2 years of operation. Manufacturer shall clearly define quantity, description of part and associated part numbers as part of manufacturer’s scope of supply.

B. Spare parts shall be placed in a separate container clearly marked as “Spare Parts.” All parts shall be identified and clearly labeled with applicable part numbers.

C. Provide one spare power supply of each type utilized.

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC PROCESS CONTROLLERS 40 9443-2
D. Provide one spare I/O module of each type utilized.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC)
A. General:

1. The PLC shall be furnished with hardware, software installation, operation and maintenance manuals necessary to monitor and control equipment, as listed in the Specifications, and as indicated on the Drawings. Each field input and output shown as an I/O point shall be connected as per the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.

2. The PLC programming software (as updated to the latest version at time of completion) shall be provided with the user's manuals, original diskettes, and licensing agreement for registration by the OWNER. Cables, adapters, connectors, and other hardware required to render the PLC completely operational shall be provided and installed.

3. The PLC programming software shall enable the user to write the PLC program in on-line or off-line modes. The software shall include utilities to manage PLC program files, document and print the programs, configure the programming environment, monitor and force the PLC addresses while on-line, and configure the PLC memory and addressing structure.

4. The PLC programming software shall be provided.

5. The processor shall be programmable using conventional ladder-type logic and shall include the following minimum functions:
a. Real Time Clock
b. Data Comparators
c. Standard Relays
d. On-delay and Off-delay Timers
e. Counters
f. Master Control Relays
g. Transitional or One-shot Outputs
h. PID Loop Control
i. Floating point math

6. Each PLC shall contain the necessary hardware and software as required to implement the control schemes as indicated in the Contract Documents. The ladder logic programs shall reside in the PLC processors. Every program rung shall be documented with a control description. The I&C INTEGRATOR shall provide copies of the fully documented PLC programs on CD to the OWNER at the completion of the project.

7. The operator interface(s) configuration software (as updated to the latest version at time of completion) shall be provided with the user's manuals, original diskettes, and licensing agreement for registration by the OWNER. Cables, adapters, connectors, and other hardware required to render the operator interface completely operational shall be provided and installed.

8. Acceptable Manufacturer: Allen Bradley CompactLogix 1769 Modular Controller or approved equal.

B. Central Processing Unit:

1. The PLC CPU shall be a microprocessor based industrial controller with a temperature rating of 0 to 60 degrees C and a humidity rating of 0 to 95 percent non-condensing, minimum.

Memory (RAM) shall be sized as required for all system logic and control functions with a minimum of 50 percent spare capacity. RAM shall be protected by lithium battery backup for at least one year, and capacitor storage for up to two weeks.

2. Each CPU shall be provided with internal fault analysis with a fail-safe mode and output for remote failure alarming. Diagnostic codes shall be made available on the Plant Computer through the programming software to further aid in the troubleshooting process.

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC PROCESS CONTROLLERS 40 9443-3

3. Three communication ports shall be provided. One port shall be utilized for a peer-to-peer network connection (Ethernet) while the other two may be used for connection to another peripheral devices.

C. I/O Expansion Modules:

1. Discrete input modules shall be plug-in, rack style modules or built-in to the PLC CPU that sense voltage input and shall have LED indicators for each point displaying the status of the field contact. Maximum 16 points per module. Provide a minimum of 10 percent spare points wired to terminal blocks.

2. Discrete output modules shall be plug-in, rack style modules or built-in to the PLC CPU with a source voltage output or relay output having a current rating of 1.5A at 120 VAC, minimum.

Outputs shall have LED indicators for each output status. Each output shall drive an interposing relay with DPDT contacts rated 10A at 120 VAC. Maximum 16 points per module. Provide a minimum of 10 percent spare points complete, wired to interposing relays and terminal blocks.

3. Analog input modules shall be plug-in, rack style modules that will accept 4-20mA DC signals. Input circuitry shall provide differential input (no common) to prevent loop grounding problems. Analog to digital conversion shall have 12 bit resolution or greater.

Maximum 4 points per module. Provide a minimum of 10 percent spare points wired to terminal blocks.

4. Analog output modules shall be plug-in, rack style modules which transmit isolated linear 4-20mA DC signals to field devices. Loop power for analog outputs shall be provided by regulated power supplies each capable of driving a 0-600 Ohm load. Digital to analog conversion shall have 12 bit resolution or greater. Maximum 4 points per module. Provide a minimum of 10 percent spare points wired to terminal blocks.

D. Redundant rack-mounted PLC power supplies shall be provided and shall be of the same manufacturer as the PLC.

E. Operator Interface Terminals (OITs):

1. 10.4-inch TFT Color display

2. Ethernet and RS-232 serial communication ports

3. USB port and drivers for printing alarm page and screen dumps

4. Keypad and touchscreen operation

5. Minimum of 128 MB RAM compact flash or smart media card for data storage

6. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Allen Bradley Panelview
b. Red Lion G310
c. Or approved equal

2.02 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide one spare power supply of each type utilized.

B. Provide one spare I/O module of each type utilized.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The PLC shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and requirements. Each PLC I/O point connected to an external device shall be terminated at terminal blocks.

B. All analog input and output signals shall be individually fused at the terminal block. See additional requirements as specified on the Drawings.

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC PROCESS CONTROLLERS 40 9443-4
C. Upon completion of installation, start-up shall be performed by the I&C INTEGRATOR and witnessed by the ENGINEER and OWNER.

D. The PLC program, operator interface graphic screen configuration and I/O shall be thoroughly tested. Each input and output signal shall be tested for correct indication and control function. The I&C INTEGRATOR shall test the operation of the PLC control logic with simulated inputs, before making final connections to the system. See Section 40 9000 –Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.

END OF SECTION 40 9443
POLYETHYLENE TANK AND APPURTENANCES 43 4143-1
SECTION 43 4143 - POLYETHYLENE TANKS AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to provide a high density polyethylene (HDPE) storage tank, complete and operational with accessories as shown and specified, for treatment backwash storage.

B. Coordination:

1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with or before the storage tank Work.

2. Size and location of manways, pipe connections, etc. shall be coordinated with the details shown on the drawings.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Standards referenced in this Section are:

1. ANSI B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard.

2. ASTM D638, Tensile Properties of Plastics

3. National Electric Code (NEC).

4. ASTM D883, Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Plastics

5. ASTM D1505, Density of Plastics by the Density Gradient Technique

6. ASTM D1525, Test Method for Vicat Softening Temperature of Plastics

7. ASTM D1693, ESCR Specification Thickness

8. ASTM F412, Standard Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems

9. International Building Code, IBC 2009

10. NSF/ANSI Standard 61, AWWA – Drinking Water System Components

11. ASTM D1998, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Upright Storage Tanks

12. ARM: Low Temperature Impact Resistance (Falling Dart Test Procedure).

B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with applicable provisions of regulatory agencies below and others having jurisdiction:

1. Local and State Building Codes and Ordinances.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years of experience producing substantially similar equipment to that specified in this Section and shall be able to document at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years.

B. Component Supply and Compatibility:

1. Obtain all equipment included in this Section regardless of component manufacturer from a single high density cross-linked polyethylene tank manufacturer.

2. The equipment manufacturer shall prepare, or review and approve all Shop Drawings and other submittals for components furnished under this Section.

3. Components shall be specifically constructed for specified service conditions and be integrated into overall assembly by high density cross-linked polyethylene tank manufacturer.

4. Tanks shall be manufactured from virgin materials.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Shop Drawings:
a. Manufacturer’s literature, illustrations, specifications, and engineering data including:
materials, dimensions, weights, fitting locations and details, chemical compatibility, performance data, electrical heat tracing and foam insulation data, and parts lists for POLYETHYLENE TANK AND APPURTENANCES 43 4143-2
all components in sufficient detail to allow an item by item comparison with the Contract Documents.
b. Drawings showing fabrication methods, assembly, accessories, installation details, restraints and supports, manways, flexible connections, vents and wiring diagrams. c. List of deviations from the Contract Drawings.
d. Copy of manufacturer’s standard warranty for parts and labor.

2. Test Procedures: Submit and obtain ENGINEER’s approval of test procedures for shop testing and field testing prior to performing tests.

3. Certification of tank wall thickness for design conditions.

B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Source Quality Control Submittals: Written reports of shop tests and inspection records, submitted prior to shipment from factory.

2. Field Quality Control Submittals: Written reports of field tests.

3. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for:
a. Storage
b. Handling
c. Setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchor bolts and other anchorages
d. Installation

4. Vertical Tank and Fitting Material:
a. Resin Manufacturer Data Sheet
b. Fitting Material
c. Gasket style and material
d. Bolt material

5. Calculations shall be stamped and signed by a registered, third party engineer in the State of California.
a. Wall thickness. Hoop stress shall be calculated using 600 psi @ 100 degrees F. b. Tank restraint system shall be designed to withstand seismic forces on the system.

Calculations and details shall be stamped and sealed by a registered Civil/Structural Engineer in the State of California.

6. Statement of compliance shall be provided from material supplier for all items supplied under this specification. Supplier shall state they have fully reviewed each item being supplied for chemical compatibility with caustic soda, calcium chloride, sodium carbonate, sodium hypochlorite, sulfuric acid, citric acid, ammonium sulfate and the proposed RO antiscalant.

7. Factory Test Report
a. Material, specific gravity rating at 600 psi @ 100 degrees F. design hoop stress b. Wall thickness verification
c. Fitting placement verification
d. Visual inspection
e. Impact test
f. Gel test
g. Hydrostatic test
C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data:
a. Submit complete operation and maintenance manuals, including copies of test reports, maintenance data, and schedules, description of operation, and spare parts information.

1.05 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The tank manufacturer shall have quality control procedures adequate to ensure that all tank fabrication complies with these specifications. Quality control shall include a final inspection. The objective of manufacturer's quality control and inspection procedure shall be to have the tanks comply with the specifications and drawings at the time of first inspection, thus eliminating any need for rework by the manufacturer or a second inspection.

POLYETHYLENE TANK AND APPURTENANCES 43 4143-3

1. Manufacturer's inspection of the tanks shall include the following:
a. Thickness measurements.
b. Measurements showing compliance with dimensions and tolerances and fittings. c. Surface quality: Presence of pits, foreign inclusions, dry spots, air bubbles and pimples.

2. All cutouts from each tank shall be retained and upon request shall be delivered to the ENGINEER.

3. Comply with ASTM D1998, latest edition, “Standard Specification for Polyethylene Upright Storage Tanks”.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading:

1. CONTRACTOR shall arrange for delivery, unloading, and storage of the tanks and all appurtenant items.

2. CONTRACTOR shall require the manufacturer to assume responsibility for packaging to prevent transit and handling damage to the tanks. Tanks shall be shipped with temporary bracing, as required, to maintain shape during transportation, storage, and handling and to protect bulkhead and flange fittings.

3. All tank openings shall be covered to prevent entrance of dirt, water and debris during shipping.

B. Storage and Protection:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the manufacturer all requirements for field storage. Items not amenable to outdoor storage shall be noted and storage requirements shall be provided prior to delivery.

2. Store equipment in a manner to permit easy access for inspection and identification.

Store equipment in covered storage off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports.

C. Acceptance at Site:

1. All boxes, crates, and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. Notify ENGINEER of loss or damage to equipment or components.

Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. Warranty shall be provided upon request for the specific service application. 5-year full replacement minimum. All tanks shall be warranted to be free of defects in material and workmanship for the warranty period.

PART 2 - EQUIPMENT

2.01 GENERAL
A. Tanks shall be rotationally-molded, vertical, high density cross-linked polyethylene resin, onepiece seamless construction, cylindrical in cross-section and vertical with flat bottoms. Tanks shall be adequately vented. Where indicated, tanks shall be provided with ancillary mechanical fittings and accessories. Tanks shall be marked to identify the manufacturer; date of manufacture and serial numbers must be permanently embossed into the tank. Tanks shall be suitable for continuous 24-hour per day operation in an outdoor location. The maximum ambient temperature shall be 120F and the minimum ambient temperature shall be 0F. Tanks shall be used for storage of caustic soda and calcium chloride.

POLYETHYLENE TANK AND APPURTENANCES 43 4143-4

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Chemical storage tanks and appurtenances shall be furnished by one of the following:

1. Poly Processing Company

2. Or approved equal

2.03 TANK SCHEDULE
A. The tanks shall be the size and quantity indicated on the Contract Documents.

2.04 DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION
A. Tank Materials:

1. Tank: High density polyethylene capable of containing liquids with specific gravities as specified

2. Fittings: CPVC

3. Fitting Gaskets and Seals: PTFE

4. Hardware for Tank Fitting: 316 SS
B. Tank Construction:

1. Tanks shall be cylindrical, vertical and of seamless construction. Final location of all fittings and calibration marks will be determined in the field by the CONTRACTOR prior to submittal of Shop Drawings.

2. Where black tanks are indicated, the resin shall have a carbon black compounded into it. The tank material shall be rotationally molded and be a resin that is commercially available at the time of tank manufacture.

3. For sodium hypochlorite and sulfuric acid storage, resin shall include additional medium density polyethylene (OR-1000) with four times the antioxidant properties of a standard polyethylene bonded to the interior surface during the manufacturing process.

4. Wall thickness for a given hoop stress is to be calculated in accordance with ASTM D 1998.

Tanks shall be designed using a hoop stress no greater than 600 psi. In NO case shall the tank thickness be less than design requirements per ASTM D 1998. a. The wall thickness of any cylindrical portion at any fluid level shall be determined by the following equation:

T = P x OD/2SD or 0.433 x SG x H x OD/2SD
Where: T = wall thickness, in
P = pressure, psi
SG = specific gravity, gm/cc
H = fluid head, ft
OD = outside diameter, ft
SD = hydrostatic design stress, 600 psi
b. The minimum wall thickness shall be sufficient to support its own weight in an upright position without external support but shall not be less than 0.187” thick. c. On closed top tanks the top head shall be integrally molded with the cylindrical wall.

Its minimum thickness shall be equal to the thickness of the top of the straight sidewall.

In most cases, flat areas shall be provided for attachment of large fittings on the dome of the tank.
d. The bottom head shall be integrally molded with the cylindrical wall.

C. Appearance:

1. The finished tank surface shall be as free as commercially practicable from visual defects such as foreign inclusions, air bubbles, pin holes and craters.

2. Tank colors shall be natural (unpigmented), black (compounded), or as specified by the Design Builder with written agreement by the tank manufacturer.

POLYETHYLENE TANK AND APPURTENANCES 43 4143-5

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Storage tanks shall be provided with the following items located as shown on the Drawings. Exact orientation shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR in the field.

B. Fittings

1. Tank fittings shall be according to the fitting schedule in 2.3 above. Treaded fittings shall use American Standard Pipe Threads. If tanks are insulated, fittings shall be installed at the factory prior to application of the insulation.

2. Bolted flange fittings shall be self-aligning and constructed of one 150 lb. flange with ANSI B16.5 bolt pattern, one flange gasket and stud bolts with gaskets. Stud bolts to have chemical resistant polyethylene injection molded heads and gaskets to provide a sealing surface between the bolt head and the interior tank wall. Stud bolt heads are to be color coded for visual ease of identifying the bolt material by onsite operators. Green- 316 Stainless Steel, Black- Titanium, Red- Alloy C-276, Blue- Monel. All materials shall be compatible with chemical service and as indicated in the fitting schedule above. For NSF/ANSI 61 certification, EPDM or Viton GF gaskets shall be supplied.

3. Bolted One-Piece Sure Seal (B.O.S.S.), double flange fittings constructed of virgin polyethylene shall be supplied. Bolts will be welded to a common backing ring and encapsulated with polyethylene preventing fluid contact with the metal material. Flange will have one full face gasket to provide a sealing surface against inside tank wall. All materials shall be compatible with chemical service and as indicated in the fitting schedule above.

C. Lifting Lugs:

1. Lifting lugs shall be provided and shall be constructed of HDPE and capable of withstanding weight of empty tank with minimum safety factor of 5. A minimum of four lugs shall be provided on the tank. Lifting lugs shall be constructed to prevent tear-out of the hole when in use.

D. Vents:

1. Provide vents at the sizes and locations shown on the Contract Drawings

2. Each tank vent line shall be equipped with a plastic-coated insect screen that is compatible with the chemical stored.

3. Insect/Bird Screen on Tank Vents
a. Screens shall be constructed of PVC or Fiberglass.
b. Opening Size: Per Manufacturer Requirement
c. Screens may be integrally molded into PVC body or wafer style.

E. Pipe Supports:

1. Pipe supports shall be furnished in accordance with Section 40 0507, Pipe Hangers and Supports, and the additional requirements listed below.

2. Provide support braces from tanks' outside wall for support of the tanks' overflow lines.

3. Maximum spacing between pipe supports shall be 5 feet.

F. Tie Down Systems:

1. The tie down system shall be supplied and designed of same certified by a Structural Engineer registered in the State of California to withstand seismic and wind loads per IBC code, using wind exposure D. Anchor bolts as required by the calculations shall be supplied by the tank manufacturer.

2. Metal components to be 316 stainless steel, edge softeners, and tension ring with 316 stainless steel cable and clamps.

3. The tie down system shall be resistant to the chemicals stored.

G. Manways:

1. Bolted Sealed Manway:
a. Provide the size and location as shown on the Drawings.

POLYETHYLENE TANK AND APPURTENANCES 43 4143-6
b. The sealed manway shall be constructed of polyethylene material. The bolts shall be polypropylene, polyethylene or PVC. The gaskets shall be EPDM based on chemical resistance to chemical contained.

H. Tank Fill Connections:

1. Fill connections for the tank shall have downpipes extending 24 inches from the tank bottom.

Down pipes and fill pipes shall be supported at 6-ft max intervals. Down pipes and fill pipes shall be CPVC or material compatible with the chemical stored.

I. Overflow

1. Provide overflow pipe as shown.

J. Flexible Connections and Expansion Joints:

1. Provide flexible connections at tank connections to accommodate filling and draining of the tank, as well as thermal expansion and contraction.

2. Flexible connections shall be resistant to the chemical conveyed.

3. Flexible connections shall eliminate transfer of stress from connected piping to tank connections.

4. End connections: Flanged.

5. Joint construction shall be EPDM with PTFE liner.

6. Manufacturer: Rubber Expansion Joint Compatible with Tank Application

7. Expansion joint to have a minimum of 3 convolutions, stainless steel limit cables and FRP composite flanges. Galvanized parts will not be accepted.

8. Expansion joint to meet the following minimum performance requirements:

Axial Compression ≥ 0.67”
Axial Extension ≥ 0.67”
Lateral Deflection ≥ 0.51”
Angular Deflection ≥ 14º
Torsional Rotation ≥ 4º

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Shop Tests:

1. Testing, inspection, and acceptance criteria shall conform to the applicable codes, standards, and requirements stated herein.

2. All deficiencies or malfunctions which occur during the tests shall be corrected and the test repeated. Defective material shall not be repaired and used in the construction of the supplied equipment, without prior approval of the ENGINEER.

3. Submit to the ENGINEER results of impact test, gel-test, and visual inspection. Test methods shall be per ASTM D1998.

4. Hydrostatic Test: Tanks shall be filled with water and checked for leaks for no less than two hours after filling. Allowable leakage shall be zero. Hydrostatic test shall be performed after all fittings and bulkheads are installed.

5. Degree of Crosslinking. Use Method C of ASTM D1998, Section 11.4 to determine the orthoxylene insoluble fraction of cross-linked polyethylene gel test. Samples shall test at no less than 60 percent.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

3.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The tank shall be shipped upright or lying down on their sides with blocks and slings to keep them from moving. AVOID sharp objects on trailers.

B. All fittings shall be installed and, if necessary, removed for shipping and shipped separately unless otherwise noted by the CONTRACTOR.

POLYETHYLENE TANK AND APPURTENANCES 43 4143-7
C. Inspect and verify that structures or surfaces on which the equipment will be installed have no defects which will adversely affect installation.

1. Dimensions: Take exterior dimensions with the tank empty, in the vertical position. Outside diameter tolerance, including out-of-roundness, shall be per ASTM D 1998. Fitting placement tolerance shall be +/- 1 degree radial.

2. CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall inspect each tank for defects, damage and conformance with the Specifications prior to installation. Inspect for foreign inclusions, air bubbles, pimples, crazing, cracking, and delamination. Should defects become evident during inspection, testing or within the guarantee period, CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace the defective tank or fitting as approved by ENGINEER.

3. Promptly report defects which may affect the Work to ENGINEER.

4. Inspect concrete pads for proper elevation, dimensions, evenness and anchor bolt locations.

Correct if required.

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in complete accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Factory-trained manufacturer’s representative shall be present for unloading and installation of the tank. Provide a ¼-inch thick elastomeric pad for installation under each polyethylene tank manufactured of material compatible with the chemical to be stored. The diameter of each pad shall be 6 inches greater than the associated tank.

B. Tanks shall be secured with stainless steel anchoring devices in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Contactor shall make adjustments required to place tanks in proper operating condition following installation.

3.01 FIELD TESTING
A. After installation, each tank shall be field-tested by filling with potable water. The tank with its fittings shall hold water, without loss, or evidence of weeping or capillary action for a period of 24 hours prior to acceptance. The field test will be witnessed by the CONTRACTOR. Submit copies of the test report to ENGINEER within seven days of completing the field test.

END OF SECTION 43 4143
GAC PRESSURE VESSEL SYSTEM 43 4221-1
SECTION 43 4200 - GAC PRESSURE VESSEL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the equipment, and all associated accessories and appurtenances, as necessary to provide a complete and functioning system.

MANUFACTURER/VENDOR shall be responsible for providing sufficient instruction to the CONTRACTOR to ensure satisfactory equipment installation, as well as support for system startup, commissioning, and initial operations as required per the Contract Documents.

B. Items of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer and shall be provided from standard package systems and product lines, with modifications as needed to meet nonstandard requirements as indicated herein.

C. Pressure vessels shall be marked with an ASME Code U Symbol.

D. All wetted materials, interior surfaces, coatings, and appurtenances must be ANSI/NSF 61 and ANSI/NSF 372 rated for use with potable water.

1.02 EQUIPMENT
A. System Description:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the pressure vessel systems described herein for installation. The complete pressure vessel systems each include the following:
a. Pressure Vessels, including:
1) Interior Flow Distribution Nozzles/Systems.
2) Structural Steel Support Legs with Anchor Bolts and Hardware. 3) Internals for Granular Activated Carbon (GAC)

2. Systems Connections:
a. 8” Flanged Influent Inlet
b. 8" Flanged Effluent Outlet
c. 4” Flanged Absorbent Media Fill Line
d. 4” Flanged Absorbent Media Drain Line
e. 6 x 1” Threaded Process Taps and Associated Appurtenances f. 2” Flanged Air Scour Inlet and Associated Appurtenances g. 24” Flanged Side Bed Access Way with Davit
h. 14”x18” Elliptical Access Manway with Lifting Rungs

3. Installation Support Services.
a. Systems and Components shall be standard product offerings except where specific modifications are required as noted herein.
b. The Supplier shall provide the maximum installed length, width, and height dimensional envelope of all proposed systems, including all associated equipment, piping, and appurtenances.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Reference Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures
B. Required Submittal Information:

1. Design drawings showing dimensions, weights, details of components, size and location of external piping connections and packaged components, including but not limited to, all system piping, rupture disks, and other appurtenances.

2. Provide data on superficial velocity and/or flow rate versus pressure drop through a pressure vessel without adsorbent media installed during normal downward flow operations, as well as during adsorbent media fluidization backwashing at 35°F, 50°F, and 65°F. The data shall include those at superficial velocity ranging from 1 gallon to 10 GAC PRESSURE VESSEL SYSTEM 43 4221-2
gallons per minute per square foot (gpm/ft2) and/or flow rate ranging from 200 to 1,500 gallons per minute (gpm).

3. Information on Materials of Construction and Coating System.

4. Calculations Demonstrating Compliance with ASME Section VIII, Division 1 Pressure Vessel Code; Calculations and Drawings Shall Be Stamped by a Professional Engineer Registered in the State of California.

5. Standard Media Loading and Unloading Procedures.

6. ANSI/NSF 61 Certifications for all Equipment

7. Recommended Maintenance Procedures.

8. Product Data and Cut Sheets for Equipment, Components, and Accessories.

9. Tank to Floor Connection Details with Calculations illustrating Anchorage Requirements; Seismic Anchorage Calculations shall be Stamped by a Professional Engineer Registered in the State of California
C. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Certificate of Proper Installation for Pressure Vessel System and Accessories.

2. Written Installation Instructions.

3. Operation and Maintenance Manual.

4. Test Reports:
a. Factory Inspections.
b. Factory Tests and Adjustments.
c. Factory Pressure Test for The Pressure Vessels Actually Provided.

D. Contract Closeout Submittal: O&M Manual and Warranty delivered to the OWNER.

1.04 WARRANTY
A. Supplier shall warrant that the equipment provided is free from defects in material and workmanship, and has been manufactured in accordance with the Contract Documents. Warranty shall be for a period of 5 years following startup of the system. Corrosion resulting from improper coating of the interior of the pressure vessel is specifically included as part of this warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. Exposure:

1. Pressure vessels shall be suitable for installation outdoors. Ambient temperatures will typically range from 30°F to 110°F. The pressure vessel systems are anticipated to be in service continuously to provide potable/drinking water treatment. Vessels will be drained of water and taken offline when not in use for any extended periods. Special provisions necessary to accommodate this service cycle shall be identified by the MANUFACTURER/VENDOR. This shall include, but not be limited to, small manual drains and mesh filters on all dead legs such as the media removal lines to allow the system to be fully drained of water without loss of media.

2. Seismic – Each vessel shall be designed to meet current Uniform Building Code Seismic requirements as required by specific location. See Section 01 6010 – Seismic Design Criteria for additional information.

2.02 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN PARAMETERS
A. Design Criteria
Parameter Unit Value
Treatment Capacity gpm 4,000
Number of Trains vessels 4
Capacity per train gpm 1,000
Vessel Diameter feet 12
Flux Rate gpm/sf 8.8
Media Depth feet 4
EBCT minutes 3.4
Empty Space feet 1.6
GAC PRESSURE VESSEL SYSTEM 43 4221-3
Parameter Unit Value
Vessel Side Shell Height feet 5.6
B. Equipment Description:

1. Pressure vessels shall be of welded steel construction using SA-516 Grade 70 Steel. The vessels shall be designed, constructed, and stamped in accordance with ASME Section VIII, Division 1, and shall be registered with the National Board for a minimum design pressure rating of 125 psig at 140 degrees F. Vessels shall be factory-tested in accordance with UG-99 Standard Hydrostatic Test. Vessel pressure envelope and components directly welded to pressure envelope will be constructed of SA-516 GR70. All other components welded to vessel will be SA-36.

2. Each pressure vessel shall be 12-foot 0-inch diameter and sized to contain at least 20,000 pounds of media.

3. The package will include all necessary plumbing in order to support series lead and lag, parallel isolation and backwash modes of operation.

4. The structural aspects of the vessel will be sufficient to meet the requirements of the California Building Code and International Building Code, latest editions.

MANUFACTURER/VENDOR shall submit detailed calculations on request illustrating the seismic characteristics of the proposed vessel.

5. Each pressure vessel shall be capable of holding adsorbent media and be designed such that no media escapes during normal forward flow or backwashing.

6. Each pressure vessel shall include the following features described below. Connection points and piping on the vessel shall be lined.
a. One (1) 8” Flanged Influent Inlet Tee with an Air Relief/Vacuum Valve and Isolation Valve Sized per the MANUFACTURER/VENDOR’s requirements. Air Relief/Vacuum valve shall be plumbed to 42” above the finished floor and provided with an insect screen at the pipe outlet. Vent piping diameter shall be as recommended by the pressure vessel manufacturer, constructed of Schedule 40 carbon steel, ASTM A53 Grade B materials.
b. One (1) 8" Flanged Effluent Outlet Tee with 6” Drain Line and Isolation Valve c. One (1) 4” Flanged Absorbent Media Fill Line with associated Isolation Valves and Quick Connect Coupling
d. One (1) 4” Flanged Absorbent Media Drain Line with associated Isolation Valves and Quick Connect Coupling
e. Six (6) 1” Threaded Process Taps, consisting of Five (5) Sampling Lines and associated Isolation Valves; One (1) High Level Conductivity Probe Port. (Probe to be Provided by CONTRACTOR)
f. One (1) 2” Flanged Air Scour Inlet
g. One (1) 24” Flanged Side Bed Access Way with Davit Support Mechanism h. One (1) 14”x18” Elliptical Access Manway with Lifting Rungs i. Four (4) Structural Steel Support Legs.
j. Flange Connections to Interface with External Piping. k. Vessel Mounted Pipe Support
l. Four Lifting Lugs, Minimum.
m. Anchor bolts, Type 304 stainless steel, to be provided by the Contractor. Supplier shall specify the number and size of anchor bolts for the Contractor. n. Surface Finishing
1) The interior surface of the pressure vessels shall be abrasive blasted to SSPC-SP10 and coated with Carboline Plasite 4110, or Equal, to a minimum 35 mil dry film thickness.
2) The exterior ferrous metal surfaces shall be abrasive blasted to SSPC-SP6 and primed with epoxy paint with Carboguard 890 to a minimum 6 to 8 mil dry film GAC PRESSURE VESSEL SYSTEM 43 4221-4
thickness with a finish coat of Carbothane 134HG paint at a minimum 2 to 3 mil dry film thickness.
o. Inlet Distributor:
1) Pressure vessel shall be equipped with an upper inlet distributor assembly designed to distribute influent flows evenly across the media without disrupting the media or causing short-circuiting.
2) Inlet distributors shall be installed by the pressure vessel manufacturer prior to shipment. The assembly shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel to prevent corrosion.
3) The inlet distributor shall be located to allow at least 30 percent expansion of the media during backwash without loss of media. No media-excluding component which would block media fines from being washed out during the initial media backwash shall be included in the inlet distributor. 4) Location of inlet distributor and materials shall be submitted with design drawings for review and approval.
p. Effluent Drainage Systems:
1) Each vessel shall be designed with a Type 316 stainless steel multi-level branched ring effluent drainage system that provides uniform collection of the treated water. The shall be designed to contain the media within the pressure vessel and allow the water to pass to the vessel effluent. 2) The underdrain systems shall be installed prior to shipment. 3) Underdrain system shall be able to be used with GAC, IX, or alternative similarly sized media.
4) Materials used in the underdrain systems must meet ANSI/NSF-61 certification.
5) 316 SS Hub and (16) 3” Slotted pipe laterals.
6) Included on hub are 1"Ø x 36"(L) Air Scour Line
7) w/ 4 1/2"Ø Nozzles Each (Typ 8.) (45° Spacing)
q. Equipment Identification Plates: An engraved laminated identification plate shall be securely mounted on the equipment in a readily visible location. The plate shall bear the 1/4-inch minimum identification number indicated on Contract Documents.
r. Pipe Identification: All pipes shall be marked to identify their purpose (i.e. – Supply, Effluent, Backwash, etc.). Pipe Identification labels shall comply with ANSI/ASME requirements for pipe labeling.
s. Pressure vessel supports, bases, and anchorages shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of the International Building Code, latest edition. t. Pressure Indication
1) Ashcroft Part No.: 45-1279SSL-04L-XSG-150PSI
2) 4 ½” dial pressure gauge, lower mount, ½” NPT, stainless steel connection, liquid filled, safety glass, 0-150 psi
u. Pressure Relief:
1) Pressure relief shall be provided by a 3-inch rupture disk constructed of impervious graphite and designed to relieve pressure at the design pressure of the vessel and at the maximum flow to the system. The rupture disks shall be mounted off the vessel vent line and shall vent to atmosphere. A total of two (2) rupture disks shall be provided for each system. Alternate methods of pressure relief can be presented by the MANUFACTURER/VENDOR for ENGINEER approval.

GAC PRESSURE VESSEL SYSTEM 43 4221-5
v. Miscellaneous:
1) Gaskets shall be 1/8-inch thick, 85 durometer EPDM with a temperature range of minus 40 degrees F to 275°F and a pressure rating of 175 psig. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ANSI/NSF Standard 61.
2) All gaskets to be American Biltrite rubber EPDM NSF full face gaskets supplied by Sur-Seal, Inc. Specification ASTM D2000; Hardness Shore A 75 +/- 5, ASTM D1330 Grade 1 & 2, Polymer: Ethylene-Propylene (EPDM); ASTM D412 Tensile (PSI): 1500 min.; Ultimate Elongation (%) 250 min.

ASTM Grade.
3) Isolation Joints are neoprene construction with plated steel loose rings. w. Spare Parts / Special Tools
1) No special tools needed.
2) Spare parts – gaskets for backup and for future carbon change outs if needed.

2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Inspections: Inspect welds on vessels to ASME.

B. Factory Tests and Adjustments: Hydrostatically Pressure Test Pressure Vessel Per ASME Code.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS: All tanks shall be fabricated by reputable manufacturers, experienced in the design and fabrication of the specific tanks, and familiar with all applicable local regulations, codes, fire and safety orders.

1.Tetrasolv Filtrations Inc., Granular Activated Carbon Adsorption System, DL4-144k

2.Engineer Approved Equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. MANUFACTURER/VENDOR, assisted by the Contractor, shall conduct field tests as described below.

1. Functional Test: Prior to plant startup, all equipment shall be inspected for proper installation and proper connections to exterior piping.

2. Hydrostatically Test Pressure Vessels and Related Piping.

3.02 MANUFACTURER/VENDOR’S SERVICES
A. MANUFACTURER/VENDOR’s representative for the following services at jobsite or classroom, as designated by the ENGINEER and/or OWNER.

1. Installation assistance and inspection.

2. Functional testing and completion of MANUFACTURER/VENDOR's Certificate of Proper Installation.

3. Pre-startup classroom or site training of plant’s personnel.

B. Furnish startup services and training of OWNER’s personnel at such times as requested by OWNER.

3.03 SERVICES BY OTHERS
A. The OWNER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR(s) shall be responsible for the installation of the pressure vessel systems and Site services, including:

1. Site Preparation (CONTRACTOR)

2. Foundation Design (ENGINEER)

3. Foundation Installation (CONTRACTOR)

4. Holding Fabricated Vessel until Delivery can be Coordinated (Up to 6 Months) (MANUFACTURER/VENDOR)

5. Receipt and Off-Loading of Pressure Vessel System Equipment (CONTRACTOR) GAC PRESSURE VESSEL SYSTEM 43 4221-6

6. Installation of Pressure Vessel System (CONTRACTOR)

7. Connection of the Differential Pressure Instruments to Control and Alarm Systems (CONTRACTOR).

8. Provision of a Means to Keep the Vessel Flooded in All Operating Modes (CONTRACTOR/OWNER).

9. System Connection to Existing Infrastructure (CONTRACTOR)

10. System Disinfection Prior to Initial Fill of Media (CONTRACTOR)

11. Utilities for Bulk Loading of Media (Compressed Air, Clean Water Source, Backwash Water Disposal). (OWNER Provided / CONTRACTOR Purchased)

12. Operation of the System During Initial Media Fill. (CONTRACTOR)

13. Mechanical Startup of the System (CONTRACTOR under OWNER Supervision).

14. Painting: Field touchup painting shall be performed for any surfaces damaged during shipping. Touchup painting shall blend with factory paint and shall be applied as recommended by the MANUFACTURER/VENDOR
END OF SECTION 43 4221
WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 0000-1
SECTION 46 0000 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. All equipment and appurtenant work, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be provided.

B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all equipment except where otherwise indicated.

C. Equipment Arrangement: Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the arrangement of equipment shown on the Drawings is based upon information available at the time of design and is not intended to show exact dimensions particular to a specific manufacturer in all cases. Some aspects of the Drawings are diagrammatic and some features of the illustrated equipment arrangement may require revision to meet the actual equipment requirements. Structural supports, foundations, piping and valve connections, and electrical and instrumentation connections indicated may have to be altered to accommodate the equipment provided.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures
B. Section 01 6110 – Seismic Design Criteria
C. Section 09 9100 – Painting
D. Section 09 9700 – Special Coatings
E. Section 40 0513 – Common Work Results for Process Piping

1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Equipment shall be in accordance with the following standards, as applicable and as indicated in each equipment specification:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

4. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

5. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

6. American Welding Society (AWS)

7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

8. Federal Specifications (FS)

9. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

10. Manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications

11. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) B. The following standards are referenced in this Section:

ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800 ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Steel, Nickel Alloy and other Special Alloys ANSI B46.1 Surface Texture
ANSI S12.6 Method for the Measurement of the Real-Ear Attenuation of Hearing Protectors ASME B1.20.1 General Purpose Pipe Threads (Inch)
WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 0000-2
ASME B31.1 Power Piping
AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe
AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 in. through 144 in. (100 mm through 3,600 mm)
ASTM A 48 Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A 108 Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Furnish complete drawings and technical information for equipment, piping, valves and controls. Where indicated or required by the ENGINEER, Shop Drawings shall include clear, concise calculations showing equipment anchorage forces and the capacities of the anchorage elements (including seismic and structural anchoring calculations).

C. Spare Parts List: A list of spare parts for each piece of equipment shall be obtained from the manufacturer and submitted at the same time as Shop Drawings. The name, address and telephone number of the nearest distributor for each piece of equipment shall be furnished. This list shall contain all data necessary to allow the OWNER to purchase spare parts as necessary.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection: The local authorities shall be informed to witness all required tests for piping, plumbing, fire protection systems, pressure vessels, safety systems, and related items.

B. Quality and Tolerances: Tolerances and clearances shall be as shown on the Shop Drawings and shall be closely adhered to.

1. Machine work shall in all cases be of high-grade workmanship and finish, with due consideration to the special nature or function of the parts. Members without milled ends and which are to be framed to other steel parts of the structure may have a variation in the detailed length of not greater than 1/16-inch for members 30-feet or less in length, and not greater than 1/8-inch for members over 30-feet in length.

2. Castings shall be homogeneous and free from non-metallic inclusions and defects. Surfaces of castings which are not machined shall be cleaned to remove foundry irregularities. Casting defects not exceeding 12.5 percent of the total thickness and where defects will not affect the strength and serviceability of the casting may be repaired by approved welding procedures.

If the removal of metal for repair reduces the stress-resisting cross-section of the casting by more than 25 percent or to such an extent that the computed stress in the remaining metal exceeds the allowable stress by more than 25 percent, then the casting may be rejected.

3. All materials shall meet the physical and mechanical properties in accordance with the reference standards.

C. Machine Finish: The type of finish shall be the most suitable for the application and shall be shown in micro-inches in accordance with ANSI B46.1. The following finishes shall be used:

1. Surface roughness not greater than 63 micro-inches shall be required for all surfaces in sliding contact.

2. Surface roughness not greater than 250 micro-inches shall be required for surfaces in contact where a tight joint is not required.

3. Rough finish not greater than 500 micro-inches shall be required for other machined surfaces.

4. Contact surfaces of shafts and stems which pass through stuffing boxes and contact surfaces of bearings shall be finished to not greater than 32 micro-inches.

WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 0000-3

1.06 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
A. Spare parts shall be furnished as indicated in the individual equipment sections. All spare parts shall be suitably packaged in the original manufacturer's box and labeled clearly with equipment numbers and name tags attached to the box.

B. Special tools shall be suitably packaged and clearly labeled and directions shall be provided for intended use.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Noise Level: When in operation, no single piece of equipment shall exceed the OSHA noise level requirement of 105 dBA for one-hour exposure per day without sound enclosure or sound dampening devices.

B. High Noise Level Location: One personal hearing protection station at each high noise level location shall be provided. Locations are defined as follows:

1. Outdoor Location: Any single equipment item or any group of equipment items that produce noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for a 2-hour exposure. Where such equipment is separated by a distance of more than 20 feet, measured between edges of footings, each group of equipment shall be provided with a separate hearing protection station.

2. Indoor Location
a. Any single equipment item or any group of equipment items located within a single room not normally occupied, that produces noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for a 2-hour exposure.
b. Any single equipment item or any group of equipment items located within a single room normally occupied by workers, that produces noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for an 8-hour exposure.

C. Personal Hearing Protection: Three pairs of high attenuation hearing protectors in the original unopened packaging shall be provided. The ear protectors shall be capable of meeting the requirements of ANSI S12.6 and shall produce a noise level reduction of 25 dBA at a frequency of 500 Hz. The hearing protectors shall have ear cushions and a variable, padded headband.

D. Drive Trains and Service Factors: Service factors shall be applied in the selection or design of mechanical power transmission components. All components of drive train assemblies between the prime mover and the driven equipment shall be designed and rated to deliver the maximum peak or starting torque, speed, and horsepower. All of the applicable service factors shall be considered, such as mechanical (type of prime mover), load class, start frequency, ventilation, ambient temperature and fan factors. Drive train components include couplings, shafts, gears and gear drives, drive chains, sprockets and V-belt drives. Unless otherwise indicated, the following load classifications shall apply in determining service factors:

Type of Equipment Service
Factor
Load
Classification
Reciprocating Air
Compressors:

Multi-Cylinder
Single-Cylinder

2.0 2.0
Heavy Shock
Heavy Shock
Pumps:

Centrifugal or Rotary
Reciprocating

1.0 1.8
Uniform
Moderate Shock
Cranes or Hoists 1.25 Moderate Shock
WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 0000-4
E. Mechanical Service Factors:

Electric
Motor
Internal Combustion
Engine
Uniform 1.25 1.50
Moderate
Shock 1.50 1.75
Heavy Shock 2.00 2.25
F. For thermal rating adjustments such as start frequency, ambient temperature, and hourly duty cycle factor, ventilation factor, and fan factor, refer to gear manufacturer sizing information.

G. Where load classifications are not indicated, service factors based on AGMA 514.02 shall be used for standard load classifications and service factors for flexible couplings, H. Welding: Unless otherwise indicated, welding shall conform to the following:

1. Latest revision of the AWWA Standards for the welding application.

2. Composite fabricated steel assemblies that are to be erected or installed inside a hydraulic structure, including any fixed or movable structural components of mechanical equipment, shall have continuous seal welds to prevent entrance of air or moisture.

3. Welding shall be by the metal-arc method or gas-shielded arc method as described in the American Welding Society's "Welding Handbook" as supplemented by other pertinent standards of the AWS. Qualification of welders shall be in accordance with the AWS Standards.

4. In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be adequately clamped, supported, and restrained to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions. Weld reinforcement shall be as specified by the AWS code. Upon completion of welding, weld splatter, flux, slag and burrs left by attachments shall be removed. Welds shall be repaired to produce a workmanlike appearance, with uniform weld contours and dimensions. Sharp corners of material that is to be painted or coated shall be ground to a minimum of 1/32-inch on the flat.

I. Protective Coating: Equipment shall be painted or coated in accordance with Section 09 9700 - Special Coatings and Section 09 9100 - Painting, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Identification of Equipment Items: Each item of equipment shipped shall have a legible identifying mark corresponding to the equipment number for the particular item.

K. Vibration Isolators: Air compressors, blowers, engines, inline fans shall be provided with restrained spring-type vibration isolators or pads per manufacturer's written recommendations.

L. Shop Fabrication: Shop fabrication shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the Shop Drawings.

M. Controls: Equipment and system controls shall be in accordance with Section 40 9000 – Instrumentation and Control for Process System.

2.02 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATIONS
A. Equipment Supports: Unless otherwise indicated, equipment supports, anchors, and restrainers shall be adequately designed for static, dynamic, wind, and seismic loads. The design horizontal seismic force shall be the greater of: that noted in Section 01 6110 – Seismic Design Criteria, the general structural notes, or as required by the governing building code, or 10 percent of gravity.

Submitted design calculations for equipment supports shall bear the signature and seal of an engineer registered in the State wherein the project is to be built, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Equipment Foundations: Mechanical equipment, tanks, control cabinets, enclosures, and related equipment shall be mounted on minimum 3.5-inch high concrete bases, where indicated.

Equipment foundations are indicated on Drawings. The size and weight of equipment foundation to insure compatibility with equipment shall be verified through the equipment manufacturer.

WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 0000-5

2.03 COUPLINGS
A. Mechanical couplings shall be provided between the driver and the driven equipment. Flexible couplings shall be provided between the driver and the driven equipment to accommodate slight angular misalignment, parallel misalignment, end float, and to cushion shock loads. Unless otherwise indicated or recommended by the equipment manufacturer, coupling type shall be furnished with the respective equipment as follows:

Equipment Type Coupling Type
Air Compressors / Air
Blowers
Belt, gear or flexible disc
pack
B. Each coupling size shall be determined based on the rated horsepower of the motor, speed of the shaft, and the load classification service factor. The equipment manufacturer shall select or recommend the size and type of coupling required to suit each specific application.

C. Differential Settlement: Where differential settlement between the driver and the driven equipment may occur, 2 sets of universal type couplings shall be provided.

D. Taper-Lock or equal bushings may be used to provide for easy installation and removal of shafts of various diameters.

2.04 SHAFTING
A. General: Shafting shall be continuous between bearings and shall be sized to transmit the power required. Keyways shall be accurately cut in line. Shafting shall not be turned down at the ends to accommodate bearings or sprockets whose bore is less than the diameter of the shaft. Shafts shall rotate in the end bearings and shall be turned and polished, straight, and true.

B. Design Criteria: All shafts shall be designed to carry the steady state and transient loads suitable for unlimited number of load applications, in accordance with ASME B106.1M, - Design of Transmission Shafting. Where shafts are subjected to fatigue stresses, such as frequent start and stop cycles, the mean stress shall be determined by using the modified Goodman Diagram. The maximum torsional stress shall not exceed the endurance limit of the shaft after application of the factor of safety of 2 in the endurance limit and the stress concentration factor of the fillets in the shaft and keyway. Stress concentration factor shall be in accordance with ASME Standard B17.1 - Keys and Keyseats.

C. Materials: Shafting materials shall be appropriate for the type of service and torque transmitted.

Environmental elements such as corrosive gases, moisture and fluids shall be taken into consideration. Materials shall be as indicated unless furnished as part of an equipment assembly.

1. Low carbon cold-rolled steel shafting shall conform to ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.

2. Medium carbon cold-rolled shafting shall conform to ASTM A 108, Grade 1045.

3. Other grades of carbon steel alloys shall be suitable for service and load.

4. Corrosion-resistant shafting shall be stainless steel or Monel, whichever is most suitable for the intended service.

D. Differential Settlement: Where differential settlement between the driver and the driven equipment may occur, a shaft of sufficient length with 2 sets of universal type couplings shall be provided.

2.05 V-BELT DRIVES
A. V-belts and sheaves shall be of the best commercial grade and shall conform to ANSI, MPTA, and RMA Standards.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, sheaves shall be machined from the finest quality gray cast iron.

C. Sheaves shall be statically balanced. In some applications where vibration is a problem, sheaves shall be dynamically balanced. Sheaves operating at belt speeds exceeding 6,500 rpm may be required to be of special materials and construction.

WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 0000-6
D. Finish bored sheaves shall be complete with keyseat and setscrews.

E. Sliding motor bases or auto-tension, spring suspension shall be provided to adjust the tension of Vbelts.

2.06 DRIVE GUARDS
A. Power transmission trains, prime movers, machines, shaft extensions, and moving machine parts shall be guarded to conform with the Division of Industrial Safety General Industrial Safety Orders latest edition. The guards shall be constructed of minimum 10 gage expanded, flattened steel with smooth edges and corners, galvanized after fabrication, and securely fastened. Where required for lubrication or maintenance, guards shall have hinged and latched access doors.

2.07 BEARINGS
A. General: Bearings shall conform to the standards of the Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (AFBMA).

B. To assure satisfactory bearing application, fitting practice, mounting, lubrication, sealing, static rating, housing strength, and lubrication shall be considered in bearing selection.

C. Re-lubricatable type bearings shall be equipped with a hydraulic grease fitting in an accessible location and shall have sufficient grease capacity in the bearing chamber.

D. Lubricated-for-life bearings shall be factory-lubricated with the manufacturer's recommended grease to insure maximum bearing life and best performance.

E. Anti-Friction Type Bearing Life: Except where otherwise indicated, bearings shall have a minimum L-10 life expectancy of 5 years or 20,000 hours, whichever occurs first. Where so indicated, bearings shall have a minimum rated L-10 life expectancy corresponding to the type of service, as follows:

Type of
Service
Design Life
(Years)
L-10 Design Life
(Hours)
Whichever Comes First
8-hour shift 10 20,000
16-hour shift 10 40,000
Continuous 10 60,000
F. Bearing housings shall be of cast iron or steel and bearing mounting arrangement shall be as indicated or as recommended in the published standards of the manufacturer. Split-type housings may be used to facilitate installation, inspection, and disassembly.

G. Sleeve Type Bearings: Sleeve-type bearings shall have a cast iron or ductile iron housing and Babbitt or bronze liner. Bearing housing shall be bolted and doweled to the lower casing half.

These housings shall be provided with cast iron caps bolted in place and the bearing end caps shall be bored to receive the bearing shells. Sleeve bearings shall be designed on the basis of the maximum allowable load permitted by the bearing manufacturer. If the sleeve bearing is connected to an equipment shaft with a coupling, the coupling transmitted thrust will be assumed to be the maximum motor or equipment thrust. Lubricant, lubrication system, and cooling system shall be as recommended by the bearing manufacturer.

H. Plate Thrust Bearings: Thrust bearings shall be the Kingsbury Type, designed and manufactured to maintain the shaft in the fixed axial position without undue heating or the necessity of adjustment or attention. Bearings shall be oil lubricated to suit the manufacturer's standard method of lubrication for the specific bearing. If bearing cooling is required, manufacturer shall provide necessary piping, filters, and valves.

WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 0000-7

2.08 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Guides: Pipe connections to equipment shall be supported, anchored, and guided to avoid stresses and loads on equipment flanges and equipment. Supports and hangers shall be in accordance with Section 40 0507 –Hangers and Supports for Process Piping.

B. Flanges and Pipe Threads: Flanges on equipment and appurtenances shall conform to ANSI B16.1, Class 125, or B16.5, Class 150, unless otherwise indicated. Pipe threads shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 and Section 40 0513 – Common Work Results for Process Piping.

C. Flexible Connectors: Flexible connectors shall be installed in all piping connections to engines, blowers, compressors, and other vibrating equipment and in piping systems in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 0510 – Common Work Results for Process Piping. Flexible connectors shall be harnessed or otherwise anchored to prevent separation of the pipe where required by the installation.

D. Insulating Connections: Insulating bushings, unions, couplings, or flanges, as appropriate, shall be used in accordance with the requirements of the Section 40 0510 – Common Work Results for Process Piping.

2.09 GASKETS AND PACKINGS
A. Gaskets shall be in accordance with Section 40 0510 – Common Work Results for Process Piping.

B. Packing around valve stems and reciprocating shafts shall be of compressible material, compatible with the fluid being used. Chevron-type "V" packing shall be Garlock No. 432, John Crane "Everseal," or equal.

C. Packing around rotating shafts (other than valve stems) shall be "O"-rings, stuffing boxes, or mechanical seals, as recommended by the manufacturer, in accordance with the project requirements.

2.10 NAMEPLATES
A. Equipment nameplates of stainless steel shall be engraved or stamped and fastened to the equipment in an accessible location with No. 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins.

Nameplates shall contain the manufacturer's name, model, serial number, size, characteristics, and appropriate data describing the machine performance ratings.

2.11 EQUIPMENT LUBRICANTS
A. Lubricants for all equipment during storage and prior to initial testing of the equipment shall be installed.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER
A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: Where required by individual sections, an authorized, experienced, and competent service representative of the manufacturer shall visit the Site to witness or perform the following in accordance with Section 01 4333 – Manufacturer’s Field Services and to certify in writing that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, lubricated, adjusted, and readied for operation.

1. Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment and approving its installation.

2. Startup and field testing for proper operation, efficiency, and capacity.

3. Performing field adjustments during the test period to ensure that the equipment installation and operation comply with requirements.

4. Instruct plant operating personnel on proper operations, maintenance and care.

WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 0000-8

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations.

B. Alignment: Equipment shall be field tested to verify proper alignment.

3.03 PRE-PACKAGED EQUIPMENT
A. Coordination of all necessary space and structural requirements, clearances, utility connections, signals, and outputs shall be required to avoid later change orders, when any system is furnished as pre-packaged equipment.

3.04 WELDING
A. Welds shall be cleaned of weld-slag, splatter, etc. to provide a smooth surface. Metal brushes shall be the same material as the metal welded. Stainless steel brushes shall be used for cleaning stainless steel welds.

3.05 FIELD TESTS
A. Where indicated by the individual equipment sections, equipment shall be field tested after installation to demonstrate satisfactory operation without excessive noise, vibration, or overheating of bearings or motor.

B. The following field testing shall be conducted:

1. Start equipment, check, and operate the equipment over its entire operating range. Vibration level shall be within the amplitude limits as indicated or as recommended by the reference applicable Standards.

2. Obtain concurrent readings of motor voltage, amperage, capacity, vibration and bearing temperatures.

C. In the event that any equipment fails to meet the test requirements, the equipment shall be modified and retested until it satisfies the requirement.

END OF SECTION 46 0000
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIP 46 0548 - 1 SECTION 46 0548 –VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER

EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Inertia bases

2. Open-spring isolators

3. Restrained-spring isolators

4. Closed-spring isolators

5. Restrained, closed-spring isolators

6. Pad isolators

7. Flexible connections

8. Seismic snubbers

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each. Submit catalog information indicating materials and dimensional data.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and setting dimensions.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that isolators meet or exceed specified requirements.

D. Delegated Design Submittals: Submit signed and sealed Shop Drawings with design calculations and assumptions verifying that maximum sound levels will not be exceeded.

E. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.

F. Manufacturer Reports: Indicate sound isolation installation is complete and according to instructions.

G. Qualifications Statement:

1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and licensed professional.

1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of hangers, including attachment points.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years' documented experience.

B. Licensed Professional: Professional Engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in State of California.

1.05 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.06 WARRANTY
A. Furnish five year manufacturer's warranty for inertia bases.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide vibration isolation on motor-driven equipment, plus connected piping.

B. Provide minimum static deflection of isolators for equipment.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIP 46 0548 - 2 C. Use concrete inertia bases for motors and on base-mounted pumps, blowers, and compressors.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

2. Or Approved Equal
E. Structural Bases:

1. Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine and to transmit design loads to isolators and snubbers.

2. Construction: Welded structural steel with gusset brackets, supporting equipment, and motor with motor slide rails.

F. Concrete Inertia Bases:

1. Mass: Minimum of 1.5 times weight of isolated equipment

2. Construction: Structured steel channel perimeter frame, with gusset brackets and anchor bolts, adequately reinforced, concrete filled

3. Connecting Point: Reinforced to connect isolators and snubbers to base

4. Concrete: Reinforced 3,000 psi concrete

2.02 OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Isotech Inc.

2. Or Approved Equal
B. Description:

1. Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot-dip-galvanized housings and neoprene-coated springs.

2. Code: Color-code springs for load-carrying capacity.

C. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 30 and 60 percent of maximum deflection.

D. Spring Mounts:

1. Leveling devices

2. Neoprene sound pads

3. Zinc-chromate-plated hardware
E. Sound Pads:

1. Meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators.

2.03 RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Greenheck Fan Corporation

2. Or Approved Equal
B. Description:

1. Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot-dip-galvanized housings and neoprene-coated springs.

2. Code: Color-code springs for load-carrying capacity.

C. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 30 and 60 percent of maximum deflection.

D. Spring Mounts:

1. Leveling devices

2. Neoprene sound pads

3. Zinc-chromate-plated hardware
E. Sound Pads:

1. Meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIP 46 0548 - 3 F. Restraint: Furnish mounting frame and limit stops.

2.04 CLOSED-SPRING ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Vibro-Acoustics

2. Or Approved Equal
B. Description:

1. Type: Closed-spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers.

2. Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot-dip-galvanized housings and neoprene-coated springs.

3. Code: Color-code springs for load-carrying capacity.

C. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 30 and 60 percent of maximum deflection.

D. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators and neoprene side stabilizers.

2.05 RESTRAINED, CLOSED-SPRING ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Greenheck Fan Corporation

2. Or Approved Equal
B. Description:

1. Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot-dip-galvanized housings and neoprene-coated springs.

2. Code: Color-code springs for load-carrying capacity.

3. Type: Closed-spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers.

C. Springs:

1. Minimum Horizontal Stiffness: 75 percent of vertical stiffness.

2. Working Deflection: Between 30 and 60 percent of maximum deflection.

D. Housings:

1. Neoprene Isolation Pad:
a. Rubber or neoprene waffle pads
b. Hardness: 30 durometer
c. Height of Ribs: Not to exceed 70 percent of width.

2. Neoprene Side Stabilizer

2.06 PAD ISOLATORS
A. Description:

1. Material: Rubber or Neoprene

2. Hardness: 30 durometer

3. Height of Ribs: Not to exceed 70 percent of width.

B. Rubber Mount:

1. Molded rubber.

2. Threaded insert.

C. Glass-Fiber Pads: Neoprene-jacketed, pre-compressed molded glass fiber

2.07 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Mason Industries, Inc.

2. Or Approved Equal
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIP 46 0548 - 4 B. Steel Piping:

1. Inner Hose: As indicated

2. Exterior Sleeve: As indicated

3. Pressure Rating: As required

4. Joints: Connection as indicated

5. Size: As indicated.

C. Copper Piping:

1. Inner Hose: As indicated

2. Exterior Sleeve: As indicated

3. Pressure Rating: As required.

4. Joints: Connection as indicated.

5. Size: As indicated.

2.08 SEISMIC SNUBBE

1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

2. Or Approved Equal
B. Description:

1. Type: Nondirectional and double-acting unit consisting of interlocking steel members restrained by neoprene elements.

2. Neoprene Elements: Replaceable.

3. Capacity: Four times load assigned to mount groupings

4. Attachment Points and Fasteners: Capable of withstanding three times rated load capacity of seismic snubber.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment and piping is installed before Work of this Section is started.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Adjust equipment level.

B. Install isolation for motor-driven equipment.

C. Bases:

1. Set steel bases for clearance between housekeeping pad and base.

2. Set concrete inertia bases for clearance between housekeeping pad and base.

D. Closed-Spring Isolators: Adjust such that side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions.

E. Piping Connections:

1. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height.

2. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load in order to allow shim removal.

F. Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than static pressure and on hangersupported, horizontally mounted axial fans.

G. Snubbers:

1. Provide resiliently mounted equipment and piping with seismic snubbers.

2. Provide each inertia base with minimum of four seismic snubbers located close to isolators.

3. Snub equipment designated for post-disaster use
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIP 46 0548 - 5

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report, including static deflections.

B. Ensure that equipment operates under loaded conditions without objectionable sound or vibration.

3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove foreign objects that might bridge vibration isolators.

END OF SECTION 46 0548
IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 0553-1 SECTION 46 0553 –IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Nameplates

2. Tags

3. Stencils

4. Labels

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for equipment identification and schedule, including equipment number, location, function, and manufacturer's name and model number.

C. Samples: Submit five nameplates, labels, and tags for each size used on Project.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Qualifications Statement:

1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer.

1.03 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.

B. Product Cost Data: Verify compliance with Project sustainable design requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.

1. Provide cost data for following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products
b. Products with recycled material content
c. Regional products

1.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Extra Stock Materials: Furnish 4 containers of spray-on adhesive.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years' experience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 NAMEPLATES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Craftmark Pipe Markers

2. Or Approved Equal
B. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light, contrasting background color.

IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 0553-2

2.02 TAGS
A. Plastic Tags:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Brady ID
b. Or Approved Equal

2. Description:
a. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light, contrasting background color.

B. Metal Tags:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Brady ID
b. Or Approved Equal

2. Description:
a. Aluminum or Stainless-steel construction; stamped letters.

C. Information Tags:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Brady ID
b. Or Approved Equal

2. Description:
a. Clear plastic with printed DANGER, CAUTION, WARNING and message. b. Furnish grommet and self-locking nylon ties.

2.03 STENCILS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.

2. Or Approved Equal
B. Description:

1. Clean-cut symbols.

C. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating; semigloss enamel.

2.04 LABELS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Brady ID

2. Or Approved Equal
B. Description:

1. Aluminum, Polyester, or Laminated Mylar construction.

2. Adhesive backed, with printed identification
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces as specified in Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating for stencil painting.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Identify equipment with plastic nameplates or stencil painting.

B. Identify inline pumps and other small devices with tags.

IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 0553-3 D. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.

E. Apply stencil painting as specified in Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating.

F. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.

G. Install plastic nameplates with corrosion-resistant mechanical fasteners or adhesive.

H. Labels:

1. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

2. For unfinished covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.

I. Install tags using corrosion-resistant chain.

END OF SECTION 46 0553
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PUMPS 46 0600-1
SECTION 46 0600 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. All pumps and pumping appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be provided.

B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all pumps and pumping equipment except where otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.

C. The requirements of Section 46 0000 – Water and Wastewater Equipment apply to this Section.

D. Unit Responsibility: The pump manufacturer shall be made responsible for furnishing the equipment and for coordination of design, assembly, testing, and installation of each pump system.

E. Single Manufacturer: Where two or more pump systems of the same type or size are required, the pumps shall all be produced by the same manufacturer.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall contain the following information:

1. Pump name, identification number, and specification Section number.

2. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, NPSH required, and pump efficiency over the entire operating range of the pump. The equipment manufacturer shall indicate separately the head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at the design flow conditions and the maximum and minimum flow conditions. Performance curves at intervals of 5 Hz from minimum speed to maximum speed shall be furnished for each centrifugal pump equipped with a variable speed drive.

3. The manufacturer shall be required to indicate the limits on the performance curves recommended for stable operation without surge, cavitation or excessive vibration. The stable operating range shall be as wide as possible based on actual hydraulic and mechanical tests.

4. Assembly and installation drawings including shaft size, seal, coupling, bearings, anchor bolt plan, part nomenclature, material list, outline dimensions, and shipping weights.

5. Data shall be provided for the electric motor proposed for each pump.

6. Wiring diagram of field connections with identification of terminations between Local Control Panels, junction terminal boxes, and equipment items.

7. Complete electrical schematic diagram.

8. Factory certification indicating the pump make and model has been tested satisfactorily to meet the specified performance criteria.

D. Factory Test Data: Signed, dated, and certified factory test data for each pump system which requires factory testing.

E. Certifications:

1. Manufacturer's certification of proper installation.

2. ENGINEER'S certification of satisfactory field testing.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PUMPS 46 0600-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Compliance with the requirements of the individual pump Sections may necessitate modifications to the Manufacturer's standard equipment.

B. Performance Curves: All centrifugal pumps shall have a continuously rising curve or the system operating range shall not cross the pump curve at two different capacities or “dip region.” Unless indicated otherwise, the required pump shaft horsepower at any intended operational point on the performance curve shall not exceed the rated horsepower of the motor or engine or encroach on the service factor.

C. All components of each pump system provided under the pump Sections shall be entirely compatible. Each unit of pumping equipment shall incorporate all basic mechanisms, couplings, electric motors or engine drives, variable speed controls, necessary mountings, and appurtenances.

2.02 MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be suitable for the intended application; materials not indicated shall be highgrade, standard commercial quality, free from all defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended, and shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Cast iron pump casings and bowls shall be of close-grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings, Class 30 or equal.

2. Bronze pump impellers shall conform to ASTM B62 - Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, or B584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications, where dezincification does not exist.

3. Stainless steel pump shafts shall be Type 416 or 316. Miscellaneous stainless steel parts shall be of Type 304 or 316, except in a septic environment.

4. Anchor bolts, washers, and nuts in Standard Service (Non-Corrosive Application) shall be galvanized steel in accordance with the requirements of Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications. Anchor bolts, washers and nuts in Corrosive Service as defined in Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications shall be stainless steel in accordance with that Section.

2.03 PUMP COMPONENTS – GENERAL
A. Flanges and Bolts: Suction and discharge flanges shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800 or B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings dimensions. Bolts shall be in accordance with Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications.

B. Lubrication: Vertical pump shafts of clean water pumps shall be product water-lubricated, unless otherwise indicated. Deep-well pumps and pumps with dry barrels shall have water- or oil-lubricated bearings and seals and enclosed line shafts.

C. Handholes: Handholes on pump casings shall be shaped to follow the contours of the casing to avoid any obstructions in the water passage.

D. Drains: All gland seals, air valves, cooling water drains, and drains from variable speed drive equipment shall be piped to the nearest floor sink, or drain, with galvanized steel pipe or copper tube, properly supported with brackets.

2.04 PUMP APPURTENANCES
A. Nameplates: Each pump shall be equipped with a stainless steel nameplate indicating serial numbers, rated head and flow, impeller size, pump speed, induction motor Full Load Current (FLA), Voltage, Frequency and manufacturer's name and model number.

B. Gauges:

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PUMPS 46 0600-3

1. Gauges shall be located in a representative location, where not subject to shock or vibrations, in order to achieve true and accurate readings.

2. Where subject to shock or vibrations, the gauges shall be wall-mounted or attached to galvanized channel floor stands and connected by means of flexible connectors.

3. Pressure and compound gauges shall be provided in accordance with Division 40.

2.05 FACTORY TESTING
A. If specified in individual specification sections, the following tests shall be conducted on each indicated pump system:

1. Motors: Electric motors shall be tested in accordance with Division 26 – Electrical.

2. Pump Systems: All centrifugal pump systems with drives 10 hp up to and including 125 hp shall have a prototype tested at the pump factory in accordance with the American National Standard for Centrifugal Pump Tests (ANSI/HI 1.6) acceptance Level "A" or the American National Standard for Vertical Pump Tests (ANSI/HI 2.6) as approved by ANSI and published by the Hydraulic Institute. The following minimum test results shall be submitted:
a. Hydrostatic test results
b. At maximum speed, a minimum of five hydraulic test readings between shutoff head and 25 percent beyond the maximum indicated capacity, recorded on data sheets as defined by the Hydraulic Institute. For variable speed driven pumps, each pump shall be tested between maximum and minimum speed at 5 Hz increments. c. Pump curves showing head, flow, bhp/ electrical current, and efficiency requirements. d. NPSH required test curve if required by the pump specification. Otherwise, a calculated NPSH required curve may be submitted.

3. Acceptance: In the event of failure of any pump to meet any of the requirements, all necessary modifications, repairs, or replacements shall be made to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and the pump shall be re-tested until found satisfactory.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER
A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: Where required by the individual pump Sections, an authorized service representative of the manufacturer shall visit the Site to witness the following and to certify in writing that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, lubricated, adjusted, and readied for operation.

1. Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment.

2. Startup and field testing for proper operation.

3. Performing field adjustments to ensure that the equipment installation and operation comply with requirements.

4. Instruct plant operating personnel on proper operation, maintenance and care.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Pumping equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Alignment: All equipment shall be field tested to verify proper alignment and freedom from binding, scraping, shaft runout, or other defects. Pump drive shafts shall be measured just prior to assembly to ensure correct alignment without forcing. Equipment shall be secure in position and neat in appearance.

C. Lubricants: The necessary oil and grease for initial operation shall be provided.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS PUMPS 46 0600-4

3.03 PROTECTIVE COATING
A. Materials and equipment shall be coated as required in Section 09 9700 - Special Coatings and Section 09 9100 - Painting.

3.04 FIELD TESTS
A. Where indicated by the individual pump sections, each pump system shall be field tested after installation to demonstrate:

1. Satisfactory operation without excessive noise and vibration.

2. No material loss caused by cavitation.

3. No overheating of bearings.

4. Indicated head, flow, and efficiency at design point.

B. The following field testing shall be conducted:

5. Startup, check, and operate the pump system over its entire speed range. If the pump is driven by a variable speed drive, the pump and motor shall be tested at 5 Hz increments. If the pump is driven at constant speed, the pump and motor shall be tested at max RPM. Unless otherwise indicated, vibration shall be within the amplitude limits recommended by the Hydraulic Institute Standards at a minimum of four pumping conditions.

6. Obtain concurrent readings of motor voltage, amperage, pump suction head, and pump discharge head for at least three pumping conditions at each pump rotational speed if variable speed at 5 Hz increment or at max RPM if constant speed. Check each power lead to the motor for proper current balance.

7. Determine bearing temperatures by contact type thermometer. A run time until bearing temperatures have stabilized shall precede this test, unless insufficient liquid volume is available.

8. Electrical and instrumentation tests shall conform to the requirements of the sections under which that equipment is specified.

C. In the event any pumping system fails to meet the indicated requirements, the pump shall be modified or replaced and retested as above until it satisfies the requirements.

D. After each pumping system has satisfied the requirements, the ENGINEER shall certify in writing that it has been satisfactorily tested and that all final adjustments have been made. Certification shall include the date of the field tests, a listing of all persons present during the tests, and the test data.

E. This work shall include all costs of field tests, including related services of the manufacturer's representative, except for power and water.

END OF SECTION 46 0600
CLOSE COUPLED END SUCTION PUMP 46 0601-1
SECTION 46 0601 - CLOSE COUPLED END SUCTION PUMP
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall furnish and install horizontally mounted end suction close coupled pump complete with pump, motor and associated appurtenances in accordance with Specification Section 46 0600 – Common Work Results for Process Pumps, manufacturer’s recommendations and plans and specifications mentioned herein.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The work in this section is subject to the requirements of applicable portions of the following standards:

1. HI – Hydraulic Institute

2. ANSI – American National Standards Institute

3. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials

4. IEEE – Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

5. NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturers Association

6. NEC – National Electrical Code

7. ISO – International Standards Organization

8. UL – Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

9. CSA –Canadian Standards Association

10. OSHA – Occupational Safety & Health Administration

11. ASME – American Society of Mechanical Engineers

12. IEC– International Electrotechnical Commission

13. ETL – Electrical Testing Laboratories

14. NSF – National Sanitation Foundation
PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 CLOSE COUPLED END SUCTION PUMPS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install close coupled end suction pumps as indicated in the Contract Documents.

B. The pump and electric motor shall be factory assembled at the pump manufacturer’s facility. The pump manufacturer shall have complete unit responsibility.

2.02 PUMPS
A. The pumps shall be close coupled, single stage, end suction top discharge design, cast iron stainless steel fitted construction.

B. The pumps shall have the following features:

1. All pumps shall be of the back pull-out design so that the rotating element can be removed from the casing without disconnecting the suction or discharge piping. The casing material shall be close-grained cast iron ASTM A48 - Class 30 with a minimum tensile strength of 30,000 P.S.I. Volute shall have integrally cast suction and discharge connections, gauge ports at nozzles, and vent and drain ports. Pumps with specific speed greater than 1600 shall have double volute casing. Pumps with discharge size 3” and larger shall have suction splitter to reduce pre-rotation and improve efficiency. Casings shall be designed for scheduled working pressure and can withstand hydrostatic test at 150% of the maximum working pressure under which the pump could operate at design speed.

2. Pumps with impeller diameter larger than 5” shall be fitted with bronze renewable case wear rings.

CLOSE COUPLED END SUCTION PUMP 46 0601-2

3. Pumps with discharge size 2.5” and larger shall have full flanged connections on both suction and discharge. Suction and discharge flanges shall be drilled to ANSI Class 125# standards and be machined flat face.

4. Pumps with discharge sizes 2” and below shall have NPT threaded connection.

5. The motor shaft shall be of cold rolled steel AISI 1024 with bronze sleeves covering the wetted area of the shaft. Motors with 56J frame shall have a motor shaft of stainless steel AISI 416.

6. The pump manufacturer shall recommend the proper mechanical seal based on the pressure, temperature and liquid outlined on the equipment schedule. Mechanical seals, at a minimum, shall have ceramic stationary seats, carbon rotating rings, Buna elastomers and stainless steel hardware. Application of a mechanical seal shall be internally flushed type, without requiring external flushing lines. Seals shall be capable of being inspected and easily replaced without removing the piping or volute.

7. Impeller shall be of the enclosed Francis vane type, single suction design, made of Stainless Steel 304 (UNS S30400), both hydraulically and dynamically balanced to ISO 1940-1:2003 balance grade G6.3 and keyed to the shaft. The impeller shall be trimmed to meet the specific hydraulic requirements.

8. Pump Construction. The standard material of construction for the pump shall be as below.

9. Special material shall be available as option to suit the liquid pumped. a. Volute: Cast Iron ASTM A48 - Class 30
b. Case Wear ring: Tin Bronze ASTM B584-90500
c. Impeller: Stainless Steel 304 (UNS S30400)
d. Shaft: Cold Roll Steel AISI 1024 or Stainless Steel AISI 416 e. Shaft Sleeve: Bronze III932 C89835
f. Mechanical Seals: Carbon – Ceramic with Buna Elastomers and Stainless Steel hardware
C. Pump rotation shall be clockwise as viewed from the motor end.

D. Cast iron base with integrally cast drip lip, grouting holes and tapped drain outlet shall be provided E. Pump shall be of a maintainable design for ease of maintenance and should use machine fit parts that are easily disassembled.

F. Each pump shall be painted with one coat of high quality factory approved paint and name-plated before shipment from the factory.

G. Where noted on schedule the pump shall also be NSF-61 certified.

H. Pumps shall be manufactured and assembled in an ISO-9001 certified facility.

2.03 MOTORS
A. Motors shall meet scheduled horsepower, speed, voltage, and enclosure design. Pump and motors shall be factory assembled.

B. Motors shall be suitably sized per ISO5199 and shall meet NEMA specifications and conform to the standards outlined in EISA 2007.

2.04 INSTALLATION
A. The pump shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations and according to the standards of the Hydraulics Institute.

CLOSE COUPLED END SUCTION PUMP 46 0601-3

2.05 TESTING
A. Where noted on schedule, pumping equipment may require one or more of the following:

1. Certified Performance test

2. Hydro static test

3. NPSH Test

4. Any other factory test as noted in the pump Schedule B. The testing shall be in accordance with Hydraulic Institute level B or the latest HI standard as noted in the pump schedule.

2.06 WARRANTY
A. The warranty period shall be a non-prorated period of 12 months from date of installation, not to exceed 18 months from date of manufacturer. Warranty shall cover against defective material and/or faulty workmanship.

2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. EBARA, Model 3U
B. Or Engineer Approved Equal
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION 46 0601
GAC FILTRATION MEDIA 46 1300-1
SECTION 46 1300 - GAC FILTRATION MEDIA
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the GAC media per the manufacturer’s requirements for all four filter vessels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. GAC Media

1. Clean coconut shell-based GAC media from Carbon Activated in Compton California, COC-AL60, 12x30 Mesh.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION AND START-UP SERVICES
A. The responsible party for installation of the pressure vessel systems and site services has been defined below:

1. Site Preparation (CONTRACTOR)

2. Foundation Design (ENGINEER)

3. Foundation Installation (CONTRACTOR)

4. Receipt and Off-Loading of Pressure Vessel System Equipment (CONTRACTOR)

5. Installation of Pressure Vessel System (CONTRACTOR)

6. Connection of the Pressure Instruments to Control and Alarm Systems (CONTRACTOR).

7. Provision of a Means to Keep the Vessel Flooded in All Operating Modes (CONTRACTOR).

8. System Connection to Existing Infrastructure (CONTRACTOR)

9. System Disinfection Prior to Initial Fill of Media (CONTRACTOR)

10. Utilities for Bulk Loading of Media (Compressed Air, Clean Water Source, Backwash Water Disposal). (OWNER Provided / CONTRACTOR Purchased)

11. Operation of the System During Initial Media Fill. (CONTRACTOR)

12. Mechanical Startup of the System (CONTRACTOR under OWNER Supervision).

13. Painting: Field touchup painting shall be performed for any surfaces damaged during shipping. Touchup painting shall blend with factory paint and shall be applied as recommended by the MANUFACTURER/VENDOR
END OF SECTION 46 1300
COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 46 5110-1
SECTION 46 5110 - COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the requirements for the design, fabrication, shipment installation oversight, commissioning, startup, performance testing, and acceptance of the complete compressed air systems including piping, equipment, and related accessories, for general building, compressed air systems operating at 200 psig and below.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Reference Specifications: All work provided under this Section shall be in accordance with the following:

1. Section 01 1100 – Summary of Work

2. Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures

3. Section 01 4500 – Quality Control

4. Section 01 7823 – Operating and Maintenance Data

5. Section 46 0000 – Water and Wastewater Equipment

6. Section 46 0548 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for Water and Wastewater Equipment B. Reference Standards:

1. ASME PTC-13

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:
a. Section A36: Carbon Structural Steel
b. Section A48: Gray Iron Casting
c. Section A53: Hot Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded Steel Pipe d. Section A123: Hot Dipped Galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel Products e. Section A240: Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for General Applications f. Section A270: Stainless Steel Tubing
g. Section A276: Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
h. Section A322: Carbon and Alloy Steel Bar
i. Section A325: High-Strength Bolts/Fasteners
j. Section A500: Structural Tubing
k. Section A778: Stainless Steel Tubular Products

3. Section F593/594: Stainless Steel Bolts/Fasteners

4. AFBMA/ABMA

5. AGMA

6. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Publications

7. American Welding Society (AWS) Publications (D1.1)

8. ANSI/AWWA

9. NEC, NEMA

10. SSPC

11. UL, UL 508, UL 508A

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The manufacturer shall submit shop drawings for review and approval as specified in this section.

All drawings shall be submitted electronically. Electronic files shall be in pdf format. Equipment dimensional and equipment arrangement drawings shall be provided in both pdf and CAD formats, if possible. The manufacturer shall submit the following information:

1. Schematic Drawings:
a. Schematic Drawings, including process flow diagrams and P&IDs for the Equipment. b. Electrical schematic diagrams including motors and other electrical load information and identification of external wiring (panel) connections for coordination with the COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 46 5110-2
General Contractor-supplied equipment. This includes machine wiring diagrams, conduit plans, etc.

2. Unit Fabrication and Assembly/ Installation Arrangement Drawings: The manufacturer shall coordinate production and submit each of the following Installation Arrangement drawings for approval:
a. Provide plan, sections as required, details and isometric views of the Equipment System. Provide double-line, scaled drawings showing all equipment supports, connections, fittings, valves, and instruments and appurtenances. b. Clearly identify the termination points and physical location for process and electrical connections where interfacing of the supplied equipment and equipment to be installed by the General Contractor will be required.

3. Test Reports:
a. Procedures of the testing, including a description of the testing methods shall be submitted for approval.
b. Finalized Certified Shop Testing Report shall be submitted once equipment has been certified completely and successfully operational. Report shall be submitted a minimum of 30 days prior to equipment shipping. Finalized Certified Shop Testing Report shall demonstrate complete proper operational control and functioning of the equipment system in a “dry” setting. Includes testing of all mechanical, electric, and safety equipment components. The report shall be signed by an authorized person for the manufacturer, and include witness signatures. The finalized report shall also indicate that the equipment meets all design requirements of this specification.

4. Bill of Materials:
a. Include manufacturer’s literature, illustrations, specifications, weights, dimensions, materials, sizes, engineering data and performance data for component equipment of standard design including the auxiliary components/electrical equipment, and instrumentation, etc.

5. Design Calculations: include calculations for equipment supports as required herein:
a. Structural design calculations for mounting and anchoring of fabricated assemblies, signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer (civil/structural) currently licensed in the same state as the final installation. Calculations shall include seismic considerations for the location of installation.

7. Information as specifically requested by the Engineer or Owner in support of this project.

Include information/submittals for special tools or lifting equipment as required.

8. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
a. Prior to the delivery of the equipment, the manufacturer shall develop and submit an O&M Manual, complete with a Bill of Materials for the contents of all shipments. This list shall detail contents, size, weights and tag numbers of each item shipped. b. Storage and Handling Instructions:
1) The manufacturer shall provide specific shipping, receiving, storage and handling instructions for all equipment, including each loose-shipped item of equipment, instrumentation, materials and crates.
c. O&M Manual shall also include (at a minimum)
1) Manufacturer Contact Info.
2) Individual Equipment Component Contact Info
3) Lesson Plans for Training of the Facility’s O&M Staff. 4) Equipment Performance Info.
5) Typical Operation and Maintenance Information.
6) Emergency Operation and Troubleshooting Guides.
7) Adjustment and Alignment Instructions.
8) Equipment Specifics and Model/Type/Product Info for Each Supplied Equipment Item.
9) Lubrication Schedules and Procedures.
10) Connection Diagrams and Layout Drawings.

COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 46 5110-3
11) Electrical Power and Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams and Schematics. 12) Electrical Control Logic – Program to Be Provided for HMIs and the Control Panels PLCs.
13) Control Panel Screen Shots
d. Manufacturer’s References

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The supplier shall be regularly engaged in the business of designing and manufacturing compressed air systems for a period in excess of ten (10) years.

B. Statement of Source / Assembling Factory Quality Control Protocol. Equipment units shall be fully assembled and factory/shop tested prior to shipment.

C. If a proprietary or otherwise US Patented component is proposed by the manufacturer, the manufacturer shall indicate such in their proposal and shall include all costs for licensing and/or usage fees required by the patented holder within the proposal. The manufacturer shall further indemnify and warrant to the Contractor and Owner that no patent violations exist. If a patent violation claim is made due to the scope of supply for this project, the manufacturer shall be fully responsible for all costs associated with the amicable settlement of such dispute.

D. Must have a company-owned service and parts facility within the continental United States.

E. Workmanship and Design: All parts of the equipment shall be amply proportioned for long, continuous, uninterrupted service. Provision shall be made for easy access for service or replacement of parts. Corresponding parts of multiple units shall be interchangeable. Workmanship shall be first class, with all welding in accordance with the latest applicable code of the American Welding Society. The maximum allowable stresses on structural steel members shall not exceed those permitted by the latest AISC specifications for applicable design, at twice the maximum continuous running torque.

1.05 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide all spare parts anticipated to be required for the first 2 years of operation. manufacturer shall clearly define quantity, description of part and associated part numbers as part of manufacturer’s scope of supply.

B. Spare parts shall be placed in a separate container clearly marked as “Spare Parts.” All parts shall be identified and clearly labeled with applicable part numbers.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Contractor shall unload, store, and handle the equipment per the manufacturer’s instructions.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. Warranty shall extend for 24 months after start-up or 30 months after delivery, whichever comes first.

B. Warranty shall include all parts, shipping and labor for repairing or replacing equipment that fails during the warranty period. Defects occurring within the warranty period shall be repaired or replaced by the manufacturer at no cost to the OWNER.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Deliver blower equipment as fully assembled or partially assembled as practical to minimize field assembly. Contractor shall be responsible for unloading and any necessary field assembly.

Contractor shall contact manufacturer for blower equipment field assembly requirements during bid.

COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 46 5110-4

1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate work with restrictions as specified.

1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Special Tools: Provide standard manufacturer supplied toolbox with all tools needed to assemble and disassemble the blower equipment.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. General:

1. The proposed system shall be capable of discharging a variable amount of air flow at the operating pressures and inlet air conditions specified herein. The compressor performance curves shall provide graphed ACFM values “standardized” to SCFM, accounting for the air density under actual site altitude (ambient pressure), and the specified temperatures and relative humidity (R.H.) listed for each of the design points. Standard conditions shall be represented by: 68.0 F (20°C), 65% R.H., 14.696 psia (101.3254 kPa).

2. The minimum and maximum operating flow range shall be provided for each compressor with its corresponding discharge pressure. Each compressor shall be capable of operating continuously and satisfactorily at any point between its flow range and pressure conditions without any surge, vibration, or excessive heating of any bearings or the motor.

3. Allowable Blower Tolerances (%):
a. Flow (SCFM): 1%
b. Pressure (PSI): 0.5%
c. Power (kW): 2%

4. Nameplates stating the name of the manufacturer, the motor model number, the motor serial number, the rated horsepower, capacity, speed, voltage, amps, rated service factor, and other pertinent data, shall be attached to the motor. Motor nameplate is not required if motor is assembled as part of the blower package, and manufacturer’s information on the motor is included with the blower nameplate.

5. The package must meet the quality and safety standards set forth by the Underwriters Laboratory for the proposed machinery. The compressor system shall be UL certified.

B. Service Conditions

1. The site conditions are expected to be as follows:
a. Project Location: City of Seal, CA
b. Treatment Facility Average Day Design Flow: 2.0 MGD; Max Day Flow: 5.0 MGD c. Installation Type: Potable Water Treatment
d. Treatment Process: Biological Activated Carbon
e. Number of Treatment Vessels: Six (6); Four (4) Proposed with Two (2) Future f. Installation Exposure: Indoor
g. Site Ambient Air Temperatures: 32°F to 95°F
h. Relative Humidity: 30 to 95%, Non-Condensing
i. Altitude: 21 Feet above Mean Sea Level
C. Vessel GAC Regeneration and Air Scour Description

1. Aeration Blowers: Forced-air regeneration was more effective and predictable at regenerating media than natural ventilation and required less downtime to perform. For this reason, as part of the treatment system design, compressed air will be implemented into the process. The air compressors will be used to force air into the media vessels after media exhaustion to regenerate and scour the media. The compressed air system shall use internal control devices (VFD, etc.) to speed up or slow down the individual motors based on the input received from operator inputs.

COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 46 5110-5

2. Process Design Requirements:
a. The Compressed Air System(s) shall be required to meet the following Guaranteed Performance Point(s).

Performance Conditions for Each Compressed Air System
Parameter Value
Air Flow (SCFM) 32.5
Discharge Pressure (PSIG) 125
Motor Horsepower 7.5
Voltage 480VAC

2.02 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM PACKAGE
A. Rotary Screw Air Compressors, General

1. Provide factory-assembled and tested, packaged, air-cooled, continuous duty, rotary-type, motor-driven air compressors as indicated, of capacities and having electrical characteristics indicated, and with the following features:
a. Panels: Freestanding single- or 2-compartment electrical control panels of appropriate NEMA types, and power characteristics indicated. Mount devices on front of panel, or extend devices through panel openings, including circuit breaker operators, selector switches, and gauges. Identify each switch, control relay, circuit breaker and other components, inside or outside panel with 2-1/2-inch by 4-inch engraved, plastic-laminate signs as specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." b. Starters: Magnetic, across-the-line type starters for each compressor motor, with 3-coil overload protection, undervoltage releases, and Hand-Off-Automatic selector switch.

Protect each starter with air circuit breaker.
c. Air Compressor Controls: Automatic compressor control station with load control and protection functions; provide dual voltage type. Electrically separate lower voltage control and protection circuits from higher voltage motor contactors. Equip with lamps to indicate safe operating conditions and alarm situations. Provide with circuit breakers, ammeters, and hour meters.
d. Provide automatic alternators to switch lead compressor at each start, for duplex air compressor units.

B. Small Capacity Rotary Air Compressors

1. General: Provide units with inlet silencer filters, safety valves, discharge pressure gauges, pressure regulators, tank mounted, air dryer, automatic drains and shutoff valve.

2. Tank-Mounted, Lubricated, Air Compressors.

3. Aftercoolers
a. Aftercoolers, Air Cooled: Tubular, rated at 250 psig and leak-tested at 350-psig minimum air pressure, in capacities indicated. Size units to cool compressed air in compressor-rated capacities to 10 deg F above summertime maximum ambient temperature.

4. Accessories
a. General: Provide accessories having working pressure rating not less than system pressure at location where used, and compatible with equipment and piping system used.
b. Intercoolers: Air-cooled, fixed-bundle, tubular intercoolers, rated at 250 psig and leak-tested at 350-psig minimum air pressure, in capacities indicated. Size units to cool compressed air in compressor-rated capacities to 10 deg F above summertime maximum ambient temperature.
c. Separators: Conical shaped, centrifugal air-line separators in sizes and capacities indicated. Equip with water-removal trap and drain. Size units for maximum pressure drop through units of 3 psig from air inlet to outlet.

COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 46 5110-6
d. Receivers: ASME stamped, cylindrical, vertical or horizontal installation as indicated, galvanized steel; with safety valves in sizes, working pressures and temperatures indicated, and with drain connection.
e. Pressure rating: Not less than maximum discharge pressure. f. Safety Valves: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Pressure Vessels construction, National Board certified, labeled, and factory-sealed; constructed of bronze body with poppet safety valve for compressed air service. g. Pressure Settings: Higher than discharge pressure and same or lower than receiver pressure rating.
h. Air-Line Lubricators: Sizes and capacities indicated; equip with drip chamber and sight dome for observing oil drop entering air stream; with oil feed adjustment screw, and quick-release collar for easy bowl removal.
i. Provide with automatic feed device for supplying oil to lubricator. j. Filters: Two-stage, mechanical-separation type, air-line filters in sizes and ratings indicated. Equip with deflector plates; resin-impregnated-ribbon type filters with edge filtration, 40-micron (0.0015-inch) thick; and drain cock. k. Coalescing Filters: Capacities and types indicated. Equip with activated carbon capable of removing water and oil aerosols, with color change dye to indicate when carbon is saturated, and with warning light to indicate when selected maximum pressure drop has been exceeded.
l. Automatic Drain Valves: Corrosion-resistant metal body and internal parts, rated for 200-psig minimum working pressure, capable of automatic discharge of collected condensate.
m. Hose, Clamps, and Couplings: Provide compatible hose, hose clamps, and hose couplings, suitable for compressed air service, of nominal diameter, and rated for 300-psig minimum working pressure except where otherwise indicated. n. Quick Connect/Disconnect Hose Couplings: One-way, automatic shutoff, brass body, with O-ring or gasket seal, and stainless steel or nickel-plated steel operating parts.

Select socket end with threaded inlet that is considered the fixed end and has a one-way valve.
1) Plug End: Flow-sensor bleeder, check-valve type, with serrated outlet for hose. 2) Plug End: Straight-through type, with serrated outlet for hose. 3) Hose Coupling: Two-piece, threaded, brass or stainless steel, O-ring or gasket seal, swivel coupling, with serrated ends, 300-psig minimum working pressure. 4) Hose Adapter: One-piece, brass or stainless-steel fitting, with serrated ends. 5) Hose: Reinforced, single- or double-braid, neoprene-covered hose, for compressed air service.
6) Hose Clamps: Stainless steel, clamps, bands, or wire.

C. Equipment Installation

1. Install air compressors, intercoolers, aftercoolers, air receiver tanks, and dryers on concrete bases. Set and connect units in accordance with manufacturers' written installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored, in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturers' recommended clearances. Orient so equipment controls and devices needing servicing are accessible.

D. Piping Applications

1. Low-Pressure Systems: Use the following pipe and fittings:

2. 2 Inches: Black steel pipe with threaded, malleable-iron fittings; threaded joints.

3. 1-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Galvanized steel pipe with galvanized, threaded, malleable-iron fittings; threaded joints.

COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 46 5110-7
E. Joint Construction

1. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads in accordance with ASME B1.20.1.

Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint lubricant or sealant, suitable for the service for which the pipe is intended, on the male threads at each joint. Tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.

2. Welded Joints: Weld pipe joints in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.9 Building Service Piping for low-pressure systems and B31.1 Power Piping for mediumpressure systems.

3. Brazed and Soldered Joints: For copper tube and fittings, braze and solder joints in accordance with ASME B31 - Standard Code for Pressure Piping. a. Braze joints in accordance with ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. b. Solder joints in accordance with ASME B31.9 - Building Service Piping. c. Thoroughly clean tube surface and inside surface of the cup of the fittings, using very fine emery cloth, prior to making soldered or brazed joints. Wipe tube and fittings clean and apply flux. Flux shall not be used as the sole means for cleaning tube and fitting surfaces.

F. Piping Installation, General

1. Install air and drain piping with 1/8-inch-per-foot slope downward in direction of air flow.

2. Install eccentric reducers where pipe is reduced in size in the direction of flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer flush.

3. Connect branch air piping to mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main, each branch, and each low point in piping system.

4. Install piping specialties in accordance with Section 40 0510 – Common Work Results for Process Piping.

5. Install valves in accordance with Section 40 0551 – Common Requirements for Process Valves.

G. Connections

1. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow servicing and maintenance.

2. Connect air piping to equipment with unions, and with shutoff valves and strainers when indicated.

3. Install pressure gauges on compressor discharge piping, on receiver tanks, and where indicated.

4. Connect water piping to intercooler and aftercooler units with union and reduced-pressurezone-type backflow-preventer assembly having strainer, gate valves, and air gap fitting for indirect waste. Connect cooler unit drains with union and flow control valve, and discharge over closest floor drain.

5. Where water piping connections are dissimilar metals, make connections with dielectric fittings or dielectric unions.

6. Install safety valves in receiver tanks, in quantity and size to relieve capacity not less than that of connected compressor.

7. Install automatic drain valves on intercoolers, aftercoolers, separators, receivers, dryers, and other locations indicated. Discharge condensate over nearest floor drain.

8. Install accessories as indicated.

H. Vibration: Each compressor shall be provided with vibration isolators designed to minimize vibration of the enclosure. Vibration monitoring systems shall be provided. Vibration isolators shall be of the standard type provided by the manufacturer.

I. Nameplate(s) stating the name of the manufacturer, blower/blower package model number, blower/blower package serial number, the rated capacity, speed, motor data, and other pertinent data, shall be attached to each blower/blower package.

COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 46 5110-8
J. The packaged blower equipment shall include the following, as required by the manufacturer:

1. Pressure Reducing Valve

2. Blow Off Valve
K. Other Required Appurtenances Not ListedHarmonic Filter: Each Blower VFD shall be supplied with a Mirus, Arteche, TCI, or equal harmonic filter to meet IEEE 519 total harmonic distortion.

L. Pipe and Tube Materials

1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Electric-Resistance Welded or Type S, Seamless, Grade B, Schedule 40, black or hot-dipped, zinc-coated with prime and epoxy coated.

M. Pipe and Tube Fittings with Prime and Epoxy Coated

1. Malleable-Iron Pipe Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, threaded, plain or galvanized.

2. Malleable-Iron Pipe Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, threaded.

3. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125 and Class 250.

4. Wrought-Steel Pipe Fittings: ASME B16.9, Schedule 40, buttwelding.

5. Forged-Steel Pipe Fittings: ASME B16.11, socket type.

6. Grooved-End, Mechanical Pipe Fittings: ASTM A47, malleable-iron; ASTM A106, steel; or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron; galvanized fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved-end couplings.

7. Bronze Tube Flanges: ASME B16.24, Classes 150 and 300.

8. Valves: Gate, ball, and check valves are specified in Section 40 0551 – Common Requirements for Process Valves.

N. Joining Materials

1. Gasket Material: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free composition.

2. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved-End Steel Pipe: Ductile-iron or malleable-iron housing, synthetic rubber gasket with central cavity pressure-responsive design; with bolts, nuts, locking pin or toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

3. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B32, Alloy Sb5 (95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony), with

0.20 percent maximum lead content.

2.03 CONTROL SYSTEM
A. General: Each package shall be supplied with an on-board controller and color touch-screen interface or HMI capable of running the unit independent of a master PLC controller. The on-board controller shall be supplied with the ability to communicate with the new PLC via Allen Bradley Ethernet IP communication protocol. At a minimum, Communications shall include all status and control information shown on the P&IDs.

B. The Compressed Air System Controlsshall include built in flow measurement, speed measurement, air inlet and outlet measurements, vibration measurement, motor temperatures, and air inlet and outlet pressure sensors with associated data display and adjustment capability. Air flow may be measured by a separate air flow meter, if required.

C. Variable speed operation shall be provided on each blower and shall be capable of modulation based on inlet 4-20 mA, or Ethernet inputs provided by others.

2.04 ANCHOR BOLTS AND ATTACHMENT HARDWARE
A. All required anchor bolts and attachment hardware to anchor each of the blower equipment shall be sized by the manufacturer.

B. Seismic calculations shall be provided by the manufacturer as discussed in Section 46 0548 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for Water and Wastewater Equipment.

2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Kaeser
B. Or Engineer Approved Equal
COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 46 5110-9
PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 FIELD / SITE TESTING
A. Field / Site Tests shall include performance and vibration testing as approved by the Engineer. The field tests shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of and as directed by the Manufacturer’s Representative. The field tests shall demonstrate under all conditions of operation that each unit met the following:

1. Has not been damaged by transportation or installation.

2. Has been properly installed.

3. Has no mechanical defect.

4. Is in proper alignment.

5. Has been properly connected.

6. Is free of overheating of any parts.

7. The as installed equipment meets the maximum vibration limits specified.

8. The as installed units do not exceed the maximum noise levels specified.

9. Is free of overloading of any parts.

10. Shall operate correctly and as specified with the control system.

11. Meets the power draw, air flow and pressure performance requirements for the project.

B. Any defects in the equipment or failure to meet the requirements of the Specifications shall be promptly corrected by the manufacturer.

C. After the installation of the units and all appurtenances, each unit shall be subjected to a field running test under actual operating conditions for 14 calendar days. The manufacturer shall be responsible for the cost to certify 14-day field test (such as measurement devices, labor, etc.). If the measurement equipment (or self-contained monitoring on the package unit) is provided with sufficient automatic data logging to accomplish the “Demonstration” required by the specification, then the manufacturer will not be required to be present for the entire testing period. The OWNER will not provide labor to monitor or log data on behalf of the manufacturer for the testing. The OWNER may, at its discretion, provide parallel monitoring of power as indicated in the specification.

D. The manufacturer shall provide the OWNER with a performance guarantee for a minimum of 2 years in the form of a Performance Bond. In the event that the supplied equipment does not meet the performance stated in the manufacturer’s proposal, the manufacturer shall pay to the OWNER, as penalty, 100% of the project equipment cost as provided under the Agreement.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. A General Contractor will install the equipment system under direction and guidance from the manufacturer. The General Contractor will be selected as part of a design/bid/build contract with the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall provide all hardware and accessories required for installation.

3.03 EQUIPMENT STARTUP AND TESTING
A. Perform start-up and functional testing, with all units operating in AUTO mode. The Contractor shall complete all electrical/instrumentation and loop testing prior to functional performance testing.

B. Provide Major Certificate of Proper Installation.

C. Witnessing: All field testing shall be witnessed by the OWNER.

D. A representative of the manufacturer shall be provided for the following:

1. To inspect the equipment and installation

2. To make any field adjustments to ensure proper equipment operation

3. To furnish affidavit stating that the blowers systems have been tested and are ready for operation as specified.

4. To inspect start-up
COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 46 5110-10
E. The manufacturer shall inspect system before initial start-up and certify that system has been correctly installed and prepared for start-up.

F. Training:

1. Provide operator training for at least 2 days on-site by EM factory trained representative. Operator training to include:
a. Operations and inspection training
b. Safety instructions
c. Preventative maintenance instructions
d. Calibration and other pertinent services

2. Training shall include a minimum of 2-hours of “classroom” setting training and 4-hours of field / “hands-on” training. Acceptable O&M Manuals shall be on-site during the O&M training session. The lesson plan may also be video recorded by the Owner.

END OF SECTION 46 5110

APPENDIX A

GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION
475 Goddard, Suite 200 | Irvine, California 92618 | p. 949.753.7070 | www.ninyoandmoore.com June 9, 2021
Project No. 207462002
Mr. Duncan Lee
Pacific Advanced Civil Engineering
17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200
Fountain Valley, California 92708
Subject: Geotechnical Seismicity and Foundation Update
Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions
Seal Beach, California
Dear Mr. Lee:

In accordance with our proposal dated January 29, 2021 (Ninyo & Moore, 2021), we have prepared this letter to provide additional geotechnical design recommendations in support of the Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions project located in the city of Seal Beach, California. We previously provided a geotechnical evaluation report dated September 19, 2008 (Ninyo & Moore, 2008). We understand that four new water tanks will be added at the well site on the west side of the existing well building. The new tanks will be approximately 12 feet in diameter and 20 feet high. Each tank will be supported on four legs that will be approximately 4 feet tall. The total height of the tanks and legs will be approximately 24 feet above the ground surface. The foundation support of the four tanks will be in the form of a single mat to be placed in a north-south alignment.

Our previous geotechnical evaluation presented our design recommendations based on the 2007 California Building Code (CBC) that was applicable at the time. At present, the relevant building code is the 2019 CBC. The 2019 CBC follows the guidelines presented in the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Publication 7-16 (2016) for the Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures.

The purpose of this study is to provide updated geotechnical seismic design parameters in accordance with the 2019 CBC and ASCE 7-16 guidelines and provide updated geotechnical recommendations for the proposed mat foundation supporting the tanks. We have utilized the existing geotechnical data from our prior subsurface exploration at the site.

SCOPE OF SERVICES
In accordance with our referenced proposal, we performed the following services:
 Reviewed our previous geotechnical report.

Ninyo & Moore | Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions, Seal Beach, California | 207462002 | June 9, 2021 2  Updated our seismicity evaluation including development of design acceleration response spectrum and seismic design parameters in accordance with the 2019 CBC and ASCE 7-16. o Developed the Risk-Targeted Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCER) response spectrum in accordance with Chapter 11 of ASCE 7-16.
o Developed site-specific response spectrum and acceleration parameters in accordance with Chapter 21 of ASCE 7-16.
 Developed geotechnical design recommendations for the new mat foundation.  Prepared this letter report presenting the updated seismic design criteria and mat foundation design recommendations.

Site-Specific Seismic Ground Motion
Considering the proximity of the site to active faults capable of producing a maximum moment magnitude of 6.0 or more, the project area has a high potential for experiencing strong ground motion. The 2019 California Building Code (CBC) specifies that the risk-targeted maximum considered earthquake (MCER) ground motion response accelerations be used to evaluate seismic loads for design of buildings and other structures. The 2019 CBC mandates that a site-specific ground motion hazard analysis shall be performed for structures on Site Class D with a mapped MCER, 5 percent damped, spectral response acceleration parameter at a period of 1 second (S1) greater than or equal to 0.2g in accordance with Sections 21.2 and 21.3 of the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Publication 7-16 (2016) for the Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Building and Other Structures. We calculated that the S1 for the site is equal to 0.527g using the 2021 Applied Technology Council (ATC) seismic design tool (web-based); therefore, a sitespecific ground motion hazard analysis was performed for the project area.

The site-specific ground motion hazard analysis consisted of the review of available seismologic information for nearby faults and performance of probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA) and deterministic seismic hazard analysis (DSHA) to develop acceleration response spectrum (ARS) curves corresponding to the MCER for 5 percent damping. Prior to the site-specific ground motion hazard analysis, we obtained the mapped seismic ground motion values and developed the general MCER response spectrum for 5 percent damping in accordance with Section 11.4 of ASCE 7-16 (ATC, 2021). The average shear wave velocity (VS) for the upper 30 meters of soil (VS30) is assumed to be 228 meters per second (m/s) (California Geological Survey [CGS]/Wills et al., 2017) and the depths to VS = 1,000 m/s and VS = 2,500 m/s are assumed to be 700 meters and 4,050 meters, respectively (Southern California Earthquake Center [SCEC] Community Velocity Model Version 4 Basin Depth).

The 2014 new generation attenuation (NGA) West-2 relationships were used to evaluate the sitespecific ground motions. The NGA relationships that we used for developing the probabilistic and Ninyo & Moore | Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions, Seal Beach, California | 207462002 | June 9, 2021 3 deterministic response spectra are by Chiou and Youngs (2014), Campbell and Bozorgnia (2014), Boore, Stewart, Seyhan, and Atkinson (2014), and Abrahamson, Silva, and Kamai (2014). The Open Seismic Hazard Analysis software developed by USGS (USGS, 2020) was used for performing the PSHA. The Calculation of Weighted Average 2014 NGA Models spreadsheet by the Pacific Earthquake Engineering Research Center (PEER) was used for performing the DSHA (Seyhan, 2014).

PSHA was performed for earthquake hazards having a 2 percent chance of being exceeded in 50 years multiplied by the risk coefficients per ASCE 7-16. The maximum rotated components of ground motions were considered in PSHA with 5 percent damping. For the DSHA, we analyzed accelerations from characteristic earthquakes on active faults within the region using the hazard curves and deaggregation plots at the site obtained from the USGS Unified Hazard Tool application (USGS, 2021). A magnitude 7.3 event on the Compton fault with a rupture distance of 8.0 kilometers from the site was evaluated to be the controlling earthquake. Hence, the deterministic seismic hazard analysis was performed for the site using this event and corrections were made to the spectral accelerations for the 84th percentile of the maximum rotated component of ground motion with 5 percent damping.

The site-specific MCER response spectrum was taken as the lesser of the spectral response acceleration at any period from the PSHA and DSHA, and the site-specific general response spectrum was evaluated by taking two-thirds of the MCER response spectrum with some conditions in accordance with Section 21.3 of ASCE 7-16. Figure 1 presents the site-specific MCER response spectrum and the site-specific design response spectrum. The general mapped design response spectrum calculated in accordance with Section 11.4 of ASCE 7-16 is also presented on Figure 1 for comparison. The site-specific spectral response acceleration parameters, consistent with the 2019 CBC, are provided in Table 1 for the evaluation of seismic loads on buildings and other structures.

The site-specific maximum considered earthquake geometric mean (MCEG) peak ground acceleration, PGAM, was calculated as 0.691g.

Site-Specific Seismic Design Considerations
Design of the proposed improvements should be performed in accordance with the requirements of governing jurisdictions and applicable building codes. Table 1 presents the site-specific spectral response acceleration parameters in accordance with the CBC (2019) guidelines.

Ninyo & Moore | Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions, Seal Beach, California | 207462002 | June 9, 2021 4 Table 1 – 2019 California Building Code Seismic Design Criteria Site Coefficients and Spectral Response Acceleration Parameters Values Site Class D
Mapped Spectral Response Acceleration at 0.2-second Period, Ss 1.475g Mapped Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-second Period, S1 0.527g Site-Specific Spectral Response Acceleration at 0.2-second Period, SMS 1.651g Site-Specific Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-second Period, SM1 1.867g Site-Specific Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 0.2-second Period, SDS 1.101g Site-Specific Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-second Period, SD1 1.245g Site-Specific Maximum Considered Earthquake Geometric Mean (MCEG) Peak Ground Acceleration, PGAM

0.691g

UPDATED RECOMMENDATIONS
In general, the remedial grading and other earthwork recommendations provided in our referenced report dated September 19, 2008, remain applicable to the current project. Updated mat foundation design recommendations are provided below.

Mat Foundations
We anticipate that the new tanks will be supported on a mat foundation bearing on a crushed rock/lean concrete base placed over the existing fill. The exposed subgrade should be scarified to a depth of approximately 8 inches, moisture-conditioned to slightly above the optimum moisture content, and compacted to a relative compaction of 90 percent as evaluated by ASTM D 1557.

Additionally, any loose, soft, or deleterious materials exposed at the planned foundation grade should be overexcavated and recompacted to a relative compaction of 90 percent. Excavations close to or below the groundwater table may encounter wet and/or loose/soft ground conditions. Therefore, moisture-conditioning may include aeration of the soils to reduce the moisture content to near optimum. In addition, wet soils may be subject to pumping under heavy equipment loads. If pumping soils are encountered, a 2-foot-thick layer of crushed rock can be placed to mitigate the pumping soils.

The proposed mat foundation may be designed using a net allowable bearing capacity of 1,000 pounds per square foot (psf) bearing on a crushed rock/lean concrete base layer underlain by competent subgrade. The allowable bearing capacity may be increased by one-third when considering loads of short duration, such as wind or seismic forces. The total and differential settlements corresponding to this allowable bearing load are estimated to be on the order of 1 inch and ½ inch over a horizontal span of 40 feet, respectively. Mat foundations typically experience some deflection due to loads placed on the mat and the reaction of the soils directly underlying the mat. A design modulus of subgrade reaction (K) of 70 tons per cubic foot may be used for the subgrade soils in evaluating such deflections.

Ninyo & Moore | Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions, Seal Beach, California | 207462002 | June 9, 2021 5 Foundations bearing on competent subgrade may be designed using a coefficient of friction of 0.30, where the total frictional resistance equals the coefficient of friction times the dead load. Foundations may be designed using a passive resistance value of 300 psf per foot of depth, up to a value of 3,000 psf. The allowable lateral resistance can be taken as the sum of the frictional resistance and passive resistance provided the passive resistance does not exceed one-half of the total allowable resistance. The passive resistance may be increased by one-third when considering loads of short duration such as wind or seismic forces.

Corrosivity
The results of our limited corrosivity testing performed in 2008 indicated an electrical resistivity of approximately 150 ohm-centimeters, soil pH of approximately 8.1, chloride content of approximately 315 parts per million [ppm], and sulfate content of approximately 0.21 percent by weight (i.e. 2,100 ppm). Based on the laboratory test results and Caltrans (2018) corrosion criteria, the project site can be classified as a corrosive site. Caltrans currently considers a site to be corrosive to foundation elements if the minimum resistivity is less than or equal to 1,100 ohm-cm and one or more of the following conditions exist: chloride concentration is greater than or equal to 500 ppm, sulfate concentration is greater than or equal to 1,500 ppm, or the pH is 5.5 or less.

Concrete Placement
Concrete in contact with soil or water that contains high concentrations of water-soluble sulfates can be subject to premature chemical and/or physical deterioration. Based on the CBC (2019), the potential for sulfate attack is negligible for water-soluble sulfate contents in soil ranging from 0.00 to

0.10 percent by weight, moderate for water-soluble sulfate contents ranging from 0.10 to 0.20 percent by weight, severe for water-soluble sulfate contents ranging from 0.20 to 2.00 percent by weight, and very severe for water-soluble sulfate contents over 2.00 percent by weight. The soil sample previously tested indicated a water-soluble sulfate content of approximately 0.21 percent by weight (i.e., 2,100 ppm). Accordingly, the on-site soils are considered to have a severe potential for sulfate attack. Therefore, we recommend that Type V cement with a water/cement ratio of 0.45 or less be considered for the project.

To reduce the potential for shrinkage cracks in the concrete during curing, we recommend that the concrete for the proposed improvements, if applicable, be placed with a slump of 4 inches based on ASTM C 143. The slump should be checked periodically at the site prior to concrete placement. We further recommend that concrete cover over reinforcing steel for foundations be provided in accordance with CBC (2019). The structural engineer should be consulted for additional concrete specifications.

Ninyo & Moore | Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions, Seal Beach, California | 207462002 | June 9, 2021 6

LIMITATIONS
The geotechnical analyses presented in this letter report have been conducted in general accordance with current practice and the standard of care exercised by geotechnical consultants performing similar tasks in the project area. No warranty, expressed or implied, is made regarding the conclusions, recommendations, and opinions presented in this report. There is no evaluation detailed enough to reveal every subsurface condition. Variations may exist and conditions not observed or described in this report may be encountered during construction. Uncertainties relative to subsurface conditions can be reduced through additional subsurface exploration. Additional subsurface evaluation will be performed upon request.

We appreciate the opportunity to be of continued service on this project.

Respectfully submitted,

NINYO & MOORE
Julianne Padgett, PE
Project Engineer
Michael Putt, PG, CEG
Principal Geologist
Soumitra Guha, PhD, PE, GE
Principal Engineer
JKP/MLP/SG/sc
Attachments: References
Figure 1 – Acceleration Response Spectra
Ninyo & Moore | Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions, Seal Beach, California | 207462002 | June 9, 2021 1

REFERENCES
Abrahamson, N.A., Silva, W.J. and Kamai, R., 2014, Summary of the ASK14 Ground Motion Relation for Active Crustal Regions, Earthquake Spectra: Vol. 30, No. 3, pp. 1025-1055, dated August.

American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), 2016, Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Building and Other Structures, ASCE Standard 7-16.

The Applied Technology Council (ATC), 2021, Hazards by Location, https://hazards.atcouncil.org/#/.

Boore, D.M., Stewart, J.P., Seyhan, E., and Atkinson, G.M., 2014, NGA-West2 Equations for Predicting PGA, PGV, and 5% Damped PSA for Shallow Crustal Earthquakes, Earthquake Spectra, Vol. 30, No. 3, pp. 1057-1085, dated August.

Building Seismic Safety Council, 2009, National Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program (NEHRP) Recommended Seismic Provisions for New Buildings and Other Structures (FEMA P-750).

California Building Standards Commission, 2019, California Building Code: California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, Volumes 1 and 2, based on the 2018 International Building Code.

California Department of Transportation, 2018, Corrosion Guidelines, Version 3.0, Division of Engineering Services, Materials Engineering and Testing Services, Corrosion Technology Branch, dated March.

California Geological Survey (CGS), 2008, Guidelines for Evaluating and Mitigating Seismic Hazards in California, Special Publication 117A, dated September 11.

California Geological Survey, C.J. Wills, C.I. Gutierrez, F.G. Perez, and D.B. Branum, 2017, CGS Map Sheet 48: Shear-wave Velocity in Upper 30m of Surficial Geology (Vs30); https://maps.conservation.ca.gov/cgs/DataViewer/, dated May 24.

Campbell, K.W., and Bozorgnia, Y., 2014, NGA-West2 Ground Motion Model for the Average Horizontal Components of PGA, PGV, and 5% Damped Linear Acceleration Response Spectra, Earthquake Spectra, Vol. 30, No. 3, pp. 1087-1115, dated August.

Chiou, B. S.-J., and Youngs, R.R., 2014, Update of the Chiou and Youngs NGA Model for the Average Horizontal Component of Peak Ground Motion and Response Spectra, Earthquake Spectra, August 2014, Vol. 30, No. 3, dated August.

Ninyo and Moore, 2008, Geotechnical Evaluation, Lampson Avenue Well, Seal Beach, California, dated September 19.

Ninyo and Moore, 2021, Proposal for Additional Geotechnical Consulting Services, Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions, Seal Beach, California, Proposal No. 207462001, dated January 29.

Seyhan, E, 2014, Weighted Average 2014 NGA West-2 GMPE, Pacific Earthquake Engineering Research Center.

Southern California Earthquake Center, 2009, SCEC Community Velocity Model, Version 4, Iteration 26, Basin Depth.

United States Geological Survey, 2008, National Seismic Hazard Maps - Fault Parameters, https://earthquake.usgs.gov/cfusion/hazfaults_2008_search/query_main.cfm United States Geological Survey and Southern California Earthquake Center, 2020, Open Seismic Hazard Analysis, version 1.5.2, http://www.opensha.org/.

Ninyo & Moore | Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions, Seal Beach, California | 207462002 | June 9, 2021 2 United States Geological Survey, 2021, Unified Hazard Tool; https://earthquake.usgs.gov/hazards/interactive/.

Wills, C.J., and Clahan, L.B., 2006, Developing a Map of Geologically Defined Site-Condition Categories for California, Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America, v. 96, no. 4A, p. 1483–1501.

Wills, C.J., C.I. Gutierrez, F.G. Perez, and D.M. Branum (2015). A next-generation Vs30 map for California based on geology and topography, Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America, 105, no 6, p. 3083-3091.

SDS = gSD1 = g SMS = gSM1 =g g
NOTES:
1 exceedance in 50 years in the maximum direction using the Chiou & Youngs (2014), Campbell & Bozorgnia (2014), Boore et al. (2014), and Abrahamson et al. (2014) attenuation relationships and the risk coefficients.
2 The deterministic ground motion spectral response accelerations are for the 84th percentile of the geometric mean values in the maximum direction using the Chiou & Youngs (2014), Campbell & Bozorgnia (2014), Boore et al. (2014), and Abrahamson et al. (2014) attenuation relationships for deep soil sites considering a Mw 7.3 event on the Compton fault zone located 8.0 kilometers from the site. It conforms with the lower bound limit per ASCE 7-16 Section 21.2.2. 3 The Site-Specific MCER Response Spectrum is the lesser of spectral ordinates of deterministic and probabilistic accelerations at each period per ASCE 7-16 Section

21.2.3. The Site-Specific Design Response Spectrum conforms with lower bound limit per ASCE 7-16 Section 21.3. 4 The Mapped Design MCE Response Spectrum is computed from mapped spectral ordinates modified for Site Class D (stiff soil profile) per ASCE 7-16 Section 11.4.

It is presented for the sake of comparison.

1.101 1.245 1.651 1.867 PGAM = 0.691

0.911

0.622

0.446

0.336

0.174

0.098

1.167

1.412

1.545

1.665

1.785

1.834

SITE-SPECIFIC

MCER RESPONSE

SPECTRUM
Sa (g)

0.690

0.696

0.703

0.782

0.974

1.830

1.623

1.484

1.133
The probabilistic ground motion spectral response accelerations are based on the risk-targeted Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCER) having a 2% probability of

0.010

0.020

0.030

0.050
PERIOD
(seconds)

SITE-SPECIFIC

DESIGN RESPONSE

SPECTRUM
Sa (g)

SITE-SPECIFIC

MCER RESPONSE

SPECTRUM
Sa (g)
PERIOD
(seconds)

SITE-SPECIFIC

DESIGN RESPONSE

SPECTRUM
Sa (g)

0.075

0.100

0.150

0.200

0.460

0.464

0.468

0.521

3.000

0.649

0.778

0.941

1.030

0.500

0.750

1.000

1.500

5.000

0.300

1.220

1.082

0.989

0.755

2.000

4.000

0.607

0.415

0.297

1.190

0.224

7.500 0.116

0.400 1.223

0.250 1.110

10.000 0.066

0.0 0.5

1.0 1.5

2.0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SPECTRAL ACCELERATION, Sa (g)
PERIOD, T (seconds)
Mapped Design MCE Response Spectrum
Site-Specific Design Response Spectrum
Site-Specific MCE Response Spectrum R
R
FIGURE 1

ACCELERATION RESPONSE SPECTRA

LAMPSON AVENUE WELL WATER TANK ADDITIONS

SEAL BEACH, CALIFORNIA
207462002 | 6/21
R

SP-53

APPENDIX C
Geotechnical Report and Update
475 Goddard, Suite 200 | Irvine, California 92618 | p. 949.753.7070 | www.ninyoandmoore.com November 2, 2021
Project No. 207462002
Mr. Duncan Lee
Pacific Advanced Civil Engineering
17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200
Fountain Valley, California 92708
Subject: Geotechnical Seismicity and Foundation Update
Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions
Seal Beach, California
Dear Mr. Lee:

SCOPE OF SERVICES
In accordance with our referenced proposal, we performed the following services:
 Reviewed our previous geotechnical report.

Ninyo & Moore | Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions, Seal Beach, California | 207462002 | November 2, 2021 2  Updated our seismicity evaluation including development of design acceleration response spectrum and seismic design parameters in accordance with the 2019 CBC and ASCE 7-16. o Developed the Risk-Targeted Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCER) response spectrum in accordance with Chapter 11 of ASCE 7-16.
o Developed site-specific response spectrum and acceleration parameters in accordance with Chapter 21 of ASCE 7-16.
 Developed geotechnical design recommendations for the new mat foundation.  Prepared this letter report presenting the updated seismic design criteria and mat foundation design recommendations.

Site-Specific Seismic Ground Motion
Considering the proximity of the site to active faults capable of producing a maximum moment magnitude of 6.0 or more, the project area has a high potential for experiencing strong ground motion. The 2019 CBC specifies that the MCER ground motion response accelerations be used to evaluate seismic loads for design of buildings and other structures. The 2019 CBC mandates that a site-specific ground motion hazard analysis shall be performed for structures on Site Class D with a mapped MCER, 5 percent damped, spectral response acceleration parameter at a period of 1 second (S1) greater than or equal to 0.2g in accordance with Sections 21.2 and 21.3 of the ASCE Publication 7-16 (2016) for the Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Building and Other Structures.

We calculated that the S1 for the site is equal to 0.527g using the 2021 Applied Technology Council (ATC) seismic design tool (web-based); therefore, a site-specific ground motion hazard analysis was performed for the project area.

The site-specific ground motion hazard analysis consisted of the review of available seismologic information for nearby faults and performance of probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA) and deterministic seismic hazard analysis (DSHA) to develop acceleration response spectrum curves corresponding to the MCER for 5 percent damping. Prior to the site-specific ground motion hazard analysis, we obtained the mapped seismic ground motion values and developed the general MCER response spectrum for 5 percent damping in accordance with Section 11.4 of ASCE 7-16 (ATC, 2021). The average shear wave velocity (VS) for the upper 30 meters of soil (VS30) is assumed to be 228 meters per second (m/s) (California Geological Survey [CGS]/Wills et al., 2017) and the depths to VS = 1,000 m/s and VS = 2,500 m/s are assumed to be 700 meters and 4,050 meters, respectively (Southern California Earthquake Center [SCEC] Community Velocity Model Version 4 Basin Depth).

The 2014 new generation attenuation (NGA) West-2 relationships were used to evaluate the sitespecific ground motions. The NGA relationships that we used for developing the probabilistic and deterministic response spectra are by Chiou and Youngs (2014), Campbell and Bozorgnia (2014), Boore, Stewart, Seyhan, and Atkinson (2014), and Abrahamson, Silva, and Kamai (2014). The Open Seismic Hazard Analysis software developed by United States Geological Survey (USGS, 2020) was Ninyo & Moore | Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions, Seal Beach, California | 207462002 | November 2, 2021 3 used for performing the PSHA. The Calculation of Weighted Average 2014 NGA Models spreadsheet by the Pacific Earthquake Engineering Research Center was used for performing the DSHA (Seyhan, 2014).

The site-specific maximum considered earthquake geometric mean (MCEG) peak ground acceleration, PGAM, was calculated as 0.691g.

Table 1 – 2019 California Building Code Seismic Design Criteria Site Coefficients and Spectral Response Acceleration Parameters Values Site Class D
Mapped Spectral Response Acceleration at 0.2-second Period, Ss 1.475g Mapped Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-second Period, S1 0.527g Site-Specific Spectral Response Acceleration at 0.2-second Period, SMS 1.651g Site-Specific Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-second Period, SM1 1.867g Site-Specific Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 0.2-second Period, SDS 1.101g Site-Specific Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-second Period, SD1 1.245g Site-Specific Maximum Considered Earthquake Geometric Mean (MCEG) Peak Ground Acceleration, PGAM

0.691g
Ninyo & Moore | Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions, Seal Beach, California | 207462002 | November 2, 2021 4

Mat Foundations
We anticipate that the new tanks will be supported on a mat foundation bearing on a crushed rock/lean concrete base placed over the existing fill. It is not clear to us whether the mat will be partly embedded into the subgrade or placed at or above the finished surface grade. In either case, the exposed subgrade or surface grade should be scarified to a depth of approximately 8 inches, moisture-conditioned to slightly above the optimum moisture content, and compacted to a relative compaction of 90 percent as evaluated by ASTM International (ASTM) D 1557. Additionally, any loose, soft, or deleterious materials exposed at the planned foundation grade should be overexcavated and recompacted to a relative compaction of 90 percent. Excavations close to or below the groundwater table may encounter wet and/or loose/soft ground conditions. Therefore, moisture-conditioning may include aeration of the soils to reduce the moisture content to near optimum. In addition, wet soils may be subject to pumping under heavy equipment loads. If pumping soils are encountered, a 2-foot-thick layer of crushed rock can be placed to mitigate the pumping soils.

The proposed mat foundation may be designed using a net allowable bearing capacity of 1,000 pounds per square foot (psf) bearing on a crushed rock/lean concrete base layer underlain by competent subgrade or surface grade. The total and differential settlements corresponding to this allowable bearing load are estimated to be on the order of 1 inch and ½ inch over a horizontal span of 40 feet, respectively. Based on our recent discussions with the structural engineer, we understand that the short term seismic bearing pressure would be on the order of 2,000 psf. In our opinion, the allowable bearing capacity may be increased to 2,000 psf when considering short term seismic loads.

Mat foundations typically experience some deflection due to loads placed on the mat and the reaction of the soils directly underlying the mat. A design modulus of subgrade reaction (K) of 70 tons per cubic foot may be used for the competent subgrade or surface grade soils in evaluating such deflections.

The mat foundation bearing on competent subgrade or surface grade may be designed using a coefficient of friction of 0.30, where the total frictional resistance equals the coefficient of friction times the dead load. For a mat embedded into the subgrade, a passive resistance value of 300 psf per foot of depth, up to a value of 3,000 psf, may be used. Passive resistance should be ignored for the upper 1 foot of embedment below the finished surface grade. The allowable lateral resistance can be taken Ninyo & Moore | Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions, Seal Beach, California | 207462002 | November 2, 2021 5 as the sum of the frictional resistance and passive resistance, as applicable based on the embedment condition, provided the passive resistance does not exceed one-half of the total allowable resistance. The passive resistance, if applicable, may be increased by one-third when considering loads of short duration such as wind or seismic forces.

LIMITATIONS
The geotechnical analyses presented in this letter report have been conducted in general accordance with current practice and the standard of care exercised by geotechnical consultants performing similar tasks in the project area. No warranty, expressed or implied, is made regarding Ninyo & Moore | Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions, Seal Beach, California | 207462002 | November 2, 2021 6 the conclusions, recommendations, and opinions presented in this report. There is no evaluation detailed enough to reveal every subsurface condition. Variations may exist and conditions not observed or described in this report may be encountered during construction. Uncertainties relative to subsurface conditions can be reduced through additional subsurface exploration. Additional subsurface evaluation will be performed upon request.

We appreciate the opportunity to be of continued service on this project.

Respectfully submitted,

NINYO & MOORE
Julianne Padgett, PE
Project Engineer
Michael Putt, PG, CEG
Principal Geologist
Soumitra Guha, PhD, PE, GE
Principal Engineer
JKP/MLP/SG/mlc
Attachments: References
Figure 1 – Acceleration Response Spectra
Ninyo & Moore | Lampson Avenue Well Water Tank Additions, Seal Beach, California | 207462002 | November 2, 2021 1